Topic 
1 
 Numbers 
0 to 10 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Recognise the major mathematical skills of whole numbers from 0 to 
10; 
2. Identify the pedagogical content knowledge of pre-number 
concepts, early numbers and place value of numbers from 0 to 10; 
3. Plan teaching and learning activities for pre-number concepts and 
early numbers from 0 to 10; and 
4. Determine and learn the strategies for teaching and learning 
numbers in order to achieve Âactive learningÊ in the classroom. 
 INTRODUCTION 
Beginning number concepts are much more complex than we realise. Just because 
children can say the words ÂoneÊ, ÂtwoÊ, ÂthreeÊ and so on, does not mean that they 
can count the numbers. We want children to think about what they are counting. 
Children can count numbers if they understand the words Âhow manyÊ. As 
teachers, we do not teach numerals in isolation with the quantity they represent 
because numerals are symbols that have meaning for children only when they are 
introduced as labels of quantities. In order to start teaching numbers effectively, it 
is important for you to have an overview of the mathematical skills of whole 
numbers. At the beginning of this topic, you will learn about the history of 
various numeration systems and basic number concepts such as the meanings of 
ÂnumberÊ, ÂnumeralÊ and ÂdigitÊ. You will also learn about the stages of conceptual 
development for whole numbers including pre-number concepts and early 
numbers. Children learn to recognise and write numerals as they learn to develop 
early number concepts. In the second part of this topic, you will learn more about 
the strategies for the teaching and learning of numbers through a few samples of
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10 
2 
teaching and learning activities. You are also encouraged to hold discussions 
with your tutor and classmates. Some suggested activities for discussion are also 
given. 
PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE OF 
WHOLE NUMBERS: NUMBERS 0 TO 10 
1.1 
In this section, we will be focusing on the major mathematical skills for pre-number 
concepts and whole numbers 0 to 10 as follows: 
(a) Determine pre-number concepts; 
(b) Compare the values of whole numbers 1 to 10; 
(c) Recognise and name whole numbers 0 to 10; 
(d) Count, read and write whole numbers 0 to 10; 
(e) Determine the base-10 place value for each digit 0 to 10 ; and 
(f) Arrange whole numbers 1 to 10 in ascending and descending order. 
1.1.1 Pre-number Concepts 
The development of number concepts for children in kindergarten begins with 
pre-number concepts and emphasises on developing number sense  the ability 
to deal meaningfully with whole number ideas as opposed to memorising 
(Troutman, 2003). 
At this level, children are guided to interact with sets of things. As they interact, 
they sort, compare, make observations, see connections, tell, discuss ideas, ask 
and answer questions, draw pictures, write as well as build strategies. They begin 
to form and organise cognitive understanding. In short, children will have to 
learn the prerequisite skills needed as stated below: 
(a) Develop classification abilities by their physical attributes; 
(b) Compare the quantities of two sets of objects using one-to-one matching; 
(c) Determine quantitative relationships including Âas many asÊ, Âmore thanÊ 
and Âless thanÊ; 
(d) Arrange objects into a sequence according to size (small to big), length 
(short to long), height (short to tall) or width (thin to thick) and vice versa; 
and
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10  
3 
(e) Recognise repeating patterns and create patterns by copying repeating 
patterns using objects such as blocks, beads, etc. 
1.1.2 Early Numbers 
Mathematics starts with the counting of numbers. There are no historical records 
of the first uses of numbers, their names and their symbols. Various symbols are 
used to represent numbers based on their numeration systems. A numeration 
system consists of a set of symbols and the rules for combining the symbols. 
Different early numeration systems appeared to have originated from tallying. 
Ancient people measured things by drawing on cave walls, bricks, pottery or 
pieces of tree trunks to record their properties. At that time, ÂnumbersÊ were 
represented by using simple Âtally marksÊ (/). Some numeration systems 
including our present day system are shown in Table 1.1. 
Table 1.1: Early Number Representations 
Today 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 
Ancient 
Egypt 
Babylon 
Mayan . . . . . . . . . . 
. 
. . 
. . . 
. . . . 
About 5000 years ago, people in places of ancient civilisations began to use 
different symbols to represent numbers for counting. They created various 
numeration systems. For example, the Egyptian numeration system used picture 
symbols called hieroglyphics as illustrated in Figure 1.1.
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10 
4 
Figure 1.1: Egyptian hieroglyphics 
This is a base-10 system where each symbol represents a power of 10. 
What number is represented by the following illustration? 
2(10 000) + 1000 + 3(100) + 4(10) + 6 = 21 346 
Try writing the following numbers in hieroglyphics: 
(a) 245 
(b) 1 869 234 
On the other hand, the Babylonians used a base-60 system consisting of only two 
symbols as given below. 
one ten 
As such, the number 45 is represented as follows: 
4(10) + 5 = 45 
For numbers larger than 60, base-60 is used to represent numbers in the 
Babylonian Numeration System. 
Have fun computing the following illustrations: 
(a)
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10  
5 
(b) 
Apart from the nine symbols in Table 1.1, the Mayan Numeration System consists 
of 20 symbols altogether and is a base-20 system, as shown in Figure 1.2. 
Figure 1.2: Mayan numerals 
The following illustration depicts clearly the unique vertical place value format of 
the Mayan Numeration System, see Figure 1.3. 
Figure 1.3: Mayan number chart 
Source: Mayan number chart from http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Maya_numerals 
What number is represented thus? 
12 + 7(20) + 0(20.18) + 14(20.18.20) 
= 12 + 140 + 0 + 100800 = 100952
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10 
6 
Simple addition can be carried out by combining two or more sets of symbols as 
shown in the examples given below. Try computing these operations using 
Hindu-Arabic numerals. 
(a) 
(b) 
Solutions: 
(a) 6 + 8 = 14 
(b) {7 + 0(20) + 14(20.18) + 1(20.18.20)} + {14 + 0(20) + 3(20.18) + 2(20.18.20)} + {1 
+ 1(20) + 17(20.18) + 3(20.18.20)} 
= 7 + 0 + 5040 + 7200 + 14 + 0 + 1080 + 14400 + 1 + 20 + 6120 + 21600} 
= 55482 
The complexities of the above examples and illustrations of the various ancient 
numeration systems discussed in this section should help you to realise why they 
are no longer in use today. Table 1.2 shows some other famous historical 
numeration systems used to this day including the Roman Numeration System, 
Greek Numeration System and our Hindu-Arabic Numeration System. 
Table 1.2: Famous Number Representations 
Roman 
200 B.C. I II III IV V VI VII VIII IX 
Greek 500 
B.C. 
      z   
Hindu- 
Arabic 500 
A.D. 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 
Hindu- 
Arabic 976 
A.D. 
l 
 
7 8 9
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10  
7 
Along with the development of numbers, mathematics was further developed by 
famous mathematicians. The numeration system used today is based on the 
Hindu-Arabic numeration system. Can you explain why the Hindu-Arabic 
numeration system is being used today? 
At this point, you should have a clearer picture about the difference between a 
ÂnumberÊ, a ÂnumeralÊ and a ÂdigitÊ. The terms ÂnumberÊ, ÂnumeralÊ and ÂdigitÊ are 
all different. A number is an abstract idea that addresses the question, Âhow 
manyÊ and means Ârelated to quantityÊ, whereas a numeral is a symbol for 
representing a number that we can see, write or touch. Thus, numerals are names 
for numbers. A ÂdigitÊ refers to the type of numerals used in a numeration system. 
For example, our present numeration system is made up of only 10 different 
digits, that is, 0 to 9. 
SAMPLES OF TEACHING AND LEARNING 
ACTIVITIES 
1.2 
In this section, you will read about some samples of teaching and learning 
activities that you can implement in your classroom. 
1.2.1 Teaching Pre-number Concepts 
There are many pre-number concepts that children must acquire in order to 
develop good number sense. These are as follows: 
(a) Classify and sort things in terms of properties (e.g. colour, shape, size, etc.); 
(b) Compare two sets and find out whether one set has Âas many asÊ, Âmore 
thanÊ, or Âless thanÊ the other set; 
(c) Learn the concepts of Âone moreÊ and Âone lessÊ. 
(d) Order sets of objects according to a sequence according to size, length, 
height or width; and 
(e) Recognise and copy repeating patterns using objects such as blocks, beads, 
etc. 
Now, let us look at some activities that you can do with your pupils.
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10 
8 
Activity 1: Classifying Things by Their Properties 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of this activity, your pupils should be able to: 
(a) Classify things by their general and specific properties. 
Materials: 
 Sets of toys; 
 Sets of pattern blocks (various shapes, colour, size, etc.); and 
 Plastic containers or boxes. 
Procedure: 
(a) Classify Objects by Their General Properties 
Teacher asks children to work in groups of five and distributes four types of 
toys (e.g. car, train, boat and aeroplane) to each group. 
Teacher says: „LetÊs work together, look at the toys.‰ 
Teacher asks: „Which are the toys that can fly? Which one can sail in the 
sea? Which is the longest vehicle? Which is the smallest vehicle? Which is 
the fastest vehicle? Which is the slowest vehicle?‰ 
Children respond to questions asked. 
In this activity, children should be asked why they chose that specific object 
and not the others. Teacher listens to childrenÊs responses. 
(b) Classify Objects by Their Specific Properties 
Teacher distributes a set of pattern blocks with different shapes, sizes and 
colours to each group, see Figure 1.4.
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10  
9 
Figure 1.4: Pattern blocks 
(i) Teacher says: „Firstly, classify these objects by their shapes.‰ 
„Put the objects into the boxes: A, B, C and D according to their 
shapes.‰ (e.g. circle, triangle, rectangle and rhombus, see Figure 1.5 
(a). 
Figure 1.5 (a): Pattern blocks and containers 
(ii) Teacher says: „Secondly, classify these objects by their sizes.‰ 
„Put the objects into the boxes: A, B and C according to their sizes.‰ 
(e.g. small size in box A, medium size in box B and large size in box C 
with respect to their shapes, see Figure 1.5 (b). 
Figure 1.5 (b): Pattern blocks and containers
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10 
10 
(iii) Teacher says: „Lastly, classify these objects by their colours.‰ 
„Put the objects into the boxes: A, B, C, D, E and F according to their 
colours‰. (e.g. orange, blue, yellow, red, green and purple, see Figure 
1.5 (c). 
Figure 1.5 (c): Pattern blocks and containers 
At this stage, children will recognise that shape is the first property to consider, 
followed by size and colour. Children should be encouraged to find as many 
properties as they can when classifying objects. 
You can also try some other activities with the children such as classifying objects 
by their texture (smooth, rough and fuzzy) or by their size (short and long), etc. 
to prepare them to learn about putting objects into a sequence, that is, the skill of 
ordering or seriation, which is more difficult than comparing since it involves 
making many decisions. 
For example, when ordering three drinking straws of different lengths from short 
to long, the middle one must be longer than the one before it, but shorter than the 
one after it. 
Next, in Activity 2, your pupils will be asked to find the relationship between two 
sets of black and white objects. Let us now take a look at Activity 2.
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10  
11 
Activity 2: Finding the Relationship between Two Sets of Objects 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of this activity, your pupils should be able to: 
(a) Match items on a one-to-one matching basis; 
(b) Understand and master the concept of Âas many asÊ, Âmore thanÊ and Âless 
thanÊ; and 
(c) Compare the number of objects between two sets. 
Materials: 
 Picture cards (A, B, C and D); 
 Erasers; and 
 Pencils, etc. 
Procedure: 
(i) One-to-One Matching Correspondence 
Children are presented with two picture cards, (Card A and Card B) 
consisting of the same number of objects. 
Teacher demonstrates how the relationship of Âas many asÊ can be 
introduced using a one-to-one matching basis as follows, see Figure 1.6 (a): 
Figure 1.6 (a): One-to-one matching correspondence 
Teacher asks: „Are there as many moons as stars? Why?‰ 
(ii) As Many As, More and Less 
Teacher takes out a star from Card B and asks, „Are there as many moons 
as stars now? Why? How can you tell? etc.‰ See example in Figure 1.6 (b).
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10 
12 
Figure 1.6 (b): One-to-one matching correspondence 
Teacher guides the children to build the concept of ÂmoreÊ and ÂlessÊ. For 
example, which card has more moons? Which card has fewer stars? 
(iii) More Than, Less Than 
The children are presented with another two picture cards (Card C and 
Card D) with different numbers of objects. Teacher guides the children to 
compare the number of objects between the two sets and introduces the 
concept of Âmore thanÊ and Âless thanÊ. 
Teacher says: „Can you match each marble in Card C one-to-one with a 
marble in Card D? Why?‰ 
Teacher says: „Children, we can say that Card C has more marbles than 
Card D, or, Card D has less marbles than Card C‰. 
In addition, teacher can ask her pupils to do a group activity as follows: 
Teacher says: „Sit together with your friends in a group‰. „Everybody, show all 
the erasers and pencils you have to your friends‰. „Can you compare the number 
of objects and tell your friends using the words, Âmore thanÊ or Âless thanÊ?‰ 
Pupils should be able to respond as such: „I have more erasers than you but, I 
have fewer pencils than you‰, „You have more erasers than me‰, etc. 
Do try and think of other appropriate activities you can plan and implement to 
help children to acquire pre-number experience or concepts essential for 
developing good number sense prior to learning whole numbers. 
ACTIVITY 1.1 
Which of the pupilsÊ learning activities do you like the most? Explain.
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10  
13 
1.2.2 Teaching Early Numbers 
This section elaborates on the activities which you can implement with your 
pupils to help them understand the concept of early numbers. 
Activity 3: Name Numbers and Recognise Numerals 1 to 10 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Name and recognise numerals 1 to 5. 
Materials: 
 Picture cards (0 to 5); 
 Number cards (1 to 5); and 
 PowerPoint slides. 
Procedure: 
(a) Clap and Count 
Teacher claps and counts 1 to 5. Teacher and pupils clap and count a series 
of claps together. ÂClapÊ, say ÂoneÊ. ÂClapÊ, ÂClapÊ, say ÂoneÊ, ÂtwoÊ. 
Teacher asks pupils to clap twice and count one, two; Clap four times and 
count one, two, three, four, etc. Pupils respond accordingly. Do the same 
until number 5 is done. 
(b) Slide Show 
Teacher displays a series of PowerPoint slides one by one as shown in 
Figure 1.7. The numerals come out after the objects. 
Figure 1.7: Picture numeral cards
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10 
14 
Teacher asks: „How many balls are there in this slide?‰ and says, „Let us 
count together.‰ 
Teacher points to the balls and asks pupils to count one by one. Then, point 
to the numeral and say the number name. Guide pupils to respond (e.g. 
„There is one ball‰, „There are two balls‰, etc.). Repeat with different 
numbers and different pictures of objects. 
(c) Class Activity 
(i) Teacher shows a picture card and asks pupils to stick the correct 
number card beside it on the white board. e.g.: 
Teacher says: „Look at the picture. How many clocks are there?‰ 
Pupils respond accordingly. Then teacher asks a pupil to choose the 
correct number card and stick it beside the picture card on the white 
board. 
Teacher repeats the steps until the fifth picture card is used. At the 
end, teacher asks pupils to arrange the picture cards in ascending 
order (1 to 5) and then asks them to count accordingly. 
(ii) Teacher shows a number card and asks the pupils to stick the correct 
picture card beside it on the white board. e.g.: 
Teacher says: „Look at the card. What is the number written on the 
card?‰
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10  
15 
Pupils respond accordingly. Then teacher asks a pupil to choose the 
correct picture card and stick it beside the number card on the white 
board. 
Teacher repeats the steps until the fifth numeral card is done. At the 
end, teacher asks pupils to arrange the number cards in ascending or 
descending order (e.g. 1 to 5 or 5 to 1) before asking them to count in 
sequence and at random. 
(d) Group Activity 
Pupils sit in groups of five. Teacher distributes five picture cards of objects 
and five corresponding numeral cards (1 to 5). 
Teacher says: „Choose a pupil in your group. Put up the number five card 
in his/her left hand and the correct picture card on his/her right hand. 
Help him/her to get the correct answer.‰ 
Teacher asks the group to choose another pupil to do the same for the rest 
of the cards. Repeat for all the numbers 1 to 5. 
Teacher distributes a worksheet. 
Teacher says: „LetÊs sing a song about busy people together.‰ (refer to 
Appendix 1) 
Activity 4: Read and Write Numbers, 1 to 10 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Read and write numbers from 1 to 10. 
Materials: 
 Picture cards; 
 Cut-out number cards (1  5); 
 Number names (name cards, one to five); and 
 Plasticine.
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10 
16 
Procedure: 
(i) Numbers 1 to 5 
Teacher shows the picture cards with numbers, 1 to 5 in sequence. Pupils 
count the objects in the picture card, point to the number and say the 
number name out loud. e.g.: 
Teacher sticks the picture card on the writing board. Repeat this activity for 
all the picture and number cards, that is, until the fifth card is done. 
(ii) Technique of Writing Numbers 
Teacher demonstrates in sequence the technique of writing numerals, 1 to 5. 
Firstly, teacher writes the number Â1Ê on the writing board step by step as 
follows: e.g.: 
1 
Teacher writes the number in the air followed by the pupils. Repeat until 
number 5 is done. 
Repeat until the pupils are able to write numbers in the correct way. 
(iii) Plasticine Numerals 
Teacher distributes some plasticine to pupils and says: „Let us build the 
numerals with plasticine for numbers 1 to 5. Arrange your numbers in 
sequence.‰
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10  
17 
(iv) Cut-out Number Card 
Teacher gives pupils the cut-out number cards, 1 to 5. Then, teacher asks 
them to trace the shape of each number on a piece of paper. e.g.: 
Teacher distributes Worksheet 1 (refer to Appendix 2). 
Note: This strategy can also be used to teach the writing of numbers, from 6 
to 10. 
Can you write these numbers in the correct way? 
Activity 5: The Concept of Zero 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Understand the concept of ÂzeroÊ or ÂnothingÊ; and 
(b) Determine, name and write the number zero. 
Materials: 
 Picture cards; and 
 Three boxes and five balls (Given to each group). 
Procedure: 
(i) Teacher shows three picture cards.
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10 
18 
Teacher asks: „How many rabbits are there in Cage A, B and C?‰ 
Pupils respond: „There is one rabbit in Cage B, two rabbits in Cage C and 
no rabbits in Cage A.‰ 
Teacher introduces the number Â0Ê to represent Âno rabbitsÊ or ÂnothingÊ. 
(ii) Teacher distributes some balls into three boxes. 
Teacher asks: How many balls are there in Box A, Box B and Box C 
respectively?‰ 
Teacher guides pupils to determine the concept of ÂzeroÊ or ÂnothingÊ 
according to the number of balls in Box B. 
Teacher reads and writes the digit Â0‰ (zero), followed by pupils. 
Activity 6: Count On (Ascending) and Count Back (Descending) in Ones, from 1 
to 10 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Count on in ones from 1 to 10; 
(b) Count back in ones from 10 to 1; and 
(c) Determine the base-10 place value for each digit from 1 to 10. 
Materials: 
 Number cards (1  10); 
 Picture cards; and 
 PowerPoint slides.
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10  
19 
Procedure: 
(a) Picture Cards 
(i) Ascending Order 
Teacher flashes picture cards and the corresponding number cards in 
ascending order, (i.e. 1 to 10). Pupils count the objects in the picture 
cards and say the numbers. Teacher sticks the cards on the whiteboard 
in sequence. e.g.: 
Continue until the 10th picture card is done. 
Pupils are asked to count on in ones from 1 to 10. The activity is 
repeated. 
(ii) Descending Order 
Teacher flashes picture cards and the corresponding number cards in 
descending order, (i.e. 10 to 1). Pupils count the objects in the picture 
cards and say the numbers. Teacher sticks the cards on the whiteboard 
in sequence. e.g.:
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10 
20 
Continue until the first picture card is done. 
Pupils are asked to count back in ones from 10 to 1. The activity is 
repeated. 
(b) Slide Show 
(i) Ascending Order 
Pupils are presented a series of slides (PowerPoint presentation): 
Teacher asks pupils to count and say the number name, e.g. „one‰. 
Teacher clicks a button to show the second stage and asks pupils to 
count and say the number.
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10  
21 
Continue until the 10th stage. Repeat until the pupils are able to count 
on in ones from 1 to 10. 
(ii) Descending Order 
Teacher repeats the process as above but in descending order (i.e. 10 
to 1). 
Teacher presents another slide show, see Figure 1.8: 
Figure 1.8: Number ladder 
(c) Teacher Distributes a Worksheet 
(i) Jump on the Number Blocks 
Teacher asks pupils to sing the ÂNumbers Up and DownÊ song while 
jumping on the number blocks around the pond, that is, counting on 
or counting back again and again! 
„Let us sing the ÂNumbers Up and DownÊ song together‰ (see Figure 
1.9). 
Figure 1.9: Number blocks
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10 
22 
(ii) Arranging Pupils in Sequence 
Teacher selects two groups of 10 pupils and gives each group a set of 
number cards, 1 to 10, see Figure 1.10. Teacher asks them to stand in 
front of the class in groups. Teacher asks both groups to arrange 
themselves in order. The group that finishes first is the winner. The 
losing group is asked to count on and count back the numbers in ones. 
Repeat the game. 
Figure 1.10: Number cards 
(iii) Going Up and Down the Stairs 
Pupils are asked to count on in ones while going up the stairs and 
count back in ones while going down the stairs. 
 As a mathematics teacher, you have to generate as many ideas as possible 
about the teaching and learning of whole numbers. There is no „one best 
way‰ to teach whole numbers. 
 As we know, the goal for children working on this topic is to go beyond 
simply counting from one to 10 and recognising numerals. The emphasis here 
is developing number sense, number relationships and the facility with 
counting. 
 The samples of teaching and learning activities in this topic will help you to 
understand basic number skills associated with childrenÊs early learning of 
mathematics. 
 They need to acquire ongoing experiences resulting from these activities in 
order to develop consistency and accuracy with counting skills.
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10  
23 
Ascending order 
Descending order 
Digit 
Early numbers 
Number 
Numeral 
One-to-one matching correspondence 
Pre-number Concepts 
Seriation 
Whole numbers 
1. Describe the chronological development of numbers from ancient civilisation 
until now. Present your answer in a mind map. 
2. Teaching number concepts using concrete materials can help pupils learn 
more effectively. Explain. 
1. Pupils might have difficulties in understanding the meaning of 0 and 10 
compared to the numbers 1 to 9. Explain. 
2. Learning outcomes: At the end of the lesson, pupils will be able to count 
numbers in ascending order (1 to 9) and descending order (9 to 1) either 
through: 
(a) Picture cards first and number cards later; or 
(b) Number cards first and picture cards later. 
Suggest the best strategy that can be used in the teaching and learning 
process of numbers according to the above learning outcomes.
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10 
24 
APPENDIX 
Busy People 
One busy person sweeping the floor 
Two busy people closing the door 
Three busy people washing babyÊs socks 
Four busy people lifting the rocks 
Five busy people washing the bowls 
Six busy people stirring ÂdodolÊ 
Seven busy people chasing the mouse 
Eight busy people painting the house 
Nine busy people sewing clothes 
Resource: Pusat Perkembangan Kurikulum 
Numbers Up and Down 
I'm learning how to count, 
From zero up to ten. 
I start from zero every time 
And I count back down again. 
Zero, one, two, three, 
Four and five, I say. 
Six, seven, eight and nine, 
Now I'm at ten ~ Hooray! 
But, I'm not finished, no not yet, 
I got right up to ten. 
Now I must count from ten back down, 
To get to zero again! 
Ten, nine, eight, seven, 
Six and five, I say. 
Four, three, two, one, 
I'm back at zero ~ Hooray! 
Resource: Mary Flynn's Songs 4 Teachers
TOPIC 1 NUMBERS 0 TO 10  
25 
WORKSHEET 
How many seeds are there in each apple? 
Count and write the numbers.
Topic 
2 
 Addition 
within 10 and 
Place Value 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Identify the major mathematical skills related to addition within 10 
and place value; 
2. Recognise the pedagogical content knowledge related to addition 
within 10 and place value; and 
3. Plan teaching and learning activities for addition within 10 and 
introduction to the place value concept. 
 INTRODUCTION 
Adding is a quick and efficient way of counting. Sometimes we notice that 
adding and counting are alike, but adding is faster than counting. You will also 
see that addition is more powerful than mere counting. It has its own special 
vocabulary or words, and is easy to learn because only a few simple rules are 
used in the addition of whole numbers. When teaching addition to young pupils, 
it is important that you recognise the meaningful learning processes which can be 
acquired through real life experiences. The activities in this topic are designed as 
an introduction to addition. It provides the kind of practice that most young 
children need. What do children need to know in addition? Children do not gain 
understanding of addition just by working with symbols such as Â+Ê and Â=Ê. You 
have to present the concept of addition through real-world experiences because 
symbols will only be meaningful when they are associated with these 
experiences. Young children must be able to see the connection between the 
process of addition and the world they live in. They need to learn that certain 
symbols and words such as ÂaddÊ, ÂsumÊ, ÂtotalÊ and ÂequalÊ are used as tools in 
everyday life.
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE  
27 
This topic is divided into two main sections. The first section deals with 
pedagogical skills pertaining to addition within 10 and includes an introduction 
to the concept of place-value. The second section provides some samples of 
teaching and learning activities for addition within 10. You will find that by 
reading the input in this topic, you will be able to teach addition to young pupils 
more effectively and meaningfully. 
PEDAGOGICAL SKILLS OF ADDITION 
WITHIN 10 
2.1 
In this section, we will discuss further the pedagogical skills of addition within 
10. This section will look into the concept of 'more than', teaching and learning 
addition through addition stories, acting out stories to go with equations, number 
bonds up to 10, reading and writing addition equations and finally reinforcement 
activities. 
2.1.1 The Concept of ‘More Than’ 
It is important for pupils to understand and use the vocabulary of comparing and 
arranging numbers or quantities before learning about addition. We can start by 
comparing two numbers. For example, a teacher gives four oranges (or any other 
concrete object) each to two pupils. The teacher then gives another orange to one 
of the pupils and asks them to count the number of oranges each of them has. 
Teacher: How many oranges do you have? Who has more oranges? 
Teacher introduces the concept of Âmore thanÊ, Âand one moreÊ as well as Âadd one 
moreÊ for addition by referring to the example above. The pupils are guided to 
say the following sentences to reinforce their understanding of addition with 
respect to the above concept. 
e.g.: Five oranges are more than four oranges. Five is more than four. 
Four and one more is five. 
Four add one more is five. 
Teacher repeats with other numbers using different picture cards or counters and 
pupils practise using the sentence structures given above.
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 
28 
2.1.2 Teaching and Learning Addition Through 
Addition Stories 
Initially, addition can be introduced through story problems that children can act 
out. Early story situations should be simple and straightforward. Here is an 
example of a simple story problem for teaching addition with two addends: 
Salmah has three balls. Her mother bought two more balls for her. How many 
balls does Salmah have altogether? 
At this stage, children have to make connections between the real world and the 
process of addition by interpreting the addition stories. Children must read and 
write the equations that describe the process they are working with. The concept 
of ÂadditionÊ should be introduced using real things or concrete objects. At the 
same time, they have to read and write the equations using common words, such 
as ÂandÊ, ÂmakeÊ, as well as ÂequalsÊ as shown in Figure 2.1: 
Figure 2.1: Acting out addition stories 
However, you have to study effective ways in which your pupils can act out the 
stories. Based on the situations given, pupils can act out the stories in different 
ways as follows: 
(a) Act out stories using real things as counters such as marbles, ice-cream 
sticks, top-up cards, etc.; 
(b) Act out stories using counters and counting boards (e.g. trees, oceans. 
roads, beaches, etc.); 
(c) Act out stories using models such as counting blocks; and 
(d) Act out stories using imagination (without real things). 
Figure 2.2 shows some appropriate teaching aids for teaching and learning 
addition.
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE  
29 
Figure 2.2: Acting out addition stories using appropriate teaching aids 
2.1.3 Acting Out Stories to go with Equations 
Figure 2.3 suggests a way for acting out stories to go with equations using the 
ÂplusÊ and ÂequalÊ signs: 
Figure 2.3: Flowchart for ÂActing out stories to go with equationsÊ
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 
30 
After pupils are able to write equations according to teacher-directed stories, they 
can begin writing equations independently using suitable materials (refer to 
Figure 2.2). Here are some examples of how to use the materials. 
Example 1: Counting Board (e.g. Aquarium) 
I have two clown fish in my aquarium. My mother bought three goldfish 
yesterday. How many fish do I have altogether? See Figure 2.4. 
2 clown fish and 3 gold fish make 5 fish altogether. 
2 + 3 = 5 
Figure 2.4: Story problem 
ACTIVITY 2.1 
Use the above example to show that 2 + 3 = 3 + 2 = 5. 
2.1.4 Number Bonds Up to 10 
Activity 1: Count On and Count Back in Ones, from 1 to 10 
There are three boys playing football. Then another 
boy joins them. How many boys are playing football 
altogether? See Figure 2.5. 
3 + 1 = 4 
Figure 2.5: Count on: Using an Abacus 
Teachers can also use number cards as a number line. The teacher reads or writes 
the story problem and then begins a discussion with pupils on how to use the 
number line to answer the question as in the example shown in Figure 2.6:
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE  
31 
„Four pupils and three pupils are seven pupils‰ 
„Four plus three equals seven‰ 
4 + 3 = 7 
Figure 2.6: Count on: Aligning number cards to form a number line 
Teachers are encouraged to teach the addition of two addends within 5 first, 
followed by addition within 6 until 10. Pupils need to be ÂimmersedÊ in the 
activities and go through the experience several times. By repeating the tasks, 
pupils will learn the different number combinations for bonds up to 10 efficiently. 
Activity 2: Count On and Count Back in Ones, from 1 to 10 
The activities on number bonds provide opportunities for teachers to apply a 
variety of addition strategies. The objective of these activities is to recognise the 
addition of pairs of numbers up to 10. You can start by asking your pupils to 
build a tower of 10 cubes and then break it into two towers, for example, a tower 
of four cubes and a tower of six cubes, (refer Figure 2.7) or any pairs of numbers 
adding up to 10. 
Example: 
Figure 2.7: Number towers 
Guide pupils to produce addition pairs up to 10, e.g. 4 + 6 = 10 or 6 + 4 = 10. 
Repeat with other pairs of numbers. Ask pupils what patterns they can see before 
getting them to produce all the possible pairs that add up to 10. Record each 
addition pair in a table as shown in Table 2.1:
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 
32 
Table 2.1: Sample Table for ÂAddition ActivityÊ: Addition Pairs Up to 10 
After Breaking Height of Tower Before into Two Towers 
Breaking into Two Towers 
(Cubes) 
Height of First 
Tower (Cubes) 
Height of Second 
Tower (Cubes) 
10 0 10 
10 1 9 
10 2 8 
10 3 
10 4 
10 5 
10 6 
10 7 
10 8 
10 9 
10 10 
Discuss the results with pupils and ask them to practise saying the number bonds 
repeatedly to facilitate instant and spontaneous recall in order to master the basic 
facts of addition up to 10. 
To develop the skill, the teacher should first break the tower of 10 cubes into two 
parts. Show one part of the tower and hide the other. Then, ask pupils to state the 
height of the hidden tower. To extend the skill, you may progressively ask the 
pupils to learn how to add other pairs of numbers, such as 9, 8, 7 and so on. 
ACTIVITY 2.2 
What is the Âcommutative law in additionÊ? How do you introduce this 
concept to your pupils? Explain clearly the strategy used for the teaching 
and learning of the commutative law in addition. 
2.1.5 Reading and Writing Addition Equations 
As we know, there are two common methods of writing the addition of numbers, 
either horizontally or vertically, as shown below:
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE  
33 
(a) Adding horizontally, in row form (i.e. Writing and counting numbers from 
left to right). 
Example: 4 + 5 = 9 
The activities discussed above are mostly based on this method, which are 
suitable for adding two single numbers. 
(b) Adding vertically, in column form (i.e. Writing and counting numbers from 
top to bottom). 
Example: 3 
+ 4 
7 
This method is suitable for finding a sum of two or more large numbers 
because putting large numbers in columns makes the process of adding 
easier compared to putting them in a row. 
ACTIVITY 2.3 
Numbers are most easily added by placing them in columns. Describe 
how you can create suitable teaching aids to enhance the addition of two 
addends using this method. 
2.1.6 Reinforcement Activities 
To be an effective mathematics teacher, you are encouraged to plan small group 
or individual activities as reinforcement activities for addition within 10. Here are 
some examples of learning activities that you can do with your pupils. 
(a) Number Shapes 
Have pupils take turns rolling a number cube to see how many counters 
they have to place on their number shapes. Then they fill in the remaining 
spaces with counters of different colours. Finally, they describe the number 
combinations formed, as illustrated in Figure 2.8. Repeat with different 
number shapes.
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 
34 
Figure 2.8: Number shapes 
(b) Number Trains 
Let pupils fill their number-train outlines (e.g. 7, 8 or 9) with connecting 
cubes of two different colours. Ask them to describe the number 
combinations formed. See Figure 2.9. 
Figure 2.9: Number train 
In addition, pupils can also describe the number combination formed as Âthree 
plus three plus two equals eightÊ, that is (3 + 3 + 2 = 8). 
PLACE VALUE 
2.2 
This section teaches you how to introduce the place-value concept to your pupils. 
2.2.1 Counting from 11 to 20 
Pupils will be able to read, write and count numbers up to 20 through the same 
activities as for learning numbers up to 10 covered in Topic 1. Similar teaching 
aids and methods can be used. The only difference is that we should now have 
more counters, say, at least 20. In this section, we will not be focusing on counting 
numbers from 11 to 20 because it would just be repeating the process of counting 
numbers from 1 to 10. You are, however, encouraged to have some references on 
the strategies of teaching and learning numbers from 11 to 20.
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE  
35 
ACTIVITY 2.4 
Describe a strategy you would use for the teaching and learning of 
ÂCounting from 11 to 20Ê. 
2.2.2 Teaching and Learning about Place Value 
The concept of place value is not easily understood by pupils. Although they can 
read and write numbers up to 20 or beyond, it does not mean that they know 
about the different values for each numeral in two-digit numbers. We are lucky 
because our number system requires us to learn only 10 different numerals. 
Pupils can easily learn how to write any number, no matter how large it is. Once 
pupils have discovered the patterns in the number system, the task of writing 
two-digit numbers and beyond is simplified enormously. They will encounter the 
same sequence of numerals, 0 to 9 over and over again. However, many pupils 
do not understand that numbers are constructed by organising quantities into 
groups of tens and ones, and the numerals change in value depending on their 
position in a number. 
In this section, you will be introduced to the concept of place value by forming 
and counting groups, recognising patterns in the number system and organising 
groups into tens and ones. The place-value concept can be taught in kindergarten 
in order to help pupils count large numbers in a meaningful way. 
You can start teaching place value by asking pupils to form and count 
manipulative materials, such as counting cubes, ice-cream sticks, beans and cups, 
etc. For example, ask pupils to count and group the connected cubes from 1 to 10 
placed either in a row or horizontally as shown in Figure 2.10. 
Figure 2.10: Connected cubes placed horizontally 
You can now introduce the concept of place value of ones and tens (10 ones) to 
your pupils. The following steps can be used to demonstrate the relationship 
between the numbers (11 to 19), tens and ones. The cubes can also be arranged in 
a column or vertically as shown below. Here, you are encouraged to use the 
enquiry method to help pupils familiarise themselves with the place-value of tens 
and ones illustrated as follows:
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 
36 
Example: 
Teacher asks: What number is 10 and one more? See Figure 2.11 (Pupils should 
respond with 11). 
Can you show me using the connecting cubes? 
The above step is repeated for numbers 12, 13, , 20. 
Figure 2.11: Connected cubes placed vertically 
In order to make your lesson more effective, you should use place-value boards 
or charts to help pupils organise their counters into tens and ones. A place-value 
board is a piece of thick paper or soft-board that is divided into two parts of 
different colours. The size of the board depends on the size of the counters used. 
An example of the place-value board is given in Figure 2.12: 
Figure 2.12: Place value board
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE  
37 
The repetition of the pattern for numbers 12 to 19 and 20 will make your pupils 
understand better and be more familiar with the concept of place value. They will 
be able to learn about counting numbers from 11 to 20 or beyond more 
meaningfully. At the same time, you can also relate the place-value concept to the 
addition process. For example, 1 tens and 2 ones make 12, which means 10 and 
two more make 12. 
ACTIVITY 2.5 
In groups of four, create some reinforcement activities for teaching 
numbers 11 to 20 using the place-value method. Describe clearly how you 
will conduct the activities using suitable Âhands-onÊ teaching aids. 
SAMPLES OF TEACHING AND LEARNING 
ACTIVITIES 
2.3 
This section provides some samples of teaching and learning activities you can 
carry out with your pupils to enhance their knowledge of addition within 10 and 
the place-value concept. 
Activity 1: Adding Using Patterns 
Learning Outcomes: 
At the end of this activity, your pupils should be able to: 
(a) Add two numbers up to 10 using patterns; 
(b) Read and write equations for addition of numbers using common words; 
and 
(c) Read and write equations for addition of numbers using symbols and signs. 
Materials: 
 Picture cards; and 
 PowerPoint slides.
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 
38 
Procedure: 
(a) Adding Using Patterns (in Rows) 
(i) Teacher divides the class into 5 groups of 6 pupils, and gives 10 
oranges to each group. Teacher then asks each group to count the 
oranges, see Figure 2.13. 
Teacher says: „Can you arrange the oranges so that you can count 
more easily?‰ Discuss with your friends. 
Teacher says: „Now, take a look at this picture card.‰ 
Figure 2.13: Picture card: Addition using patterns 
(ii) Teacher says: „Can you see the pattern? Let us count in groups of 
fives instead of counting on in ones.‰ 
For example: Five and five equals ten, or 5 + 5 = 10 
(iii) Teacher says: „Now, let us look at another pattern. How many eggs 
are there in the picture given below (see Figure 2.14)?‰ 
Figure 2.14: Picture card: Addition using patterns (in rows) 
(iv) Teacher says: „Did you count every egg to find out how many there 
are altogether? Or did you manage to see the pattern and count along 
one row first to get 4, and then add with another row of 4 to make 8 
eggs altogether?‰ 
„Well done, if you have done so!‰ 
Let your pupils add using different patterns of different numbers of objects 
with the help of PowerPoint slides. Guide your pupils to read and write 
equations of addition of numbers in words, symbols and signs (You may 
discuss how to write the story-board of your PowerPoint presentation).
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE  
39 
(b) Adding Using Patterns (in Columns) 
(i) Teacher says: „Let us look at the pictures and try to recognise the 
patterns (see Figure 2.15). Discuss with your friends.‰ 
Figure 2.15: Picture cards 
(ii) Teacher discusses the patterns with pupils. For example, teacher 
shows the third picture [Picture (c)] and tells that it can be divided 
into two parts, namely, the top and bottom parts as shown in Figure 
2.16: 
Figure 2.16: Picture card: Addition using patterns (in columns) 
(iii) This is a way of showing how to teach addition using columns by the 
inquiry-discovery method. As a conclusion, the teacher explains to 
the pupils that arranging the objects in patterns will make it easier to 
add them. Using columns to add also makes the addition of large 
numbers easier and faster. 
(c) Teacher distributes a worksheet on addition using patterns (in rows or in 
columns).
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 
40 
Activity 2: Addition within the Highest Total of 10 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of this activity, your pupils should be able to: 
(a) Add using fingers; 
(b) Add by combining two groups of objects; and 
(c) Solve simple problems involving addition within 10. 
Materials: 
 Fingers; 
 Counting board (tree); 
 Picture cards; 
 Number cards; 
 Counters; 
 Storybooks; 
 Apples; and 
 Other concrete objects, etc. 
Procedure: 
(a) Addition Using Fingers 
(i) Initially, use fingers to practise adding two numbers as a method of 
working out the addition of two groups of objects, see Figure 2.17. 
e.g.: 
Figure 2.17: Finger addition
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE  
41 
(b) Addition of Two Groups of Objects 
(i) Teacher puts three green apples on the right side of the tree and 
another four red apples on the left side. Teacher asks pupils to count 
the number of green apples and red apples respectively. 
(ii) Teacher asks: „How many green apples are there? How many red 
apples are there?‰ 
(iii) Teacher tells and asks: „Put all the apples at the centre of the tree. 
Count on in ones together. How many apples are there altogether?‰ 
(iv) Teacher guides them to say and write the mathematical sentence as 
shown: „Three apples and four apples make seven apples‰. 
(v) Repeat with different numbers of apples or objects. Introduce the 
concept of plus and equals in a mathematical sentence. 
e.g. „There are two green apples and three red apples in Box A.‰ 
„There are five apples altogether.‰ 
„Two plus three equals five.‰ 
(vi) Teacher sticks the picture cards on the whiteboard. Encourage pupils 
to add by counting on in ones (e.g. 4 ... 5, 6 ,7) and guide them to say 
that „Four plus three equals seven‰ (see Figure 2.18). 
Figure 2.18: Picture card: Addition of two groups of objects 
(vii) Introduce the symbols for representing „plus‰ and „equals‰ in a 
number sentence. Ask them to stick the correct number cards below 
the picture cards to form an addition equation as above. Repeat this 
step using different numbers. 
(c) Problem Solving in Addition 
(i) Teacher shows three balls in the box and asks pupils to put in some 
more balls to make it 10 balls altogether.
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 
42 
(ii) Teacher asks: „How many balls do you need to make up 10? How did 
you get the answer?‰ 
Let them discuss in groups using some counters. Ask them to explain 
how they came up with their answers. 
(iii) Repeat the above steps with different pairs of numbers. 
(iv) Teacher discusses the following problem with the pupils. 
Sarah has to read six story books this semester. If she has finished 
reading four books, how many more story books has she got to 
read? 
(v) Teacher asks them to discuss the answer in groups. Encourage them 
to work with models or counters and let them come up with their own 
ideas for solving the problem. For example: 
(Note: They can also use mental calculation to solve the problem.) 
Activity 3: Reinforcement Activity (Game) 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of this activity, your pupils should be able to: 
(a) Complete the addition table given; and 
(b) Add two numbers shown at the toss of two dices up to a highest total of 10. 
Materials: 
 Laminated Chart (Addition Table  Table 1.2); 
 Two dices for each group; and 
 Crayons or colour pencils.
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE  
43 
Procedure: 
(i) Teacher guides pupils to complete the addition table given. (Print out the 
table in A4 size paper and laminate it). You can also use the table to explain 
the additive identity (i.e. A + 0 = 0 + A = A). 
Table 2.2: Adding Squares 
+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 
0 
1 
2 
3 
4 
5 
6 
7 
8 
9 
Instructions for Game: 
(i) Toss two dices at one go. Add the numbers obtained and check your answer 
from the table. 
(ii) Colour the numbers 10 in green (Table 2.2). List down all the pairs adding 
up to 10. 
(iii) Colour the numbers totalling 9 in red. List down all pairs adding up to 9. 
(iv) Continue with other pairs of numbers using different colours for different 
sums.
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 
44 
Activity 4: Place Value and Ordering 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Read and write numerals from 0 to 20; 
(b) Explain the value represented by each digit in a two-digit number; and 
(c) Use vocabulary for comparing and ordering numbers up to 20. 
Materials: 
 Connecting cubes; 
 Counting board; 
 Place-value block/frame; and 
 Counters. 
Procedure: 
(a) Groups of Tens 
(i) Teacher divides the class into 6 groups of 5 pupils each. Teacher 
distributes some connecting cubes (say, at least 40 cubes) to each 
group. 
(ii) Teacher asks the following questions and pupils are required to 
answer them using the connecting cubes: 
 What number is one more than 6?, 8?, and 9? 11?, 17? and 19? 
 What number comes after 5?, 7?, and 9? 12?, 16? and 19? 
 Which number is more, 7 or 9?, 3 or 7?, 14 or 11? etc. 
e.g.: 14 is more than 11 as shown in Figure 2.19. 
Figure 2.19: Representing numbers using connecting cubes
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE  
45 
 16 is one more than a number. What is that number? 
 Repeat the above steps with different numbers. 
(b) Place Value and Ordering 
(i) Teacher introduces a place-value block and asks pupils to count 
beginning with number 1 by putting a counter into the first column 
(see Figure 2.20 (a). Teacher asks them to put one more counter on the 
board in that order. Repeat until number 9 is obtained. Teacher then 
introduces the concept of „ones‰. 
1 ones represents 1 
2 ones represent 2, ..., 9 ones represent 9 
Figure 2.20 (a): Representing numbers with place-value block and counters 
(ii) Teacher asks: „What is the number after 10? How do you represent 
number 11 on the place-value block?‰ 
Teacher introduces the concept of „tens‰ and „ones‰ as follows, see 
Figure 2.20 (b):
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 
46 
Figure 2.20 (b): Representing numbers with place-value block and counters 
(iii) Teacher asks pupils to put the correct number of counters into the 
correct column to represent the numbers 11, 12, etc. until 20. 
(iv) Teacher asks pupils to complete Table 1.3. 
Table 2.3: Place Value 
Number Tens Ones Number Tens Ones 
11 1 3 
12 9 
13 17 
16 14 4 
19 1 8 
20 
15 1 
(v) Teacher distributes a worksheet to reinforce the concept of place value 
learnt. 
 A teacher should know his/her pupilsÊ levels of proficiency when applying 
strategies to solve problems related to addition. 
 Problem solving related to addition depends on pupilsÊ ability to work based 
on their counting skills.
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE  
47 
 At an early stage, it is enough if they could work using counting all or 
counting on. 
 However, you have to guide and encourage them to work by seeing the 
relationship or answer by knowing and mastering the number combinations 
or number bonds. 
Adding 
Addition 
Equation 
Place Value 
Sum 
Plus 
1. An effective way to teach addition is to ask pupils to act out the stories in 
real life using their imagination (without real things) and their own ideas. 
Elaborate using one example. 
2. Describe clearly how you would teach addition up to 10 involving zero 
using real materials. 
3. Counting numbers from 11 to 20 should be taught after pupils are 
introduced to the concept of place value. Give your comments on this. 
Based on the following learning outcome, „At the end of the lesson, pupils will be 
able to count numbers from 11 to 20 using place-value blocks‰, suggest the best 
strategy or method that can be used in the teaching and learning process to 
achieve this learning outcome.
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 
48 
APPENDIX 
WORKSHEET 
(a) Count and add. 
(i) 
(ii) 
(b) Count and add. 
(c) Draw the correct number of fish on each plate and complete the equation.
TOPIC 2 ADDITION WITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE  
49 
(d) Match the following. 
(e) Match the following (Read and add).
Topic 
3 
 Subtraction 
within 10 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Recognise the major mathematical skills pertaining to subtraction 
within 10; 
2. Identify the pedagogical content knowledge pertaining to subtraction 
within 10; and 
3. Plan teaching and learning activities for subtraction within 10. 
 INTRODUCTION 
This topic will provide you with the instruction and practice you need to 
understand about subtraction. Beginning with the comprehension of basic skills 
in subtraction, this topic will cover various strategies for teaching and learning 
subtraction. The step-by-step approach used in this topic will make it easy for 
you to understand the ideas about teaching and learning subtraction especially at 
kindergarten level. As in all other topics, some examples of teaching-learning 
activities are also given. They include several classroom activities incorporating 
the use of concrete materials and a variety of methods such as inquiry-discovery, 
demonstration, simulation, etc. The inquiry-discovery method comprises 
activities such as planning, investigating, analysing and discovering. It is very 
important that pupils take an active part in the teaching-learning activities 
because by doing mathematics, they will learn more meaningfully and 
effectively.
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10  
51 
PEDAGOGICAL SKILLS OF SUBTRACTION 
WITHIN 10 
3.1 
Subtraction in simple words means taking away. When you take objects away 
from a group, the mathematical term for this process is known as ÂsubtractionÊ or 
ÂsubtractingÊ. It is all about separating a large group of things into smaller groups 
of things. Besides taking away, some other common terms or vocabulary that 
also indicate subtraction are ÂremainderÊ or Âwhat is leftÊ, Âcounting backÊ and 
Âfinding the differenceÊ. Subtraction is also involved when phrases or questions 
such as ÂHow many more?Ê, ÂWhat is the amount to be added?Ê, as well as ÂHow 
many remain?Ê etc., are used. 
There are at least three ways to illustrate the meaning of subtraction as listed 
below: 
(a) Subtraction as counting back; 
(b) Subtraction as taking away; and 
(c) Subtraction as the difference. 
You will be shown how to teach subtraction contextually according to each of the 
meanings of subtraction mentioned above. In addition, you also have to know 
about other important parts related to the teaching and learning of subtraction 
such as teaching materials, the relationship of subtraction with addition and 
pairs of basic subtraction facts. 
3.1.1 Subtraction as Counting Back 
Subtraction is the reverse of addition. Counting on in ones is simply counting by 
ones or moving forward between numbers one at a time. As counting on is a 
reliable but slow way of adding, counting back is the reverse and is thus a slow 
but reliable way of subtracting. Initially, subtraction within 10 as counting back 
can be introduced by counting backwards either from 5 to 0 or from 10 to 0, that 
is 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 or 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0. 
Take a look at Figure 3.1. For example, a teacher can give out number cards of 0 
to 5 to six pupils and ask them to come out to the front and hold up their cards. 
Get the pupils to arrange themselves in ascending order and ask who should 
come first if the numbers are to be counted backwards from 5 to 0.
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10 
52 
Figure 3.1: Count on and count back using number cards 
Ask pupils to count backwards from 5 to 0. Repeat with counting backwards, 
starting with any other number less than 5, for example starting from 4 or 3, etc. 
Next, ask pupils to try doing the same thing without using number cards. 
Then, guide the pupils to compare the difference between counting onwards and 
counting backwards. At this stage, do not introduce the words subtract or minus 
yet. Just use common words such as Âone lessÊ and ÂbeforeÊ as shown below: 
 „In the sequence of numbers between 0 to 5, what is the number before 5?, 
before 4?‰ and so on. 
 „4 is one less than 5‰, „3 is one less than 4‰, „2 is one less than 3‰, etc. 
Let them try to count backwards from 10 to 0, 9 to 0 and so on. At this stage, 
pupils should also be able to arrange the numbers in descending order from 10 to 
0. 
Subtraction can also be done by counting back using a ruler as a number line. 
Here is an example of how to count back using a ruler in order to solve the 
subtraction problem given: 
Sally has 7 sweets. She wants to give 3 to her friend. How many can she keep 
for herself (see Figure 3.2)? 
Answer: The result is 4. So Sally can keep 4 sweets for herself.
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10  
53 
Figure 3.2: Counting back using a ruler 
Suggest a teaching and learning activity to demonstrate subtraction as the 
process of counting back using a calendar. 
3.1.2 Subtraction as Taking Away 
Subtraction facts are the numbers we get when we take one or more objects from 
a group of objects, or the answer we get when we take one number from another. 
First, let us look at the following steps for finding the six basic subtraction facts 
illustrated in Figure 3.3 (a), (b) and (c). 
For example, we start off with a group of six oranges. 
(a) Put the oranges in a row, to make it easier to see what we are doing (see 
Figure 3.3 (a). 
Figure 3.3 (a): One group of six oranges 
(b) Separate them into two groups, see Figure 3.3 (b): (Separating, in actual fact, 
is a way of subtracting). 
Figure 3.3 (b): Two groups of oranges 
ACTIVITY 3.1
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10 
54 
The numbers in the boxes tell us how many members are in each group. We 
can describe the ÂsubtractionÊ process using common words like below: 
Six take away one leaves five, or 
Taking one from six leaves five. 
(c) Repeat by working with groups of two and four oranges, as illustrated in 
Figure 3.3 (c): 
Figure 3.3 (c): Another two groups of oranges 
Six take away two leaves four, or 
Taking two from six leaves four. 
(d) Repeat with other possible combinations of two groups of oranges, i.e. three 
and three, four and two, as well as five and one in that order. At this stage, 
you may also introduce subtracting terms, such as, minus, in order to teach 
pupils to read and write the subtraction equations or mathematical 
sentences given below: 
Six take away one leaves five. 
Six minus one equals five. 
6 – 1 = 5 
Six take away two leaves four. 
Six minus two equals four. 
6  2 = 4 
3.1.3 Subtraction as the Difference 
Sometimes you need to count on to find the difference between two numbers. For 
example, if you have to answer 10 questions as practice but you have just 
finished six only, you can find the number of remaining questions to be 
answered in this way: 
„I have finished six questions. To find out how many more questions I need to 
answer in order to finish all the 10 questions, I can count on in ones starting from 
7‰. 
„7 + 1 = 8, 8 + 1 = 9, and 9 + 1 = 10‰, meaning 7 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 10
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10  
55 
By using a ruler as a number line, you can find that the difference between 10 
and 6 is 4 by counting on in ones as illustrated in Figure 3.4: 
Figure 3.4: Number line 
The difference is thus 4 questions. This means that you need to do 4 more 
questions to finish off. It is now obvious that by counting on from seven to 10, six 
plus four gives 10. Pupils can be guided to state that the difference between 10 
and six is four, i.e. 
Â6 + 4 = 10Ê is the same as Â10  6 = 4Ê. 
This may be the case with your pupils because they were probably right to think 
that counting on was much easier than subtracting. However, this was only 
because the numbers were small. A real-life example is counting change. For 
example if we gave RM1 (or ten 10 sen) to the cashier at the shop counter, and 
the price of the things that you bought was only 60 sen, usually, the cashier will 
give you back 40 sen as your change by counting on in 10 sen. The cashier will 
normally say: „70 sen, 80 sen, 90 sen, RM 1. Here is the change, 40 sen.‰ 
What do you think of this way of doing subtraction? Is this a correct way to do 
subtraction? Do you have other ideas? 
3.1.4 Pairs of Subtraction Facts 
We usually get two subtraction facts from each addition fact. Pupils have learnt 
that adding two numbers together in any order gives the same result. However, 
you have to encourage them to find out the results when they do subtraction. 
Here is a way in which they can discover related subtraction facts. Pupils are 
asked to work in groups. 
(a) Give out seven rings to each group. Ask them to arrange the rings in a row 
and separate them into two groups, i.e. a group of 3 rings and a group of 4 
rings respectively, as illustrated below:
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10 
56 
Let them read and write the addition fact depicted in the diagram above: 
3 + 4 = 7 
(b) Using the above addition fact, guide them to work out the subtraction facts 
below: 
(i) First subtraction fact: 
7 3 = 4 
(ii) Second subtraction fact: 
7  4 = 3 
Note: The order of the numbers to be subtracted is important! 
ACTIVITY 3.2 
Try listing out other fact families such as for the addition fact, 3 + 5 = 8. 
3.1.5 Subtraction Using Models 
Another way to do subtraction is to use any type of counters or teaching 
materials as models to set up the problem.
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10  
57 
Here are some examples: 
(a) Subtract 3 from 8 using Counters 
(i) Set up 8 counters as 8 units like below. 
(ii) Subtract 3 units by crossing out three counters as shown. 
(iii) Then, count the units that are left. The answer is 5 units. Ask pupils 
to write down the subtraction equation as follows: 
8  3 = 5 
(iv) You are also encouraged to use another model such as illustrated 
below: 
Say: 8 take away 3 leaves 5 
(b) Subtract 2 from 7 using Counting Board and Counters 
(i) Story problem: 
There are seven apples on a tree. Two of them fall down to the 
ground. How many apples are left on the tree? (See Figure 3.5)
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10 
58 
Figure 3.5: Story problem that can be used in teaching subtraction 
(ii) First, ask them to stick on seven green counters on the tree. Then 
colour two of them in red and pull them down from the tree. Put 
them on the ground. 
(You may like to make your counters from either soft paper or manila 
card. Explain your choice.) 
(iii) Write down the subtraction equation and find the answer: 
7  2 = 5 
Say: Taking away two from seven leaves five. 
Answer: There are five mangosteens left on the tree. 
(c) Subtract 4 from 9 using an Abacus and Counting Chips 
Figure 3.6: Sample subtraction of 4 from 9
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10  
59 
(i) Ask pupils to put on 9 counting chips in the first column of the 
abacus. Then pull out 4 chips (either one by one or all at once), refer 
to Figure 3.6. 
(ii) Ask pupils to count and say how many chips are left. 
(iii) Guide your pupils to write and read the subtraction equation as 
follows: 
Taking four from nine leaves five 
9  4 = 5 
(iv) Repeat the activity with different numbers of chips. 
3.1.6 Number Sentences for Subtraction 
We can write subtraction equations in rows or columns. Most of the examples in 
this topic thus far have focused on writing equation in rows. Subtraction in a 
column requires us to put the number we are subtracting from at the top and the 
number we are going to subtract at the bottom. Make sure the numbers are lined 
up exactly below each other in the column. Take a look at the following example 
in Figure 3.7: 
Figure 3.7: Number sentences for subtraction 
ACTIVITY 3.3 
What happens to the signs: Â-Ê and Â=Ê when you write down the ÂrowÊ 
equation into a ÂcolumnÊ equation? Explain the process that occurs.
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10 
60 
SAMPLES OF TEACHING AND LEARNING 
ACTIVITIES 
Some samples of teaching-learning activities that you can implement to help 
guide young children to understand and build the concept of subtraction in order 
to acquire the skill are included in this section. 
Activity 1: Working Out ÂOne Less ThanÊ 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of this activity, your pupils should be able to: 
(a) Use Âone less thanÊ to compare two numbers within 10; and 
(b) Count back in ones from 10 to 0. 
Materials: 
 10 balloons; 
 11 number cards (0  10); 
 String; and 
 Worksheet 1. 
Procedure: 
(a) Get 10 balloons and hang them in a row or horizontal line. Initially, stack 
the 11 number cards, numbered 0 - 10 in sequence, with the card numbered 
10 at the top followed by the card numbered 9 below and so on, with the 
card numbered 0 at the bottom of the pile. Hook the stack of number cards 
on the extreme right as shown in Figure 3.8. 
Figure 3.8: Ten balloons in a row 
(i) Get one pupil to count the balloons and say the number out loud. 
(ii) Ask another pupil to pick and burst any one of the balloons, count 
the remaining balloons and say „9‰. Then, take out the card 
numbered 10 to show the card numbered 9 underneath. 
3.2
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10  
61 
(iii) Teacher asks the pupils: 
„How many balloons are left?‰ (9) 
„Are there more or less balloons now compared to before?‰ (less) 
„How many less?‰ (1 less) 
(iv) Teacher explains that 9 is Âone less thanÊ 10. 
(v) Continue doing the activity until the last balloon is pricked. 
(b) Ask pupils to count back in ones, starting with any number up to 10 e.g. 
You can start with number 8 or 7 and so on. 
(c) Get the 11 number cards and ask pupils to arrange the cards in sequence 
again. Practise using the phrase Âone less thanÊ to compare two numbers 
within 10 e.g. Start from number 10 and say. Â9 is one less than 10Ê, 8 is one 
less than 9, etc. 
(d) Teacher distributes Worksheet 1 (refer to Appendix). 
Activity 2: Subtracting Sums by Finding the Difference 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Use Âless thanÊ and Âmore thanÊ to compare two numbers; and 
(b) Find the difference of two numbers. 
Materials: 
 Table (worksheet); 
 Balls; 
 PowerPoint slides; and 
 Plain paper. 
Procedure: 
(a) Start with a story problem (PowerPoint slides). 
1st Slide: 
Salleh has 5 balls, while Salmah has 3 balls. Who has more balls? 
What is the difference?
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10 
62 
2nd Slide: 
Show the following illustration, see Figure 3.9 (a). 
Figure 3.9 (a): Finding the difference 
Teacher asks: „Who has more balls?‰ 
„How many are there?‰ 
„Which one is more, 3 or 5?‰ 
„Which one is less, 3 or 5?‰ 
(At this stage, the teacher just wants to introduce the concept of Âone-to-one 
matchingÊ and it is not necessary for pupils to answer the questions yet if 
they are unable to do so). 
(b) Teacher asks them to show how they arrived at the answer using the 
materials given. 
(i) Step 1: 
Distribute some counters and a piece of plain paper to each group. 
(ii) Step 2: 
Guide them to work out the Âone-to-one matchingÊ correspondence 
using the materials given as shown in Figure 3.9 (b).
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10  
63 
Figure 3.9 (b): One-to-one matching correspondence 
(iii) Step 3: 
„How many balls have no match?‰ 
Teacher now introduces the concept of difference and relates this to 
the words, more and less. 
e.g. 5 is more than 3. 
3 is less than 5. 
The difference between 5 and 3 is 2. 
(iv) Step 4: 
Teacher guides pupils to compare two numbers by using the words 
more and less before finding the difference using Table 3.1 given. 
e.g. Compare the numbers 4 and 6. 
Which is more? 
Which is less? 
What is the difference? 
Teacher then asks pupils to write the numbers in the correct space in 
the table before finding the difference. 
For example, write 6 in the ÂmoreÊ column, 4 in the ÂlessÊ column and 
2 as the difference in the space provided (see Table 3.1).
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10 
64 
Table 3.1: Sample of a Table that can be Used for 
Recording the Difference between Two Numbers 
(v) Step 5: 
Teacher gets pupils to do the same for the other numbers in Table 3.1 
above and asks them to record the answers in the table given. 
(c) Group activity: 
Give a set of number cards numbering 1 to 10 to each group. Ask them to 
play the game as follows: 
(i) Step 1: Teacher gives the instructions on how to play the game. 
(ii) Step 2: Teacher says: „Listen, choose two numbers with a difference 
of 1. Whoever gets the correct answer first is the winner. Check your 
answers together.‰ 
(iii) Step 3: Repeat the game using other numbers with differences of 2, 3, 
etc.
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10  
65 
(iv) Step 4: Teacher asks them to find out all possible pairs of numbers in 
their groups using the number cards and record the results in Table 
3.2. 
Table 3.2: Subtraction Pairs 
Difference List Down All Possible Pairs 
1 e.g. 
10 - 9 
2 10 - 8 9 - 7 
3 10 - 7 9 - 6 
4 
5 
6 
7 
8 
9 
10 
(v) Step 5: Check all the answers together. 
(d) Closure: (You may teach subtraction involving zero in the next lesson!). 
Teacher: „What is the answer of 5  0? 4  4? 7  0?‰ 
ACTIVITY 3.4 
Suggest two suitable teaching and learning activities for this statement: 
„Subtracting zero from a number does not change the value of the number‰. 
Activity 3: Subtracting by Taking Away 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Subtract by taking away; and 
(b) Use subtraction to solve word problems.
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10 
66 
Materials: 
 Counting boards; 
 Counters; and 
 Plasticine. 
Procedure: 
(i) Initially, use fingers to practise taking away as a method for working out 
the subtraction process, see Figure 3.10. e.g.: 
Figure 3.10: Subtracting with fingers 
(ii) Teacher shows a story problem on a question card. 
Aida has 8 apples. She gives 3 of them to Sharifah. 
How many apples are left? 
Get two pupils to come in front and act out the story. They will act as Aida 
and Sharifah, respectively. The others are asked to solve the problem by 
observing the action shown. 
(iii) Teacher shows the subtraction process using a counting board and some 
counters, see Figure 3.11.
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10  
67 
Figure 3.11: Subtraction using a counting board and counters 
(iv) Teacher shows another story problem with a different context. 
There are 6 players on the field. 2 of them take a rest. 
How many players are left on the field? 
Ask pupils to act out the story using a counting board and some plasticine 
or encourage them to role play in the class, see Figure 3.12. 
Figure 3.12: Sample subtraction of 4 from 9 
(v) Teacher asks them to solve the story problem in groups. 
„Write the subtraction equations on the card given. Present your answers 
in front of the class‰. 
(vi) Do a quick mental-recall of the activity in the class. This will help pupils to 
work fast and accurately. 
e.g. 8 take away 4? 
10 take away 5? Take away 4? Take away 6? 
What take away 5 leaves 3? Leaves 2? Leaves 5? 
(vii) Distribute Worksheet 2 (refer to Appendix). 
Can you think of another suitable activity like the above?
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10 
68 
Activity 4: Predicting the Missing Part 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Predict the missing part in a subtraction problem; and 
(b) Relate the subtraction problem to the addition process. 
Materials: 
 Connecting cubes; 
 Number lines; 
 Beads; and 
 Cups. 
Procedure: 
(a) Teacher puts several connecting cubes (or counters) on a number line. 
e.g. 8 connecting cubes. 
(b) Teacher then keeps any 3 of the cubes behind her/him, while the pupils 
predict how many cubes are hidden. 
(c) Teacher guides the pupils to get the answer as follows: 
(i) How many connecting cubes are there at first? (8) 
(ii) How many connecting cubes are there left now? (5) 
(iii) How many connecting cubes are hidden? 
Let pupils brainstorm to get some suggestions from them.
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10  
69 
(d) Teacher shows a way to solve the problem as shown below: 
(i) „We have 5 cubes left. How many more cubes do we need to make 8 
cubes?‰ 
(ii) Teacher adds 3 red cubes one by one on the number line and asks 
pupils to count on in-ones from 5 to 8. „Start at 5, then 6, 7 and 8‰. 
(iii) „We have added 3 red cubes which represents the number of cubes 
hidden‰. „We thus write the subtraction equation as 8  3 = 5‰. 
(iv) „We can also write down the addition equation as 5 + ? = 8, to find 
the number of cubes hidden‰. 
(e) Ask them to work out the game in groups. You are encouraged to let them 
work out another game, e.g. Âbeads and cupÊ. 
(i) First, count the number of beads given to pupils. 
(ii) Put some of the beads into the cup. Take out 3 beads and ask pupils 
to predict the number of beads (hidden) under the cup. 
(f) Let pupils do other examples to reinforce the skill learnt. 
ACTIVITY 3.5 
Create another game as an enrichment activity for the subtraction process.
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10 
70 
 You need to pay attention when teaching the meanings of subtraction 
because conceptual understanding of this operation will help students learn 
the topic more efficiently. 
 The concrete materials used can help pupils master the subtraction algorithms 
better. 
 The samples of teaching and learning activities for subtraction provided in 
this topic are to motivate you to collect a set of good teaching-learning 
activities for subtraction. 
 The more activities you know of, the more creative and innovative you will 
be when planning your mathematics lessons. 
Counting back 
Difference 
Fact family 
Subtraction 
Subtraction fact 
Taking away 
1. Define the term ÂfactÊ. 
2. Subtraction can be defined as Âtake awayÊ. Explain this meaning of 
subtraction with the help of a suitable teaching and learning activity using 
concrete materials. 
3. Addition is the reverse of the subtraction process. Explain addition as the 
reverse of the Âtake awayÊ process with the help of a suitable teaching and 
learning activity using concrete materials.
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10  
71 
Explain the statements below with the help of a suitable teaching and learning 
activity using concrete materials: 
(a) ÂThe differenceÊ. 
(b) The order of the numbers in a subtraction problem is important. 
(c) You can subtract only one number at a time, but you can add more than 
one number at one go. 
APPENDICES 
WORKSHEET 1 
Answer all questions. 
1. Write the number which is one less than the one given in the space 
provided. 
2. Colour the number which is less. 
3.
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10 
72 
4. Fill in the blanks starting with the biggest number for each row of numbers. 
WORKSHEET 2 
Answer all questions. 
1. 6 take away 4 leaves 
8 take away 4 leaves 
7 take away 5 leaves 
9 take away 3 leaves 
2. Complete the subtraction sentences below: 
3. Circle the objects which have to be taken away. Write down the subtraction 
sentences.
TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10  
73 
4. 4  3 = ________ 7  1 = ________ 
6  3 = ________ 9  7 = ________ 
10  3 = _______ 10  2 = _______ 
5. Colour two pairs of numbers that give the same answer. 
6. Circle the correct answers. 
(a) 
(g) 
(b) 
(h) 
(c) 
(i) 
(d) 
(i) 
(e) 
(k) 
(f) 
(l)
Topic 
4 
 Numbers to 
100 and Place 
Value 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Explain how to say, count, read and write numbers to 100; 
2. Demonstrate how to count in tens and ones; 
3. Describe how to arrange numbers to 100  count on and count back; 
and 
4. Explain the concept of place value of numbers to 100. 
 INTRODUCTION 
You need to recall what was discussed in Topic 1 in order to understand this 
topic better. After mastering numbers 1 to 10, children should now learn how to 
say numbers up to 100 progressively. For example, you have to teach them to 
understand, count and write numbers from 10 to 20 before getting them to count 
in tens and ones until 100. To ensure that your pupils know how to say numbers 
to 100 either in words or in symbols correctly, it is essential to stress on the 
correct pronunciation of the names of numbers up to 100. The next step is to teach 
pupils to read and write numbers to 100 in words as well as in symbols neatly 
and correctly. Then, let pupils arrange numbers to 100 in sequence either by 
counting on (in ascending order), or counting back (in descending order), using 
various methods. Last but not least, teach pupils to recognise place value, first 
discussed in Topic 2. The place-value concept of tens and ones is introduced for 
counting numbers up to 100, especially when larger numbers are involved. Pupils 
can do regrouping with numbers from 10 onwards e.g. ten ones is the same as 
one tens and zero ones; eleven ones can be regrouped as one tens and one ones, 
and so on and so forth. In conclusion, the most important thing to remember 
when teaching kindergarten and elementary Mathematics is to make the teaching
TOPIC 4 NUMBERS TO 100 AND PLACE VALUE  
75 
and learning process as interesting and as fun as possible. The samples given in 
the following section will help you to teach Mathematics more effectively and 
meaningfully to the young ones. 
SAY AND COUNT NUMBERS TO 100 
4.1 
This section will further discuss how to say and count numbers to 100. 
4.1.1 Say Numbers to 100 
In general, parents or guardians normally feel so proud or are thrilled when they 
hear their children say numbers written in words or symbols flawlessly for the 
first time. With this in mind, it is thus the responsibility of parents or guardians 
and teachers especially, to guide them to pronounce the names of numbers up to 
100 correctly. 
There are a lot of ways to encourage pupils to practise saying the numbers. One 
effective way is by using picture-number cards that have numbers in words 
and/or symbols on them, or number charts. For example, you can easily use 
number charts in the form of 10 X 10 grids made from manila cards (or other 
suitable material) like the one in Table 4.1: 
Table 4.1: Number Chart (Numbers 1 to 100) 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 
81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 
91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 
Using the 10 X 10 grid shown above, cover some numbers and let the pupils say 
the numbers occupying the covered spots. Alternatively, you may also jumble up 
the sequence of the numbers by putting the numbers at the wrong places and
TOPIC 4 NUMBERS TO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 
76 
then ask the pupils to rearrange them in order before getting them to say the 
numbers. 
Some sample teaching-learning activities to reinforce the skill of counting 
numbers up to 100 are discussed here. 
Activity 1: Say the Number Names 
Learning Outcome: 
By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: 
(a) Pronounce the names of numbers up to 100 correctly. 
Materials: 
 10 pieces of manila cards (size 15 cm by 20cm) per group; 
 Colour pencils; and 
 Books or magazines with page numbers. 
Procedure: 
In general, there are five steps, which are: 
(i) Divide pupils into two groups. Ask them to make five picture number 
cards with numbers written in symbols by drawing some pictures/objects 
for different numerals (numbers up to 100) allocated to each group and 
another five drawings for cards with numbers written in words. Ask them 
to give the finished products to you to be checked for accuracy before 
giving them back the respective cards. 
(ii) Once they are ready, you can start the activity of „Saying number names‰. 
Tell them to make sure that all the drawings can only be revealed one by 
one by their own group members. The first group (Group 1) will show one 
of their picture numeral cards, for example, the card with the numeral „99‰ 
written on it. The other group (Group 2) will have to say the number 
Âninety-nineÊ out loudly and clearly. Award two points if the second group 
can say it correctly. 
(iii) Next, the second group takes turns to show a picture number card with the 
number written in words e.g. Âsixty-fourÊ and ask the other group to say the 
number on the card loudly and clearly. Award two points to Group 1 if 
they can say the number name correctly. Continue doing this until all the 
drawings have been shown.
TOPIC 4 NUMBERS TO 100 AND PLACE VALUE  
77 
(iv) Another way to let your pupils practise saying numbers to 100 is by 
showing them the page numbers from various kinds of books or 
magazines. Just randomly flip through one page at a time and then ask the 
pupils to say what number is on the next page. This activity can be carried 
out in pairs or groups. 
(v) Finally, distribute Worksheet 1 to your pupils to reinforce the skill of saying 
numbers to 100. 
4.1.2 Count Numbers to 100 
It is natural for pupils to use their fingers when they first start counting and if 
that is not enough, some will even continue to count using their toes which can 
be rather awkward. However, when counting larger numbers such as numbers 
more than 20, other more suitable manipulatives (e.g. counters) are required. 
The fun way to teach pupils to count is by using counting objects such as beads, 
beans, nuts, marbles, etc. Fill up a jar with beads, beans, nuts or marbles and pour 
them out onto a mat or table cloth. Then, ask the pupils to count them in different 
ways other than in ones. For example, get the pupils to group the beads into 
groups of ÂfivesÊ or ÂtensÊ. Counting in tens means adding ten to the previous 
number in the sequence each time, for instance, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 and 
100. 
Finally, help the pupils make some conclusions. When counting on in tens, the 
numbers create a pattern. All the numbers end with zero and the first digits are 
the same as when you count from 1 to 9, that is, (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, etc.). 
Once the pupils have discovered the patterns in the number system, the task of 
writing numerals of two digits and beyond is simplified enormously. They will 
encounter the same sequence of numerals, 0 to 9 over and over again. However, 
at this stage, many pupils do not know yet that numbers are constructed by 
organising quantities into groups of tens and ones, and that the digits in 
numerals change value depending on their positions in a number, thereby giving 
rise to the concept of place value in our number system. 
Activity 2: Count Numbers to 100 
Learning Outcome: 
By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: 
(a) Count numbers to 100.
TOPIC 4 NUMBERS TO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 
78 
Materials: 
 Picture cards of bicycles, aeroplanes, flowers, motorcycles, etc.; 
 Manila cards with pictures; 
 Colour pencils; and 
 Objects (Beads or beans or nuts or marbles, etc.). 
Procedure: 
In general, there are three steps, which are: 
(i) Show pupils the pictures of bicycles, aeroplanes, flowers, motorcycles, etc. 
Ask them to count the number of objects on the cards. 
(ii) Ask them to colour the pictures on the manila cards and then count how 
many objects there are on each card. 
(iii) Distribute Worksheet 2 to the pupils. 
READ AND WRITE NUMBERS TO 100 
This section will guide you through some relevant activities on reading and 
writing numbers to 100. It is useful to revise the correct techniques of writing 0 to 
9 taught in Topic 1 earlier. 
4.2.1 Read and Write Numbers to 100 
First of all, you need to revise or teach the pupils the correct way of writing the 
numbers as shown in Figure 4.1. 
Figure 4.1: Correct way for writing numbers 
4.2
TOPIC 4 NUMBERS TO 100 AND PLACE VALUE  
79 
Write down the numbers randomly on a piece of manila card or on a sheet of 
paper. Ask the pupils to read the numerals. Next, do the reverse, that is, get them 
to write down the numbers, in words, randomly on the manila card or on the 
sheet of paper. Then, ask the pupils to read the numbers in word form. 
Activity 3: Read and Write Numbers to 100 
Learning Outcome: 
By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: 
(a) Read and write numbers to 100 correctly. 
Materials: 
 Manila card or a sheet of paper; and 
 Pencils. 
Procedure: 
(i) Ask the pupils to fill in the empty boxes in Table 4.2: 
Table 4.2: Drawing and Writing numbers 
Read Draw and Write the Numerals Write the Numbers in Words 
20 
55 Fifty-five 
67 
77 Seventy-seven 
18 
29 
98 Ninety-eight 
(ii) Distribute Worksheet 3 to your pupils.
TOPIC 4 NUMBERS TO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 
80 
ARRANGE NUMBERS TO 100 IN ORDER 
(ASCENDING OR DESCENDING ORDER) 
4.3 
This section will focus on „arranging the numbers to 100‰ in ascending or 
descending order. 
4.3.1 Arrange Numbers to 100 in Order 
In general, there are two ways in arranging numbers to 100 in order, which are: 
(a) Arrange Numbers to 100 in Ascending Order (Count On) 
ÂCount onÊ order means arranging the numbers in ascending order. You can 
start at any number as long as the sequence of the numbers is in order. The 
same thing goes with the gap or the difference in value between the 
numbers. You can have any value for the difference as long as it is the same 
throughout the whole number sequence. 
(b) Arrange Numbers to 100 in Descending Order (Count Back) 
ÂCount backÊ order means arranging the numbers in descending order. You 
can again start at any number as long as the sequence of the numbers is in 
order. The same thing goes with the gap or the difference in value between 
the numbers. You can have any value for the differences as long as it is the 
same throughout the whole number sequence. 
Activity 4: Count On and Count Back in Ones using a Number Ladder or 
Number Chart Up to 100 (Snakes and Ladders Game) 
Learning Outcome: 
By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: 
(a) Count on and count back in ones to 100. 
Materials: 
 Dice; 
 Markers; and 
 Number ladder game (Snakes and Ladders Game).
TOPIC 4 NUMBERS TO 100 AND PLACE VALUE  
81 
Procedure: 
In general, there are five steps, which are: 
(i) Several pupils can participate in this game at the same time. Each of them 
will be given a marker. Players take turns to roll the dice. 
(ii) After taking turns to throw the dice, the players have to move their markers 
according to the number rolled. For example, if the first player rolls a 5, he 
will have to move his marker along five squares until it reaches the fifth 
square. If it happens that at the fifth square there is a ladder pointing to 
square number 23, then the player will have to climb up the ladder to end 
on the square number 23. 
(iii) On the other hand, if the marker lands on a square with a snake slithering 
down, the player will have to follow suit and slide down the snake to 
wherever it should be. e.g. If the marker reaches, say, square number 46 
showing a snake slithering down to square number 14, the player must 
follow the snake and place his/her marker on square number 14. 
(iv) The winner is the first player to reach the number 100. 
(v) Distribute Worksheet 4 to your pupils. 
PLACE VALUE OF NUMBERS TO 100 
4.4 
When objects are placed in order, we use ordinal numbers to tell their position. 
Ordinal numbers are similar to the numbers that you have learned before. The 
pupils need to understand the ordinality of numbers to enable them to position 
items in a set. If 10 pupils ran a race, we would say that the pupil who ran the 
fastest was in first place, the next pupil was in second place, and so on until the 
last runner. Here, we are actually arranging the winners in order. In short, the 
first 10 ordinal numbers are listed as: first, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, 
seventh, eighth, ninth and tenth. 
4.4.1 Place Value of Numbers to 100 
Place value is used within number systems to allow a digit to carry a different 
value based on its position, that is, the place it occupies has a value. The concept 
of place value is very important when applied to basic mathematical operations. 
The skill of regrouping numbers in tens and ones is very important to help 
develop the concept of place value at the early stage for numbers to 100.
TOPIC 4 NUMBERS TO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 
82 
In our present number system, place value works in the same way for all whole 
numbers no matter how big the number is. Numbers, such as Â84Ê, have two 
digits. Each digit is at a different place value. For instance, the left digit, Â8Ê is at 
the tens place. It tells you that there are 8 tens in this number. The last digit on the 
right is in the ones place, that is, 4 ones in this example. Therefore, there are 8 
tens plus 4 ones in the number 84, as illustrated below: 
Activity 5: Ordinal Numbers and Place Value of Tens and Ones 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Label pupils in a row from left to right using ordinal numbers such as, first, 
second, third, etc; and 
(b) Identify the place value of tens and ones for two-digit numbers up to 100. 
Materials: 
 Word cards (Ordinal numbers: first, second, ... tenth); 
 Ten pupils; 
 Number cards (two-digit numbers up to 100); and 
 Place value chart/mat. 
Procedure: 
The four steps in this procedure are: 
(i) Ask 10 pupils to line up from left to right in front of the class. Then ask 
another pupil to determine which pupil is in third position from the left 
side? Label the pupilÊs position using the correct ordinal card. Do the same 
with other positions, e.g. the sixth from pupilsÊ left, etc. 
(ii) Repeat the activity by asking pupils to label various positions of the pupils 
from the right side using the appropriate ordinal number cards.
TOPIC 4 NUMBERS TO 100 AND PLACE VALUE  
83 
(iii) Show pupils how to identify the place value for each digit in a two-digit 
number. Ask pupils to fill in the place value for numbers up to 100 given in 
the place-value chart or place value mat below: 
Place Value 
Number 
Tens Ones 
98 9 8 
29 2 9 
64 ? ? 
75 
13 
60 
(iv) Distribute Worksheet 5. 
 Familiarise yourself with numerals and numbers in words by saying them 
loud and clear. 
 Know how to read and write numbers in words and in symbols 
spontaneously. 
 Know how to arrange the numbers to 100 in ascending or descending order. 
 The skill of regrouping by tens and ones is an important process to understand 
the concept of counting and place value. 
Ascending 
Count back 
Count on 
Descending 
Ordinal Numbers
TOPIC 4 NUMBERS TO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 
84 
What other concrete objects can you use as base-10 materials in teaching the 
concept of place value? How would you use the materials to show ones, tens and 
hundreds? 
Consider the following scenario: 
LetÊs say one of your pupils knows how to count using concrete materials and 
can clearly count out loud e.g.„one, two and three, etc.‰. When you ask her: 
„How many objects are there?‰, she immediately starts to count them all over 
again. 
Discuss based on the above scenario. 
What do you know about her understanding of counting? What do you think is 
the next step in her learning? How might you enable her to achieve this? 
APPENDICES 
WORKSHEET 1 
1. (a) Say the numbers given on the door of each house. 
44 34 66 70 98 
22 10 33 50 79
TOPIC 4 NUMBERS TO 100 AND PLACE VALUE  
85 
(b) Say the numbers written on the manila cards. 
Fifty-eight Ninety-six 
Sixty-one 
Eighty-two 
One 
hundred 
Twenty-seven 
WORKSHEET 2 
Answer all questions. 
1. Count the heart-shaped beads. Write the numerals in the boxes provided. 
(a) 
(b)
TOPIC 4 NUMBERS TO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 
86 
(c) 
(d) 
2. Fill in the boxes with the correct numbers. 
(a) 
(b)
TOPIC 4 NUMBERS TO 100 AND PLACE VALUE  
87 
(c) 
(d) 
(e) 
(f)
TOPIC 4 NUMBERS TO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 
88 
WORKSHEET 3 
1. Write the missing numerals or words. 
(a) thirty-four = 
(k) = 
(b) sixty-nine = 
(l) = 
(c) thirteen = 
(m) = 
(d) forty = 
(n) = 
(e) ninetythree = 
(o) = 
(f) thirtyeight = 
(p) = 
(g) forty-four = 
(q) = 
(h) thirty-seven = 
(r) = 
(i) thirty = 
(s) = 
(j) sixteen = 
(t) = 
99 
87 
77 
70 
61 
35 
11 
79 
80 
36
TOPIC 4 NUMBERS TO 100 AND PLACE VALUE  
89 
WORKSHEET 4 
1. Fill in the missing numbers in the boxes/spaces below. (Count on/count 
back). 
Number Patterns 
(a) (i) 
(ii) 
(b) (i) 21, 31, 41, __, __, 71, __, __ 
(ii) 80, 70, 60, 50, __, __, 20, __ 
(c) (i) 
(ii) 
(iii) 
(iv) 
(d) Now try to write your own number patterns. 
(i) __, __, __, __, __, __, __, __, __, __, 
(ii) __, __, __, __, __, __, __, __, __, __ 
(e) (i) Between 51, _____, 53 
(ii) Just after 1, 2, _____ 
(iii) Just before _____, 5, 6
TOPIC 4 NUMBERS TO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 
90 
(iv) Just before and after _____, 74, _____ 
(v) In the middle of 98, _____, 96 
(f) Order each group of numbers from smallest to largest. 
(i) 37, 11, 90 _____, _____, _____ 
(ii) 26, 12, 82 _____, _____, _____ 
(iii) 83, 59, 95 _____, _____, _____ 
(iv) 97, 0, 15 _____, _____, _____ 
(g) Order each group of numbers from largest to smallest. 
(i) 74, 42, 47 _____, _____, _____ 
(ii) 39, 74, 91 _____, _____, _____ 
(iii) 28, 82, 49 _____, _____, _____ 
(iv) 27, 1, 80 _____, _____, _____ 
WORKSHEET 5 
(a) What is the position of the yellow car from the right? 
(b) What is the position of the yellow car from the left? 
(c) What is the position of the red car from the right? 
(d) What is the position of the red car from the left? 
(e) Which car is in the first position from the left? 
(f) Which car is in the last position from the left? 
(g) Which cars are in the first three positions from the right? 
(h) Which cars are in the last two positions from the right? 
(i) Which car is in the middle? 
(j) What is the position of the purple car from the left?
TOPIC 4 NUMBERS TO 100 AND PLACE VALUE  
91 
(k) What is the position of the purple car from the right? 
(l) Which car is in the fifth position from the right? 
(m) Which car is in the second position from the right?
Topic 
5 
 Addition 
within 18 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Describe how to add one more, two more and beyond to a number 
for addition within 18; 
2. Explain how to add numbers by combining two groups of objects for 
addition within 18; 
3. Explain how to add numbers by counting on for addition within 18; 
and 
4. Demonstrate how to write number bonds for addition within 18. 
 INTRODUCTION 
Previously, in Topic 2, addition within 10 was introduced whereby pupils 
learned the concept of Âone moreÊ either by counting all or counting on. Number 
bonds up to 10 were also highlighted. Here, the discussion is further extended to 
include addition within 18 and covers number bonds up to 18. A sound 
knowledge of number bonds, or basic facts of addition, is a must to enable pupils 
to apply them when adding bigger numbers to go beyond totals of 18. The 
process of addition is usually taught with the help of suitable teaching aids and 
concrete manipulatives such as counters, number lines, picture cards, etc. As in 
other chapters, some samples of teaching and learning activities for addition 
within 18 are provided to show how pupils can be helped to acquire this basic 
concept effectively.
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18  
93 
ADDING ‘ONE MORE’ TO A NUMBER 
In this section, we will discuss further the concept of adding 'one more' to a number. 
5.1.1 The Concept of ‘One More’ 
In order to approach the concept of addition as Âone moreÊ than a number, a 
variety of methods can be used. For instance, if you want the pupils to learn what 
is one more than 16, you can try the ones suggested below. 
(a) Use suitable counters such as beads, beans, nuts or marbles, etc. to add one 
more to a number. Ask pupils to first count how many beads are in a jar 
and then ask them how many beads will there be if one more bead is 
added. For example, if there are 16 beads in the jar initially, how many 
beads will there be if one more bead is added? 
Encourage them to first say ÂOne more than 16 is 17Ê or Â17 is one more than 
16Ê and then show them how to write the mathematical sentence for the 
addition operation as in Figure 5.1: 
Figure 5.1: Adding one more to a number using counters 
(b) Next, you can also use a number line. Addition on a number line 
corresponds to moving to the right along the markings on a number line. 
The number line below is marked with ticks at equal distance intervals of 1 
unit. To add one more to 16, first move 16 units from 0 and then move 1 
more unit to finally end up at 17. The sum of 16 + 1 which is equal to 17 is 
shown in Figure 5.2. The addition operation that corresponds to the 
situation acted out on the number line is represented as 16 + 1 = 17. 
Figure 5.2: Adding one more to a number using a number line 
5.1
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18 
94 
(c) Another way is to use number cards, see Figure 5.3. For example, first show 
the number card 16 to the pupils. 
Then, ask the pupils what number card is supposed to come out next if you 
add one more to the number 16. 
Get them to write the mathematical sentence for this operation, that is, 16 
add one equals 17. 
Figure 5.3: Adding one more to a number using number card 
(d) The concept of addition can be modelled using other concrete and 
manipulative materials. Addition can be done by counting on or by counting 
all as shown in Figure 5.4. 
(i) Finding one more than a number. 
e.g. 1 more than 10 is ___. (Ask pupils to get the answer by counting 
on). 
(ii) Finding the total by counting all the objects. 
e.g. ____ is 1 more than 13. (Ask pupils to get the answer by counting 
all the objects). 
Figure 5.4: Adding one more to a number using concrete materials 
Activity 1: Adding One More to a Number 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: 
(a) Add one more to numbers up to 18; and 
(b) Write the mathematical sentence for addition within 18.
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18  
95 
Materials: 
 Counters e.g. beads, beans, nuts, marbles, etc.; 
 Numeral cards (e.g. 1, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 16, 17, 18); and 
 Symbol cards (+, = ). 
Procedure: 
In general, there are five steps, which are: 
(i) Fill a plate with 11 marbles. Then ask the pupils what is the total number of 
marbles if you add one more marble to the plate. Guide pupils to say 
ÂtwelveÊ. 
(ii) Ask one of the pupils to represent the operation with a mathematical 
sentence using the respective numeral cards and symbol cards e.g. 11 + 1 = 
12. 
(iii) Get the pupils to write the mathematical sentence for the addition 
performed. 
(iv) Repeat the above steps using other quantities of numbers up to 17 in order 
to get a highest total of 18 e.g. 12 + 1 = 13, 17 + 1 = 18, etc. 
(v) Distribute Worksheet 1 to your pupils. 
ADDING TWO OR MORE TO A NUMBER 
5.2 
The above activities described in Section 5.1 can be repeated to develop the 
addition of two or more to a number. Let us now take a look at the addition of 
two or more to numbers up to a highest total of 18. 
5.2.1 Adding More than One to Numbers up to a 
Highest Total of 18 
In order to approach the addition of more than one (e.g. 2, 3 etc.) to a number, 
you can use the following suggested methods. 
(a) Use beads, beans, nuts, marbles, etc. to add two more to a number. Ask the 
pupils to count how many beads are in the jar and then ask them how 
many beads will there be if you add two more beads.
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18 
96 
For example, if there are 16 beads in the jar, how many beads will there be 
altogether if you add two more? 
Encourage the pupils to say Âtwo more than 16 is 18Ê or Â18 is two more 
than 16Ê and then ask them to write the mathematical sentence for the 
addition operation (see Figure 5.5): 
Figure 5.5: Adding two more to a number using counters 
(b) You can also use a number line. As mentioned earlier, addition 
corresponds to moving to the right along the markings on a number line. 
First, move 16 units from 0 and then move 2 more units to finally arrive at 
18. The sum of adding two more to 16 is shown in Figure 5.6. The addition 
sentence that corresponds to the situation is 16 + 2 = 18. 
Figure 5.6: Adding two more to a number using a number line 
(c) You can also use number cards, see Figure 5.7. For example, show the 
number card 16 to the pupils and then ask the pupils what number card is 
supposed to come out next if you add two more to the number. Ask pupils 
to write the mathematical sentence for the operation performed. 
Figure 5.7: Adding two more to a number using number cards
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18  
97 
(d) Use the counting on and counting all techniques to add two more to a 
number, see Figure 5.8. Model the concept of addition using other concrete 
and manipulative materials as before. 
(i) Finding two more than a number by counting on. 
(ii) Finding totals by counting all the objects. 
____ is 2 more than 13. 
Figure 5.8: Adding two more to a number using concrete materials 
Activity 2: Adding More than One to a Number 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: 
(a) Add more than one (e.g. 2 or more) to a number with a highest total of 18; 
and 
(b) Write the corresponding mathematical sentences for addition within 18. 
Materials: 
 Counting objects (e.g. beads, beans, nuts, marbles, etc.) 
Procedure: 
In general, there are three steps, which are: 
(i) Fill a plate with 11 marbles. Then ask the pupils what is the total number of 
marbles if three more marbles are added to the plate. 
(ii) Get pupils to write the corresponding mathematical sentence for the above 
operation e.g. 11 + 3 = 14. 
(iii) Repeat the above steps using different quantities to be added to get a 
highest total of 18.
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18 
98 
5.2.2 Adding by Combining Two Groups of Objects 
Apart from the above approaches to addition described in the previous sections, 
the meaning of addition can also be developed simply as the process of 
combining two groups or sets of objects as follows. 
(a) Combining two groups or sets of objects; see Figure 5.9. 
Figure 5.9: Adding by combining two sets of objects 
(b) Combining two numbers using a number line; see Figure 5.10. 
Figure 5.10: Adding by combining two numbers on a number line 
Activity 3: Addition of Two Numbers 
Learning Outcome: 
By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: 
(a) Add two numbers by combining two sets of objects. 
Materials: 
 Counting objects e.g. beads, beans, nuts, marbles, shells, pencils, etc.
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18  
99 
Procedure: 
In general, there are six steps, which are: 
(i) Choose two pupils to come in front. Give eight pencils to one pupil and 
nine pencils to the other. 
(ii) Ask the pupils to put (combine) the two sets of pencils together and count 
how many pencils there are altogether. 
(iii) Get the pupils to write the mathematical sentence in words and then in 
symbols for the addition operation performed. 
e.g. Eight plus nine equals seventeen 
8 + 9 = 17 
(iv) Repeat the activity using different quantities for the sets of objects to be 
added or combined to get a highest total of 18. 
(v) The above steps can be repeated using different counting objects. 
(vi) Distribute Worksheet 2 to the pupils. 
Activity 4: Combining Two Numbers to Derive Basic Facts of Addition 
Learning Outcome: 
By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: 
(a) List down all the possible combinations of any two single digit numbers for 
deriving basic facts of addition. 
Materials: 
 Sets of numeral cards (0 to 18); and 
 Sets of 10 flash cards per group. 
Procedure: 
In general, there are six steps, which are: 
(i) Teacher asks pupils to work in groups and give each group a set of 
numeral cards from 0 to 18. 
(ii) First, ask a pupil to choose any two-digit number card within 18 and say 
aloud the number e.g. the Number 12 before pasting the number card on 
the board.
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18 
100 
(iii) Ask the class what two single digit numbers when added together give a 
total of 12, e.g. 7 + 5, etc. Then, get the pupil to write the mathematical 
sentence for the basic fact of addition derived e.g. 7+ 5 = 12 on a flash card 
and show it to the whole class. 
(iv) Get the pupils from each group to choose any 2 cards that sum up to 12 
other than 7 and 5 mentioned above e.g. 8 + 4; 3 + 9; 11 + 1, 12 + 0; etc. and 
hold them up for everyone to see. 
(v) Ask each group of pupils to jot down all the possible combinations for 
getting a total of 12 on the flash cards provided. 
(vi) Repeat with other numbers until the pupils are familiar with all possible 
combinations comprising two single digit numbers for deriving various 
basic facts of addition. 
Activity 5: Lucky Throws 
Learning Outcome: 
By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: 
(a) Total up the two numbers shown on the faces of two tossed dice. 
Materials: 
 Two dices with different numbers (1 to 6 and 7 to 12) on their faces. 
Procedure: 
In general, there are five steps, which are: 
(i) Prepare two dice, one which has the numbers 1 to 6 on its faces and another 
with numbers 7 to 12 on its faces. 
(ii) Give the two dice to one pupil. 
(iii) Ask the pupil to toss the dice on the table simultaneously and say out loud 
the sum of the numbers shown on the faces of the tossed dice. 
(iv) Ask their friends to check the accuracy of the answer. 
(v) Get pupils to work in pairs. Pupils take turns at tossing the dice and 
checking the answers.
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18  
101 
Activity 6: Number Wheel 
Learning Outcome: 
By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: 
(a) Add two numbers shown on the number wheel up to a highest total of 18. 
Materials: 
 Number wheel; and 
 Sets of number cards with single digit and two digit numbers from 0 to 18. 
Procedure: 
In general, there are five steps, which are: 
(i) Give two number cards to a pupil and ask the pupil to paste the two cards 
along the diameter of the wheel. The sum of the two numbers should be 
within 18 e.g. numbers 7 and 5. 
(ii) The two numbers should be put diagonally on a straight line as shown in 
Figure 5.11. 
Figure 5.11: Adding by combining two numbers on a number wheel 
(iii) Get pupils to call out the sum by combining the two numbers displayed on 
the wheel. 
(iv) Ask another pupil to pick any two cards and fill up the remaining spaces 
on the wheel and get the pupils to add up the numbers. 
(v) Repeat the activity by getting the pupils to work in groups. Give each 
group a set of number cards. Pupils take turns to pick and paste the cards 
whilst the rest of the members add and check the answers.
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18 
102 
5.2.3 Adding Two Numbers by Counting On 
It is not easy to answer questions or solve word problems on addition especially 
when ordinal numbers are involved such as in the following examples. 
(a) The original height of a plant is 7cm. If it increased its height by 5cm, what 
is its present height? Refer to Figure 5.12. 
(b) This year is ArifÊs fifth birthday. What will his age be in 10 yearsÊ time? 
The first question can be easily answered with the help of a count on model. 
Number lines can be used to solve this problem. 
Figure 5.12: Adding two numbers by counting on a number line 
The use of a combination of two models for adding, such as combining two 
groups and counting on, is an important step in developing the understanding of 
the addition operation among pupils. At this stage, pupils know how to find the 
total of two groups without having to count all the objects one by one all over 
again. Pupils who have not really understood the technique will count one by 
one all over again when trying to find the answer for the combination of two 
groups of objects. 
5.2.4 Adding Two Numbers According to Place Value 
Conventional algorithms involve adding digits according to their place value. 
Basically, there are two ways to do the addition of two numbers, which are: 
(a) Horizontal Form 
This is commonly used when adding single digit numbers. 
(b) Vertical Form 
This is commonly used when adding two or more digit numbers.
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18  
103 
Pupils can manipulate a place value model to build sets of ten to find the sum of 
two whole numbers less than 10. It is important for children to remember the 
basic facts of addition derived from simple combinations of any two single digit 
numbers before moving on to perform the addition of two-digit and single digit 
numbers after having learnt about place value. You are encouraged to start with 
simple sums like the one below: 
In order to perform the addition given according to place value, first add 5 to 3 
and then 10 to 0 to get 8 and 10 respectively as follows: 
In short, the addition in the above example was carried out by first adding the 
ones before adding the tens, that is, according to place value. 
5.2.5 Families of Addition Facts 
Addition facts for different sums can be organised into families. Basically, as 
described earlier, addition involves combining two groups into one bigger group. 
Conversely, a separation activity is used for splitting a single group into two 
subsets or smaller groups. The advantage of this activity is that it can be used to 
introduce the families of addition facts for a number. 
For instance, let us take the number 6. Pupils can discover many patterns as well 
as find the combinations for getting a total of six and organise them into a table 
(see Table 5.1). 
Table 5.1: Family of Addition Facts for Six 
0 + 6 = 6 
1 + 5 = 6 
2 + 4 = 6 
3 + 3 = 6 
4 + 2 = 6 
5 + 1 = 6 
6 + 0 = 6
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18 
104 
As can be seen from Table 5.1, there is an addition fact in the form of 6 + 0 = 6, or 
0 + 6 = 0. Zero is called the identity element for addition. This is true for all whole 
numbers. Other addition facts occur in the form of pairs like 2 + 4 = 6 and 4 + 2 = 
6. 
This is again true for all whole numbers and the operation of addition of all 
numbers is said to be commutative, that is, reversing the order of the numbers to 
be added does not affect the result. These two properties are important for 
learning the basic facts of addition and for learning more advanced mathematics. 
Developing the facts for sums greater than 10 is also important. This is done after 
many activities with sums of less than 10 and equal to 10 are introduced. By then, 
pupils should be able to organise what they already know accordingly: 
(a) Know the basic facts and can put them under families, where each fact in 
the family gives the same total. 
(b) Know that the family facts for 10 are important and can build 10s. 
(c) Able to use place value to build numbers that are equal to and greater than 
10. 
The three skills above can be used together to help pupils learn facts for sums 
greater than 10 as illustrated in the following example: 
What is 6 plus 5 equal to? 
Figure 5.13 shows how pupils can be helped to develop facts for sums greater 
than 10. 
Figure 5.13: Adding two numbers by building a set of ten 
(a) Use counting chips or loose objects to represent 6 and 5. 
(b) Then build a set of 10 e.g. 6 + 4 = 10.
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18  
105 
(c) Look at the results and write an addition fact for the action performed e.g, 
10+1= 11. 
(d) Justify the actions undertaken. 
The above process or steps can be explained thus: 
This is because in the family of addition facts for 10, to make a set of 10 with 
a set of 6, a set of 4 is needed, which has to come from the set of 5. The 
family of addition facts for 5 tells us that if you take 4 to make 10 with 6, 
there will be 1 left, resulting in a ten and one, such that 10 + 1 = 11. 
Actually, describing this process in words is more difficult than demonstrating it 
with objects as illustrated in the figure above. Experience working with families of 
addition facts for numbers and place value will enable children to pick up visual 
and sensory impressions and put these concepts together to develop a clearer 
understanding of the whole addition process. The following developmental 
activity illustrates how children can use place value and fact families to find sums 
greater than 10 by using facts for sums less than or equal to 10. 
Activity 7: Family Facts of Addition 
Learning Outcome: 
By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Use families of addition facts for sums less than or equal to 10 to find 
addition facts for sums greater than 10. 
Materials: 
 Unifix cubes (red and blue). 
Procedure: 
In general, there are seven steps, which are: 
(i) Ask pupils to first take out 8 loose blue cubes and then 6 loose red cubes. 
(ii) Next, put them all in a row, see Figure 5.14 (a). 
(iii) Join the blue cubes together to make a bar of 8; 
(iv) Ask them to make a ten-bar by combining with two red cubes as in Figure 
5.14 (b). 
(v) Record the respective mathematical sentence for each step, as illustrated In 
Figure 5.14 (c).
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18 
106 
Figure 5.14 (a): Adding two single digit numbers by using cubes or blocks 
Figure 5.14 (b): Adding two numbers by using the family facts for six and ten 
Figure 5.14 (c): Adding two numbers using families of addition facts 
(vi) Do the same with other quantities of coloured cubes e.g. 7 + 5, 9 + 3, etc. to 
find sums greater than ten by building sets of tens and using relevant family 
facts of addition. 
(vii) Emphasise that 7 + 5 = 7 + 3 + 2 = 10 +2 = 12. Get pupils to record the whole 
process using appropriate mathematical sentences for each step involved. 
Activity 8: Build a Ten 
Learning Outcome: 
By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Build a 10 for addition within 18. 
Materials: 
 Counters; and 
 Worksheet. 
Procedure: 
(i) Give pupils two sets of counters. 
(ii) Ask them to count the number of counters in each set. 
(iii) Let them write the numerals for each set in the blanks provided in the 
worksheet, see Figure 5.15. 
(iv) Then, ask pupils to build a set of ten. 
(v) Write the new numerals and find the sum.
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18  
107 
Figure 5.15: Adding two numbers by building a ten 
Another important property for addition is the associative property of addition. 
This property helps us to rewrite sums in terms of relevant facts that represent 
sums greater than 10 to make them easier to learn. 
Any sum that is greater than 10 can be found by rewriting one of the numbers so 
that a fact for 10 is obvious. Then, the expression involving 10 plus another 
number is simply a place value expression that can be written directly. This 
shows the importance of the associative property in making the regrouping 
process possible (see Table 5.2). 
Table 5.2: Associative Property of Addition 
Sum 
Rewriting the Sum in 
Terms of Relevant 
Facts 
Use of 
Associative Property 
Simplification 
7 + 6 7 + (3 + 3) (7 + 3) + 3 10 + 3 = 13 
8 + 7 8 + (2 + 5) (8 + 2) + 5 10 + 5 = 15 
9 + 5 9 + (1 + 4) (9 + 1) + 4 10 + 4 = 14 
Separation activities can also be used to relate the addition operation to the 
subtraction operation, especially to emphasise addition as the inverse of subtraction. 
5.2.6 Writing Mathematical Sentences for Addition 
It is essential to teach pupils how to write the mathematical sentence for the 
addition operation carried out both in words and in symbols. Provide enough 
practice on writing the relevant mathematical sentences for addition to help 
pupils master the skill of addition within 18. For example, when adding a set of 
eight objects to a set of seven objects, the addition process can be recorded as 
such: 
Eight plus seven is equal to fifteen OR 8 + 7 = 15.
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18 
108 
NUMBER BONDS UP TO 18 
A number bond is a pair of numbers making up a particular total. Pairs making a 
10 such as 1 + 9, 2 + 8, 3 + 7, 4 + 6, 5 + 5, etc. were previously discussed in Topic 
2. To help pupils master the skill of adding within 18, it is useful to teach them 
number bonds up to 18 which actually correspond to all the basic facts of 
addition within 18. Word problems can be used to introduce number bonds. e.g. 
Abu has 8 balloons and Osu has 7. How many balloons are there altogether? 
8 + 7 = 15 
Number Bonds Corresponding to 15 
The following Table 5.3 shows all number bonds that make up a total of 15. 
Table 5.3: Number Bonds of 15 
0 + 15 = 15 
1 + 14 = 15 
2 + 13 = 15 
3 + 12 = 15 
4 + 11 = 15 
5 + 10 = 15 
6 + 9 = 15 
7 + 8 = 15 
8 + 7 = 15 
9 + 6 = 15 
10 + 5 = 15 
11 + 4 = 15 
12 + 3 = 15 
13 + 2 = 15 
14 + 1 = 15 
15 + 0 = 15 
5.3
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18  
109 
Magic Square 
Figure 5.16: A 3 x 3 magic square with a magic sum of 15 
Another example that shows number bonds of 15 is a 3 by 3 magic square 
consisting of a square array of numbers such that the sum along each column, row 
and diagonal is the same and is equal to 15, see Figure 5.16. This common value is 
called the „magic sum‰. The order of a magic square is simply the number of rows 
(and columns) in the square. 
Try to find the missing entries in the magic square provided. Have fun! 
8 3 (a) 
(b) 5 (c ) 
6 7 (d) 
Solutions: 
(a) 4; 
(b) 1; 
(c) 9; and 
(d) 2.
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18 
110 
5.3.1 Number Bonds to 18 
The following Table 5.4 shows number bonds corresponding to 18. 
Table 5.4: Number Bonds of 18 
0 + 18 = 18 
1 + 17 = 18 
2 + 16 = 18 
3 + 15 = 18 
4 + 14 = 18 
5 + 13 = 18 
6 + 12 = 18 
7 +11 = 18 
8 + 10 = 18 
9 + 9 = 18 
10 + 8 = 18 
11 + 7 = 18 
12 + 6 = 18 
13 + 5 = 18 
14 + 4 = 18 
15 + 3 = 18 
16 + 2 = 18 
17 + 1 = 18 
18 + 0 = 18 
 The addition operation concept can be explained by carrying out combination 
and counting on activities with the numbers involved. 
 Developing the facts for sums greater than 10 is important. This can be done 
by learning up the basic facts of addition and organising them into fact 
families, where each pair of numbers in a family gives the same sum. Also, 
the putting of the addition facts into families facilitates the learning of 
mathematical sentences for addition.
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18  
111 
 Pupils should also know how to build 10s and recognise that the fact family 
for 10 is very important and useful in performing addition especially when 
carrying out the combination of two groups of objects. 
 The extremely important point for learning facts with sums greater than 10 is 
using place value concepts to build numbers that are 10 or greater. 
Associative property 
Commutative operation 
Identity element 
Magic square 
Number bond 
The number line is a significant tool that can be used as a teaching aid in various 
explorations in more advanced mathematics. Plan a strategy to show how to 
apply this tool in teaching the concept of addition. 
APPENDICES 
WORKSHEET 1 
1. Underline the correct numbers. 
(a) One more than 11 is (12, 13). 
(b) One more than (17, 14) is 18. 
(c) (15, 17) is one more than 16. 
(d) What is one more than 10? (13, 11). 
(e) One more than (11, 14) is 15. 
(f) (12, 14) is one more than 13.
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18 
112 
(g) (10, 13) is one more than 11. 
(h) One more than (16, 17) is 18. 
2. Fill in the blanks with the correct numbers (words). 
(a) One more than twelve is __________________. 
(b) One more than ______________ is thirteen. 
(c) ______________ is one more than sixteen. 
(d) What is one more than fifteen? ______________. 
(e) One more than seventeen is ________________. 
(f) ______________ is one more than seventeen. 
(g) ______________ is one more than eleven. 
(h) One more than ______________ is fourteen. 
WORKSHEET 2 
1. Write the missing numbers in the table. 
Add Sum Write in Words 
5 + 6 11 
6 + __ 12 Twelve 
__ + 11 15 Fifteen 
12 + 4 Sixteen 
8 + 5 13 
9 + __ Eighteen 
__ +13 Seventeen 
12 + 0 
12 + 5
TOPIC 5 ADDITION WITHIN 18  
113 
2. Write the correct numbers in the boxes. 
(a) 
(b) 
(c) 
3. Match the following.
Topic 
6 
 Subtraction 
within 18 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Identify Âone lessÊ or Âmore than one lessÊ than a number given; 
2. Explain the differences between two numbers; 
3. Subtract two numbers by taking away; 
4. Subtract by finding the difference between numbers of objects in two 
groups; 
5. Write mathematical sentences for subtraction; and 
6. Count back in steps from any number. 
 INTRODUCTION 
Subtraction and addition are closely related such that they undo each other and 
for that reason they are called inverse operations. 
There are several types of subtraction situations. They include the idea of taking 
away, the additive principle (what is needed), the comparative situation 
(comparison of two sets), the partitioning concept (separating a set of objects into 
parts) and the incremental aspect (involving decrease) to illustrate subtraction. 
The most intuitive idea for subtraction is taking away. Reinforcing the take away 
interpretation requires the presence of both addition and subtraction situations at 
the same time. All five types of situations occur in real life and pupils must 
explore them for themselves. Attention must be focused on the basic idea of 
subtraction and how it relates to each of these situations.
TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTION WITHIN 18  
115 
As place value concepts are developed, pupils should also learn basic arithmetic 
facts for sums greater than 10 by building sets of 10. If not, they will encounter 
difficulties when they begin to learn the procedures for computing with large 
numbers. 
THE CONCEPT OF ‘LESS THAN’ 
6.1 
For subtraction involving numbers greater than 10, pupils should manipulate 
loose objects, such as blocks, tiles or counting chips, so that they can participate 
actively in the regrouping process. Suppose we want to subtract 5 from 13, we 
can do so in the following way: 
Represent 13 as one ten bar 
and three loose blocks ------------- 
Subtract 3 to get a ten bar 
Or one tens -------------------------- 
Exchange the one tens 
for ten ones, and then 
subtract 2 more ones -------------- 
End up with 8 ones --------------- 
When pupils have had experience working with loose objects and begin to 
appreciate the regrouping process, they can work with visual models on a 
worksheet. The models on the worksheet must lead them through the reasoning 
that is necessary for finding the missing number in a subtraction mathematical 
sentence. For example: 
Find the missing number in the mathematical sentence: 13  5 = 
(a) Put out one 10 and 3 loose blocks for representing 13 
(b) Subtract to get a ten i.e. (13  3 = 10) 
(c) Subtract 2 more to get to subtract 5 in all. That gives 8. 
The regrouping process is extremely important. Pupils must learn that when they 
add facts with sums greater than 10, they have to regroup. Similarly, they must 
also learn that some subtraction situations require regrouping too. The activity 
represented either physically or pictorially, should relate addition to subtraction. 
This practical tool is superior to counting forwards or backwards to find a sum or
TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTION WITHIN 18 
116 
difference. It is a beginning towards building the facility to do mental arithmetic 
as illustrated as follows. 
Break tens down and always 
use families of relevant facts 
For example: When I add, I sometimes build tens. 
What is 12  5? 
 To subtract 5 from 12, I have to think that: 12 is 1 set of ten and 2 singles. 
 Removing 2 singles is easy and that gets me to 10. 
 There are 3 more to be removed and that is easy too because I know my 
family of facts for 10. 
 I break down the ten (regroup) and remove 3 more. This leaves 7. 
 Thus, 12  5 = 7. 
6.1.1 Patterns for Subtraction 
While practising subtraction with regrouping, pupils can be prompted to notice 
helpful patterns that involve families of facts. 
If I subtract 5 from 12, that is easy because 6 + 6 = 12 and I have subtracted one 
less than 6 which is 5. Therefore we must have 7 remaining. 
Sometimes a subtraction sentence can be translated into an easier subtraction 
sentence as below: 
6.1.2 ‘One Less’ Than a Number 
Subtracting one or more from a number to show Âone or more lessÊ than a number 
can be done easily using a number line as shown in Figure 6.1 and Figure 6.2.
TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTION WITHIN 18  
117 
Figure 6.1: Subtracting 1 from 15 on a number line is 1 less than 15, that is 14 
Figure 6.2: Subtracting 2 from 17 on a number line is 2 less from 17, that is 15 
6.1.3 ‘Take Away’ 
Several types of problem situations fall into the subtraction category. 
Unfortunately, these problem situations are not as intuitive as problem situations 
for addition. This is because many subtraction problems sound like addition. 
Teaching subtraction requires extra attention, thus there is a need to get used to 
all types of subtraction situations. 
In general, subtraction of whole numbers applies to two kinds of situations. The 
first is called Âtake- awayÊ. This is the easiest and most natural interpretation of 
subtraction for pupils to learn. It is easy to represent the situation with objects, 
and it is a natural extension of the combination interpretation for addition. Have 
pupils characterise situations by describing and drawing rather than have them 
write the appropriate mathematical sentence. 
When reinforcing the Âtake awayÊ interpretation for subtraction, present 
equivalent addition and subtraction situations at the same time. 
For example: A bowler with 10 pins knocks down 8 of them. From 10 pins, the 
bowler takes away 8 pins. There are now 2 pins left. The subtraction is thus 
represented as 10  8 = 2. 
The following terminologies are used with subtraction:
TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTION WITHIN 18 
118 
The ÂminuendÊ is the number from which another number is being subtracted. 
The ÂsubtrahendÊ is the number being subtracted. 
The ÂdifferenceÊ is the result of subtracting the subtrahend from the minuend. 
Related Sentences for Subtraction 
Subtraction is often defined in terms of addition. 
e.g. 5  2 is that number which when added to 2 gives 5. 
Thus the subtraction sentence can be written as: 
5  2 = 3 (Taking away 2 from 5 gives 3) 
There is a related addition sentence for this situation: 
5 = 3 + 2 (Putting back the 2 gives 5 again) 
In fact, we know that the answers we find for subtractions are correct only 
because of the related addition operations. 
Subtracting on a Number Line 
Subtraction also corresponds to moving distances on a number line. The number 
line below is marked with tick marks at equal distances of 1 unit. To perform this 
operation, we first move 10 units to the right from 0 and then to the left 8 units, to 
end up at 2. 
The subtraction that corresponds to this situation is written as 10  8 = 2 (see 
Figure 6.3) 
Figure 6.3: Subtracting on a number line
TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTION WITHIN 18  
119 
Revision of the ÂTake AwayÊ Situation 
Table 6.1 explain the revision of the 'take away' situation in detail. 
Table 6.1: Revision of the 'Take Away' 
Situation Physical Objects Mathematical Sentence 
There are 3 birds sitting on a fence. Soon 2 more birds fly onto the fence. How many birds 
are on the fence now? 
Pick out 3 counters, then 
2 more. Ask: „How many 
3 + 2 = 5 
counters in all?‰ 
There are 5 birds sitting on a fence. Three of them fly away. How many birds are still 
sitting on the fence? 
Put out 5 counters, then 
remove 3. Ask: „How 
5  3 = 2 
many are left?‰ 
If pupils perform this activity often enough, they will naturally be able to construct 
concepts that relate to subtraction and addition. 
Pupils are ready to move on to a pictorial representation of the operation by covering up 
or marking out pictures of objects. 
Here are six cherries; 
mark out 3 to show how 
many the crows ate. Tell 
us how many are left. 
6  3 = 3 
6.1.4 ‘Difference’ between Two Groups of Objects 
Besides the take away idea, there are many other types of subtraction situations 
as to how to know the difference between two groups of objects. 
Sometimes we can use the additive situation to focus on what is needed. We can 
ask „How many must be added to what I already have to obtain a certain 
amount? 
For example: Dani has 3 stamps, but needs a total of 5 to mail his letters. How 
many more stamps does he need?
TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTION WITHIN 18 
120 
The comparative situation is matching objects in two groups on a one-to-one 
basis. A strong foundation, based on the one-to-one matching test for the 
comparison of two sets, can be used to help children with this application. 
Questions that could be asked include „Which is more?‰ to „How many more‰ to 
provide pupils with a procedure to solve problems of this type. 
The partitioning situation involves separating or partitioning a set of objects into 
parts. It is extremely important for pupils to draw pictures and diagrams in this 
case. For example: Here are 5 cars. If 3 of them are blue and the rest are green, 
how many are green? 
The last type of subtraction situation, known as the incremental situation, 
involves a decrease in quantity. All measurements require this type, for example, 
when situations such as losing weight, shortening the length of a pair of pants or 
the temperature drops when it is cold, etc. are involved. 
The following are some samples of teaching-learning activities denoting the 
various types of subtraction situations. 
Activity 1  4: Representing Different Subtraction Situations 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of the activities, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Represent different subtraction situations such as taking away, additive, 
comparative and partitioning types; and 
(b) Write the appropriate mathematical sentence for the subtraction performed. 
Materials: 
 Groovy Boards with dots; and 
 Rubber band. 
Figure 6.4: The board with 2 dots on one side
TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTION WITHIN 18  
121 
Procedure: Situation 1 (Take Away) 
(i) Teacher shows board with 2 dots on one side of the rubber band and 3 on 
the other side (see Figure 6.4). 
(ii) Ask pupils to show the operation of 2 + 3 = 5. 
(iii) Teacher shows how to represent this operation as subtraction. 
(iv) Teacher asks: „How many dots are there altogether? If 2 dots are covered, 
how many dots are left?‰ 
(v) Let pupils think and say together: 5  2 = 3 
That is: Five take away two gives three 
Figure 6.5: The board with 5 dots 
Procedure: Situation 2 (Additive) 
(i) Teacher shows board with 2 dots and tells that there are 5 in all. 
(ii) Ask pupils how many more do they need to get to 5. 
(iii) Let them put the rubber band so that they can see 2 on one side. 
(iv) Ask them how many more do they need to have all the dots on the board. 
(v) Let pupils think and say together: 5  2 = 3 (additive). 
Figure 6.6: The boards with 2 dots and 3 dots separately
TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTION WITHIN 18 
122 
Procedure: Situation 3 (Comparative) 
(i) Teacher shows board that have 5 dots and 2 dots separately. The boards 
need to be put on a one-to-one matching basis. 
(ii) Ask pupils to examine the lengths of the 2 dots board and the 5 dots board 
(see Figure 6.7). Ask pupils how much longer the 5 dot-board is compared 
to the 2 dot- board. 
(iii) Ask them to compare and say together: 5  2 = 3 (comparative). 
(iv) Both boards can be matched on a one-to-one basis. 
Figure 6.7: The boards with 2 dots and 5 dots separately 
Procedure: Situation 4 (Partitioning) 
(i) Teacher shows 5 dots in all. Show the pupils that 2 dots are on one side of 
the rubber band (see Figure 6.8). 
(ii) Ask them how many are on the other side. 
(iii) Let them put the rubber band in place and think of the subtraction as: 5  2 
= 3 (partitioning). 
Figure 6.8: The boards with 2 dots on one side with rubber band
TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTION WITHIN 18  
123 
Exercises on finding the difference between two groups of objects. 
1. The difference between 7 and 3 is 4: 
There are 4 more circles in the row of 7 compared to the row of 3. 
2. Find the difference between these numbers: 
Between 8 and 5, the difference is _____ 
3. Possible pairs of numbers with a difference that is equal to a given number. 
15  6 = 16  4 = 
12  6 = 13  3 = 
14  7 = 18  6 = 
13  5 = 18  4 = 
15  9 = 15  8 = 
6.1.5 Writing Mathematical Sentences for Subtraction 
The following equation with a missing addend can be considered as a special 
mathematical sentence for subtraction. For example, take a look at the following 
equation: 
7 + 
= 18
TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTION WITHIN 18 
124 
It is referred to as a missing addend sentence because it is an addition sentence in 
which one of the addends is not known. Constructing this new concept should 
just be a matter of helping pupils to reorganise what they already know. Using 
relevant families of facts can help pupils to master the missing addend idea with 
ease. 
Activity 5: Writing the Subtraction Sentence with the Help of a Number Line 
Learning Outcome: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Write a mathematical sentence for subtraction within 18 using a number 
line. 
Materials: 
 Number line Worksheet. 
Procedure: 
(i) Ask pupils to get a partner. Find the missing number in each subtraction 
sentence. 
13  7 = 
10  4 = 
(ii) Start at 13, then go back 7 spaces. 
End up at 6: 13  7 = 
(iii) Start at 10, then go back 4 spaces. 
End up at 6: 10  4 =
TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTION WITHIN 18  
125 
(iv) Story problem that will fit both sentences. 
Danial, the hopping cricket, must hop on the number line to show 13  7. 
He will start at 13 and hop back 7 spaces. What must Fakri do if he must 
start at 10 and then go back to meet Danial? 
COUNTING BACK 
A type of subtraction situation, known as the incremental situation, involves a 
decrease in quantity. Counting back is also an activity of counting numbers in 
descending order. It is also the inverse of counting on in the addition concept. In 
real life, we are not always dealing with concrete objects that can be counted. All 
measurements require this type of subtraction such as the calculation of weight 
loss, the drop in temperature when it is cold and the shortening of the length of a 
pair of pants. Pupils should realise that they need to subtract in these instances by 
exploring the various situations. 
Examples of Subtraction in Real Life 
Example 1: Pupils can explore what happens to the length of a chain or the height 
of a tower when the number of links or cubes is decreased. 
HumairaÊs weight is 20 kg. Three weeks later she loses 5 kg. What is her weight 
now? 
Example 2: What is the number that is 3 less than 12, see Figure 6.9. 
Figure 6.9: Subtracting on a number line 
6.2
TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTION WITHIN 18 
126 
SUBTRACTION SQUARES (Enrichment Activity) 
The following activity can be used to provide subtraction computation practice at 
many levels (i.e. involving single and multiple digits and subtraction beyond 18) 
in different and interesting formats. This enrichment activity can be used in 
different forms and can serve as one of the following: 
Group activity Independent activity 
Cooperative activity Abstract procedure 
Learning Outcome: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to 
(a) Perform subtraction involving single and multiple digits in different and 
interesting formats. 
Materials: 
 Worksheet  Subtraction squares (Arithmagons). 
Procedure: 
(i) Ask pupils to perform subtractions along horizontal, vertical and diagonal 
lines for each of the subtraction square (arithmagon) provided in the 
Worksheet (Steps 1  4). 
17  16 = 1 12  8 = 4 
16  8 = 8 17  12 = 5 
6  4 = 2 6  2 = 4 
8  2 = 6 8  4 = 4 
Along Diagonal Lines
TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTION WITHIN 18  
127 
4  2 = 2 6  4 = 2 
Along Vertical and Horizontal lines 
2  2 = 0 
Along Diagonal Lines 
(ii) The above steps can be repeated using other numbers to provide more 
practice on subtraction. 
(iii) A master copy of the template (Blank Subtraction Squares or Arithmagons) 
is provided for you to make photocopies. Prepare enough copies of the 
template and distribute to pupils. 
Master Copy of the Blank Subtraction Squares (Arithmagon Template)
TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTION WITHIN 18 
128 
Try to find the answer for each question and state what is the best type of 
subtraction to use to solve each problem. 
(a) Rolando had 12 crayons and bought 6 more. 
(i) How many crayons does he have? 
(ii) He broke 6 crayons. How many crayons does he still have? 
(b) A mail carrier had 18 letters to deliver. He delivered 12 letters to the first 
house, 3 letters to the second house and 2 letters to the last house on the 
same street. How many more letters does he still have to deliver? 
(c) Timmy earned 9 stars for good behaviour last week and 7 stars this week 
but then he lost 10 stars for fighting. How many stars does he still have? 
 Several types of problem situations fall under the subtraction category. 
 All five types of subtraction situations (take away, additive, comparative, 
partitioning and incremental) make use of the minus or subtraction symbol 
() for recording the operation. 
 To perform subtraction involving numbers greater than 10, pupils should be 
provided with the opportunity to manipulate loose objects so that they can 
participate meaningfully in the regrouping process. 
 While practising subtraction with regrouping, pupils can be prompted to note 
down helpful patterns involving families of relevant facts. 
Additive 
Comparative 
Difference 
Incremental 
Partitioning 
Take away
TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTION WITHIN 18  
129 
In your discussion groups, try to differentiate between the 5 types of subtraction 
that have been discussed in this topic. 
Supposing your pupils have difficulty in deciding that a problem requires 
subtraction in order to be solved and then have trouble writing the appropriate 
subtraction sentence, explain how can you tackle this problem. 
APPENDIX 
WORKSHEET 
1. Draw lines to match the following.
TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTION WITHIN 18 
130 
Tick (ÂÊ) the answer in the correct boxes. 
2. Complete the table below. Subtract, find the remainder and write the 
missing numbers in words in the correct columns. 
Subtract Remainder Write in Words 
18  8 10 
__  3 thirteen 
__  0 15 
12  2 ten 
18  9 9 
17 __ eleven 
__ 5 thirteen 
13  3 10 
14  3 eleven
Topic 
7 
 Money 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Explain the concept of money in the form of notes and coins in 
Malaysian currency to your pupils; 
2. Represent the value of Malaysian money in symbols, viz. ÂRMÊ and 
ÂsenÊ; 
3. Differentiate between the value of various denominations of money; 
4. Exchange notes and coins for a given value of money within RM10; 
5. Add and subtract money in the form of coins and notes within RM10; 
and 
6. Solve simple problems involving money within RM10 in real-life 
situations. 
 INTRODUCTION 
Children gain a lot of mathematical knowledge informally through their 
experience with money in their daily lives. Learning how to count and use, as 
well as identify, coins are important basic skills related to money to be acquired 
at an early age. 
Spending money is an interesting way to reinforce your pupilsÊ basic 
mathematical skills such as addition, subtraction, multiplication and division 
besides other language skills such as reading comprehension. Understanding 
how to exchange money, plus knowing how much change you will receive when 
spending money and purchasing items, are crucial.
TOPIC 7 MONEY 
132 
However, pupilsÊ classroom learning experience is also important to help them 
clarify their misconceptions regarding money. One of the first concepts that 
children must understand is the value of coins and notes. In this topic, you will 
learn how you can help children to formalise their conceptual understanding of 
money. 
RECOGNISING NOTES AND COINS 
Money, both notes and coins, have its own size, shape and colour. In the 
Malaysian currency, different denominations of notes and coins are used in 
everyday life. It is important that children learn to recognise the various notes 
(named Ringgit) and coins (named Sen) in our currency. 
First, introduce your pupils to the sen, and then the ringgit. Use the following 
printable pages to assist in early money identification. Pupils may use the sheets 
as a colouring activity involving money including coins and notes or merely as a 
money reference sheet. Refer to Table 7.1 and Table 7.2 for Malaysian coins and 
notes in various denominations. 
Table 7.1: Malaysian Coins in Various Denominations 
Value Front Back 
1 sen 
5 sen 
10 sen 
7.1
TOPIC 7 MONEY  
133 
20 sen 
50 sen 
Table 7.2: Malaysian Notes in Various Denominations 
Value Front Back 
RM 1 
RM 2 
RM 5 
RM 10
TOPIC 7 MONEY 
134 
7.1.1 Recognise the Symbols for Money 
Before 1993, the symbols of Â$Ê and Â¢Ê were used to denote a certain value for 
money e.g. 20¢, 75¢, $5.00, $9.50, etc. The Malaysian currency was officially 
changed to the Ringgit (RM) in place of the dollar ($), while ÂsenÊ replaced cents 
(¢) e.g. 20 sen, 75 sen, RM5.00, RM9.50, etc. 
Some samples of teaching and learning activities for ÂMoneyÊ are described in 
this topic. 
The following activity allows children to learn to recognise and write money 
using the correct symbols. 
Activity 1: Recognise and Write Symbols and Words for Money 
Learning Outcome: 
By the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Name and write the value of money in symbols and in words. 
Materials: 
 Pencils; 
 Crayons; 
 Coins; and 
 Paper. 
Procedure: 
(i) Ask pupils to trace the pattern of the coin. Put a piece of paper over the 
coin, rub gently and then show it to the class 
(ii) Trace/draw coins and notes of various denominations. 
(iii) After that, ask them to cut and paste the money on the Worksheet given. 
(iv) Label the traced money or drawings using symbols and words in Table 7.3.
TOPIC 7 MONEY  
135 
Table 7.3: Money Tracing/Drawing 
Traced Money/Drawing Symbol Words 
10 sen ten sen 
50 sen fifty sen 
RM 10.00 ten ringgit 
SELF-CHECK 7.1 
How do blind people know the value of coins and notes? Jot down your 
ideas. 
7.1.2 The History of Money 
Money did not exist in the olden days initially. Prior to using money to trade, 
bartering was the only way goods were exchanged. However, the barter system 
was not very efficient as trading animals for other goods proved inconvenient. 
Money acts as an intermediary for market goods, which may be exchanged for 
other goods. Throughout history, money has taken many different forms, 
including scarce metals. Today, the majority of the types of money exchanged 
takes no physical form and only exists as bytes and bits in a computer's memory. 
Go to the following suggested links for learning about the history of money in 
general and Malaysian money specifically. Then view any home page for lessons 
to learn about money skills. 
 http://library.thinkquest.org/28718/history.html 
 http://moneymuseum.bnm.gov.my/index.php?ch=8
TOPIC 7 MONEY 
136 
The symbol of the Âcoin treeÊ (see Figure 7.1) logo is an adaptation from the 
Âpohon pitisÊ (the coin tree) made from a tin bearing 13 coins issued by Sultan 
Muhammad IV of the State of Kelantan in 1903 when it was still a tributary state 
of Siam. 
Figure 7.1: The coin tree 
Source: http://moneymuseum.bnm.gov.my 
(a) History of Money 
Thousands of years ago, money did not exist. There were no stores, markets 
or other places to spend money. People got their food, clothing and shelter 
from the land around them. For many years, people lived independently or 
on their own and had little or no contact with others who lived far away. 
In the early days, people exchanged goods by bartering for what they 
needed. For example, a person might trade animal skins for fresh fish or 
trade vegetables and grains for meat. Trading one item for another is called 
bartering. Under this arrangement, goods were exchanged for other goods. 
As the years went by, bartering became very popular. Markets were created 
where people could trade goods and people began to depend on getting 
things from others but this was not always convenient.
TOPIC 7 MONEY  
137 
Sometimes bartering can get kind of tricky. Let us say you go to the market 
with 50 fish and need to bring home animal skins and grains. However, the 
person trading animal skins does not need any fresh fish and wants other 
items for his animal skins. You could try to trade your fish for whatever he 
wants, but that would take a lot of time and effort. Instead, people 
developed another solution. They began to use special items, like tokens, 
that everyone agreed upon which had a certain value. You could trade your 
fish for tokens, and then you could use tokens to buy animal skins and 
grains. The animal skin merchant could use your tokens to buy whatever he 
needed. The token system was a great improvement, because everyone 
could use the tokens to get exactly what they needed. 
All around the world, people developed trading systems like these. Not all 
of them used tokens though. Salt, shells, barley, feathers and tea leaves 
were used in exchange for other goods. In most cultures, precious metals 
like gold and silver were also highly valued. Many people began trading 
goods for bits of gold or silver. It is hard to tell the value of a lump of metal 
just by looking at it, so merchants began weighing the gold and silver 
pieces. In many places, the metal was cut into circular discs and the weight 
was stamped on the discs so everyone would know its value. These 
stamped discs were the earliest coins! 
As the trading industry grew over the years, many countries decided to 
make official money. Governments made coins out of precious metals like 
gold and silver, and everyone agreed on the value of each one. The 
introduction of official coins made the buying and selling of goods within a 
country much easier. 
Through the ages, money has become not only a medium of exchange but 
also a unit and store of value. With time, money  in the form of paper 
currency or notes  was introduced as this was convenient to be issued. 
For years, most countries used only coins for their money. Coins last a long 
time and are easy to use. However, the citizens of China used another kind 
of money. The Chinese government made its money out of paper because 
precious metals were very rare in China. Moreover, paper bills are very 
light and easy to carry. After a number of years, other countries began to 
make paper money like the Chinese. These bills became very popular and 
made things much easier when buying expensive items. Can you imagine 
trying to buy a one hundred dollar item with coins? That would take a lot 
of coins indeed!
TOPIC 7 MONEY 
138 
Remember! 
Too many coins can become rather heavy for us to carry around so it is wise 
that we resort to using paper money or notes instead. 
Over the years, countries continued to develop new kinds of coins and bills, 
and we now have other ways to exchange money too. We can write 
cheques, use credit cards and transfer money electronically through 
automatic teller machines (ATMs), see Figure 7.2 for example. Despite these 
new technologies, the basics of our money system still remain the same. 
What kind of changes in the use of money do you think we will see in the 
next 100 years? 
Figure 7.2: Automatic Teller Machine (ATM) 
ACTIVITY 7.1 
Do you know why we use the ÂRinggitÊ in Malaysia, ÂYenÊ in Japan and 
ÂDollarÊ in America? Why do we have to change our money when we go 
to Japan or other countries? 
(b) The Barter System 
Have you ever wondered what it would be like and what we would do 
without money? To give children some idea about the barter system, 
engage them actively in a discussion about trading and fair trade. 
Arrange the children in groups of six. Give each group 12 index cards, a 
bottle of glue, scissors and magazines or departmental sales brochures, 
supermarket advertisements, newspaper cuttings, etc. Ask the children to 
cut and paste food items on six cards and clothing items on the remaining 
six cards. Have the children shuffle the cards and place them face down. 
Each group member then draws two cards. Children can barter (conduct
TOPIC 7 MONEY  
139 
fair trade) within their groups so that each member finishes with one food 
item and one clothing item. Bring the pupils together to talk about their 
experience with the bartering process. Stress on the fairness and efficiency 
of this type of trading. 
ACTIVITY 7.2 
Can you summarise the history of the flow of money since the barter 
system? Discuss. 
The following activities can be used to help pupils to learn to recognise and 
identify Malaysian currency in different ways. 
Activity 2: Recognising Malaysian Coins and Notes 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Recognise and say the name of various denominations of Malaysian coins 
e.g. one sen, five sen and ten sen; and 
(b) Recognise and say the name of various denominations of Malaysian notes 
e.g. one ringgit, five ringgit and ten ringgit. 
Materials: 
 Lyrics sheet: „Ten Little Sen‰; 
 Magnetic board; and 
 Specimen money (coins and notes) e.g. one sen, five sen and ten sen, one 
ringgit, five ringgit and ten ringgit. 
Procedure: 
(i) Teach the children the song, „Ten Little Sen‰ (sung to the tune of „Ten 
Little Indians‰. 
(ii) As the class sings, place a magnetic sen on the board for each sen 
mentioned in the song. 
(iii) When five sen is reached, put a five sen coin on the board. Similarly, when 
ten sen is reached, paste a ten sen coin on the board.
TOPIC 7 MONEY 
140 
(iv) Repeat the song, this time round, get the pupils to show the respective 
money as they sing along. 
Lyrics: 
One little, two little, three little sen; 
Four little, five little, six little sen; 
Seven little, eight little, nine little sen; 
Ten little sen make a ten sen. 
(v) Ask pupils to name the places where they can see people use money? An 
example is given in Figure 7.3. 
(vi) Extension Activity: Replace the word ÂsenÊ with ÂRinggitÊ to enable the 
pupils to recognise and say the name of Malaysian notes up to ten ringgit 
in a similar manner. 
Figure 7.3: People use money in hypermarkets to buy groceries 
Activity 3: Coin Patterns 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Recognise and trace the patterns of various Malaysian coins on to a sheet of 
paper; and 
(b) Identify the features of Malaysian coins. 
Materials: 
 Clean sheet of paper; 
 Pencils/crayons; and 
 Malaysian coins of various denominations.
TOPIC 7 MONEY  
141 
Procedure: 
(i) Teacher guides pupils to say aloud various denominations of Malaysian 
coins. 
(ii) Ask pupils to arrange and make a pattern using the coins. 
(iii) Ask them to put a sheet of paper over the coins and get them to trace or rub 
gently on the surfaces of the coin to obtain the coin pattern with crayons. 
(iv) Ask pupils to show and talk about the features of each coin traced in their 
small groups. 
(v) Guide pupils to summarise the features of various denominations of the 
Malaysian coins discussed. 
(vi) Attach a reference sheet of the coin patterns for pupils to refer to Table 7.1. 
Activity 4: Identifying Malaysian Coins 
Learning Outcomes: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Identify coins and their values; and 
(b) Write the amount of money based on a certain value of money given. 
Materials: 
 Coloured construction paper (Size A4); 
 Pencil; 
 Scissors; and 
 Specimen coins. 
Procedure: 
(a) Instructions/Practice: Ask pupils the following. 
(i) How many of you think you can count money really well and how 
many think you could improve with some practice? 
(ii) When it comes to counting money, bills are probably the easiest 
things to count. Why? (Possible response: The amount is written on 
them).
TOPIC 7 MONEY 
142 
(iii) How do we tell the coins apart? (Possible response: By their features: 
size, thickness and pictures). 
(iv) List the names of the coins and their values. 
(v) Now, as a class, determine the value of the money each time it is 
traded. 
(vi) How much money did you use at the end of the activity? 
(b) Model: 
(i) Demonstrate how to count money with the help of models (specimen 
money). Always start with the bill or coin of greatest value and work 
down to the bill or coin with the least value. 
(c) Guided Practice: 
(i) Give the class fake bills and coins to cut out and keep in an envelope 
throughout the activity. (Bills were copied on to green construction 
paper and coins were copied on to yellow construction paper). 
(ii) Tell them to count how much change they have and record their 
answers on their blank sheets of paper. 
(iii) Continue with other questions. (See ÂProcess QuestionsÊ next). Choose 
volunteers to demonstrate and explain how they got their answers. 
Process Questions: 
 How much change do you have? (RM3.28) 
 How much is 2 ringgit, 20 sen, 10 sen, 5 sen and 2 sen? (RM2.37) 
 How much is 1 five ringgit, 1 ringgit, 3 ten sen and 1 sen? 
(RM6.31) 
 How much is 1 five ringgit, 1 two ringgit, 2 ten sen, 1 twenty sen, 
and 5 one sen? (RM 7.45) 
 How much is 1 five ringgit, 1 two ringgit, 2 one ringgit and 9 ten 
sen? (RM9.90) 
 You want to buy a candy bar for 45 sen. You have 3 ten sen, a five 
sen and 3 sen. Do you have enough money? Why? (No, only 
RM0.38) 
 You have four coins that add up to RM 0.46. Which coins do you 
have?
TOPIC 7 MONEY  
143 
(d) Closure: 
Discuss the importance of knowing the value of different money. 
(e) Evaluation/Checking for Understanding: 
(i) Listen to pupilsÊ responses during the Âwhole-classÊ questioning 
process. 
(ii) Have pupils record their answers to the class questions on the paper 
provided. Check the responses together. 
7.1.3 Values of Coins and Notes 
The different denominations of coins that we use daily are shown here, for 
example, one sen, five sen, ten sen, twenty sen and fifty sen (See Figure 7.4). Do 
you remember the features of each coin? Can you describe them? 
Figure 7.4: Different denominations of Malaysian coins 
Various denominations of notes normally used by children include one ringgit, 
two ringgit, five ringgit and ten ringgit as illustrated in Table 7.2 earlier. 
Likewise, do you remember the features of each of these notes? Can you describe 
them? 
7.1.4 Counting Money (Ringgit and Sen) 
Lessons on ÂCounting money using coinsÊ will teach pupils to learn about the 
value of money. As mentioned earlier, learning how to count, use and identify 
coins is an important basic skill to be learnt at an early age. Printable worksheets 
and sample lessons will help your pupils master the skill of counting money with 
coins, whether they are just beginning to learn to count coins, or if they need 
additional practice to do so.
TOPIC 7 MONEY 
144 
Here is a fun way to reinforce money skills: 
(a) Take out a manila folder. 
(b) Open it up. 
(c) On the left side, draw a tree or paste a photocopy of it. 
(d) On the right side, have four library book pockets (or as many as you need 
to teach your concept). 
(e) Fill up the tree with little pieces of soft Velcro everywhere (on all parts of 
the branches) and take one sen, five sen, ten sen and twenty sen (cut-outs 
from a coin and coloured accordingly). 
(f) Glue them to small pictures of apples printed on construction paper. 
Laminate and place hard Velcro on the back of the ÂapplesÊ. Scatter the coins 
everywhere so that all the one sen can be separated from the ten sen, etc. 
such that the tree is now filled with ÂapplesÊ (i.e. all the scattered coins). 
(g) On the pockets, label the values of each denomination of coins: e.g. 1 sen, 5 
sen, 10 sen and 20 sen. 
(h) Give each pupil one of these folders and ask them to ÂpickÊ the apples from 
the tree and place them in the correct pocket. For example, if a child ÂpicksÊ 
a one sen, he or she places it in the pocket that is labelled Â1 senÊ. 
(i) When they are done, it is very easy to check their work because all you 
have to do is to empty out the pockets and make sure each coin is matched 
with its appropriate value. 
(j) Get pupils to count the money in the respective pockets and write the value 
using the correct symbols. 
(k) Repeat the above steps and make another money tree using ringgit in place 
of sen. 
(l) Ask pupils to count the money by combining various pockets containing 
ringgit and sen to let them practise counting money in ringgit and sen. 
It has been shown that pupils who have worked with this activity all loved to 
ÂpickÊ the apples from the tree. As a point of interest, the money tree idea can be 
modified for teaching other concepts, for instance, addition and subtraction facts, 
telling the time, picture-word identification, phonics activities, etc. In fact, you
TOPIC 7 MONEY  
145 
can choose any concept to ÂpickÊ from the tree as suggested by Ms. Jany Mederos, 
in ÂBeginning Teacher, 1st and 2nd grade Autistic, Miami, FLÊ. 
7.1.5 Exchanging Notes and Coins 
Another money skill to be learnt by pupils involves ÂMaking changeÊ. The 
following activity illustrates how children can be taught to exchange notes and 
coins when performing buying and selling activities. 
Activity 5: Making Change 
Learning Outcomes: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Count the correct change in sen; and 
(b) Exchange notes (ringgit) and coins (sen). 
Materials: 
 Activity sheet (containing pictured items); 
 Construction paper; 
 Scissors; 
 Specimen money (one ringgit and sen of various denominations); 
 Pen markers/coloured pencils/crayons; and 
 Glue. 
Procedure: 
(i) Give groups of children an Activity Sheet, scissors and Specimen money 
(Notes and coins). 
(ii) Ask children to cut out the cards on the activity sheet and then fill in a price 
of 99 sen or less for each item shown. 
(iii) Ask each group member to select an item to buy, pretend to pay for it with 
one ringgit notes and then use the play money to show how much change 
they will receive. 
(iv) Group members can check each otherÊs work. Let the children paste their 
items and coins on construction paper after each transaction.
TOPIC 7 MONEY 
146 
ADDING AND SUBTRACTING MONEY 
7.2 
Different amounts of money may be written in several ways. Coins may be 
written with the ÂsenÊ symbol and the ringgit can be written with the ringgit 
symbol (ÂRMÊ). Adding money that is expressed in these forms just involves 
adding the amounts and placing the proper symbols on the answer. 
One way to add money is to count the coins and then the notes on the price tag 
for each item pictured. Often money is written as a decimal with the ringgit to 
the left of the decimal point and the sen to the right of the decimal point. For 
example, five ringgit and eighty-seven sen is written as RM5.87. 
Money amounts are added the same way as decimals are added. Remember to 
put the RM sign before the answer. Similarly, money amounts are subtracted the 
same way as decimals are subtracted. Again, remember to put the RM sign 
before the answer. In short, subtracting and adding money are just like 
subtracting and adding other decimal numbers. Always line up the decimal 
points when subtracting and adding decimals. 
Let children practise adding and subtracting money in the following way: 
„Let us pretend you have ten ringgit to buy vegetables. Practise buying items 
from a grocery store and making change using decimal numbers. Use your skills 
with decimals to find the answers to these questions. Remember to put the 
decimal point in the proper place in your answer‰. 
Grocery List 
Grape juice RM 2.00 
Pickles RM 1.80 
Banana 85 sen 
Did you know? 
The word, money, comes from the Latin word, 
ÂMonetaÊ. ÂMonetaÊ was the name of the place 
in ancient Rome where money was made. 
Activity 6: Shopping with Money 
Learning Outcomes: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Have hands-on experience of buying and selling with money within RM10; 
(b) Add and subtract money appropriately; 
(c) Solve word problems involving the addition and subtraction of money 
within RM10; and
TOPIC 7 MONEY  
147 
(d) Create word problems involving the addition and subtraction of money 
within RM10. 
Materials: 
 Jotter book; 
 Shopping Cards; 
 Play Money; 
 BuyersÊ Worksheet; and 
 SellersÊ Worksheet. 
Procedure: 
(a) Each pupil is to prepare his play money worth of RM5 a day before. 
(b) Ask pupils to recall the algorithms for the addition and subtraction of 
money. 
(c) Emphasise the importance of the ÂRMÊ sign, the decimal pointÂ.Ê, and the 
alignment of the signs and numbers. 
(d) Split the class into two groups and start briefing the pupils on the activity. 
(e) Pupils work in pairs. Assign them as ÂSellersÊ or ÂBuyersÊ. Each pair of 
ÂSellersÊ and ÂBuyersÊ can only trade within their group. 
(f) Each pair of pupils is to combine their play money to total up to RM10. 
(g) First, brief the ÂBuyersÊ on their roles. 
(i) They will go on a shopping spree to buy three items using their 
money. Once they buy an item, they get to keep the item card. 
(ii) The items bought and the amounts spent have to be recorded on their 
worksheet. 
(iii) At the end of the shopping spree, they have to total up their 
expenditure and find out how much they have left. 
(iv) Then, they have to count their play money to tally with their 
worksheet. 
(h) Next, brief the ÂSellersÊ on their roles. 
(i) Each pair of pupils is to display their goods along with the price tags 
(matching colour).
TOPIC 7 MONEY 
148 
(ii) They will sell their goods to whichever ÂBuyersÊ who are interested. 
When the item is sold, the price tag is turned over. 
(iii) After each sale, they have to record the item sold and the amount 
spent on their worksheet. 
(iv) At the end of the shopping spree, they have to total up their earnings 
with the RM10 they have at the start of the activity to find the amount 
of money in their possession. 
(v) Then, they have to count their play money to tally with their 
worksheet. 
(i) Tell pupils that they may need to use their jotter books to do the working 
when calculating the change. 
(j) Give out the worksheets to the respective pairs. 
(k) Distribute the shopping cards to the ÂSellersÊ. 
(l) Carry out the activity. 
(m) Collect the worksheets and shopping cards. 
Activity 7: Money in the Bank 
Learning Outcome: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Use coins to practise their addition and subtraction skills involving money. 
Materials: 
 Small container with a lid; 
 Basic art supplies (scissors, construction paper and crayons); 
 A pair of dice; and 
 12 ten sen per pupil. 
Procedure: 
(i) Teacher holds up some coins and asks pupils to identify them. Review the 
monetary value of each combination of coins. 
(ii) Ask pupils to make their own piggy banks out of the small containers. Give 
one to each pupil and let them decorate their piggy bank with the art 
supplies.
TOPIC 7 MONEY  
149 
(iii) Put three ten sen inside each pupil's bank and place 9 more outside their 
banks. Ask them to determine the value of their coins. 
(iv) Roll the dice to determine how much money they will have in the bank. 
Pupils will then put in or take out the appropriate number of sen from their 
bank. (eg. Roll a six and they will put in three more sen). Ask them to count 
the number of remaining sen outside the bank. 
(v) Conduct several trials. Allow them to take turns to roll the dice. 
(vi) When they are done, collect all the sen and allow your pupils to take home 
their banks. 
Assessment: 
 Observe pupils as they place the appropriate amount of money in their 
banks. 
7.2.1 Adding Coins and Notes (Worksheet) 
What can you buy with the money in the box? Use the following worksheet (see 
Table 7.4) and ask your pupils to add up the sums of money on the left before 
matching the correct amount with the price of the items on the right. 
Table 7.4: Matching Activities 
RM 7, 10 sen, 20 sen, 20 sen 
(40 sen) 
RM 1, RM 2, RM 5, 10 sen, 20 sen 
(RM 8.30)
TOPIC 7 MONEY 
150 
5 sen, 10 sen, 10 sen 
(RM 7.50) 
10 sen, 10 sen, 20 sen 
(25 sen) 
7.2.2 Subtracting Coins and Notes 
The following worksheet (see Table 7.5), can be used to teach the skill of 
subtracting coins and notes. 
Table 7.5: Subtracting Coins 
I Have I Buy Money Left 
50 sen, 20 sen, 20 sen 
45 sen 
_______ sen 
RM 5, 50 sen 
RM 3.50 sen 
RM _______
TOPIC 7 MONEY  
151 
RM 1, RM 5 
RM 2 
RM _______ 
7.2.3 Finding Balance within RM10.00 
The following worksheets provide practice for finding the change or balance 
within RM10.00. 
Write down the amount of change you will get back in Table 7.6. 
Table 7.6: Working Out the Change 
Item I Gave My Change 
85 sen 
50 sen, 20 sen, 20 sen _______ sen 
RM 3.50 
RM 5 RM _______
TOPIC 7 MONEY 
152 
RM 1.20 
RM 1.50 sen _______ sen 
Name _____________________________ Date ___________________ 
Buying Food and Getting Change 
Show your pupils the following food with their respective prices. 
40 sen 5 sen 35 sen 
40 sen 5 sen 
Draw an X on the change received after buying the items pictured, see Table 
7.7.
TOPIC 7 MONEY  
153 
Table 7.7: Getting the Change 
Purchase These Items Pay Change Got Back 
1. 
100 sen 
2. 
25 sen 
3. 
50 sen 
4. 
25 sen 
5. 
75 sen 
USING MONEY (SPENDING MONEY AND 
CONSUMER MATHEMATICS LESSONS) 
7.3 
Allow pupils to learn and practise their money spending skills by using various 
worksheets, lesson plans, lessons, activities and exercises on spending money. 
Spending money is an interesting way to reinforce pupilsÊ basic mathematical 
skills such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, division and other skills 
including reading comprehension. Therefore, it is important to let children learn 
practical consumer mathematical skills including buying and bartering for goods 
or services. 
Children are not born with Âmoney senseÊ. They learn by what they see, hear and 
experience and parents have a very strong influence on all of these. Childhood is 
the appropriate time to learn about money management, when parents are able
TOPIC 7 MONEY 
154 
to provide them with learning experiences that will benefit them in years to 
come. 
Family councils are an excellent way to help children learn how to manage 
money. This can be done by helping them understand what money means, how 
to make wise and satisfying choices, how to use money to get things important to 
them and how to have money on hand for daily needs as well as for emergencies 
and future needs. 
Children need to have money of their own to learn how to manage it. An 
allowance is a better teaching method than simply giving children money upon 
their request. An allowance for children should be a set amount, paid out 
regularly and not tied to regular tasks required of the child. When deciding on 
the amount of an allowance, discuss what items would be covered. The amount 
should be large enough so that the child has money to manage with no strings 
attached. 
Money should not be used as a means to discipline, such as an incentive for good 
grades or as a reward for doing household tasks. If money is used in this manner, 
a child will get the idea that everyone and everything has a price tag. In addition, 
money should not be used to buy love or as a substitute for companionship. 
Suggestions: Using Your Own Money 
(a) What do you spend your money on? 
(b) Keep an account book for a week to find out what you spent on. 
(c) How much do you save each week? 
(d) Where do you put your savings? 
(e) What are you saving your money for? 
Date Money In Date Money Out 
Record 
how much 
you receive 
Record 
what you buy, 
what it costs
TOPIC 7 MONEY  
155 
A dash of humour will certainly make your lessons more interesting. Some jokes 
on money are given below: 
Jokes 
Where do you find money? 
In the dictionary under M 
Where do fish put their money? 
In the riverbank 
Which is the richest insect in the world? 
The centipede 
7.3.1 Changing Money 
Changing money is a skill that needs to be reinforced amongst children. Let us 
take a look at the following scenario/situation: 
Nina and her friends save money for charity. 
Nina has 132 sen. 
The bank changes them for her. 
She gets: 1 one ringgit, 2 one sen and 3 ten sen 
We write: RM1.32 
Ringgit sen 
We put a decimal point between the ringgit and the sen when writing out the 
value for the amount of money saved. 
7.3.2 Lessons on Counting and Making Change 
One of the more difficult but basic money skills is understanding how to make 
change and knowing how much change you will receive when spending money 
and purchasing an item or items. Use these worksheets and lessons to help your 
pupils learn how to make change. Practice is available with coins and notes. 
Learn to make change for a ringgit. Teach by creating your own money 
Worksheets and Interactive lessons.
TOPIC 7 MONEY 
156 
Please note that making change requires more advanced money skills. Prior to 
using these lessons, pupils should have mastered other more basic money skills, 
including identifying coins and bills in the main Âcounting money lessonsÊ 
category. 
Enrichment Activity: 
(a) Fund Raiser 
Allow the pupils to decide on how to raise money and the cause. 
Discuss: Where will the money go to? 
(Perhaps having a charity function or a class trip, for example.) 
(b) Discuss how pupils earn money. How many people receive an allowance? 
Create a class graph on the amounts of allowance received. Analyse the 
results. What do pupils do with their allowance? 
(c) Distribute a Worksheet. 
 Pupils should be familiar with money right from preschool days. They 
should be taught to recognise and know the values of various coins and notes 
of the Malaysian currency. 
 Classroom experience should aim at helping pupils clear their misconceptions 
in order to formalise their daily experiences involving money. 
 Activities like trading games including buying and selling are effective in 
helping pupils to understand the concept of money. 
 Various active learning experiences such as games and hands-on activities with 
manipulation are important to help pupils consolidate their understanding of 
money. 
Allowance 
Budget 
Coins 
Currency 
Earn 
Purchase 
Savings 
Spend
TOPIC 7 MONEY  
157 
Try to find how money became a historical document of society when it was first 
issued. Have a class discussion with your tutor. 
Good nation development comes from good financial management and people 
who are highly-skilled. How can this kind of people be developed in the 
classroom for the future?
TOPIC 7 MONEY 
158 
APPENDIX 
WORKSHEET (ENRICHMENT EXERCISE) 
Money in Hand Things Bought Balance
Topic 
8 
 Teaching the 
Measurement 
of Time 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Explain the historical development of measuring time and the 
calendar; 
2. Explain the major mathematical skills for teaching the measurement 
of time; 
3. Recognise the pedagogical content knowledge for teaching the 
measurement of time; 
4. Identify four difficulties in teaching the measurement of time; and 
5. Plan teaching and learning activities for the measurement of time. 
 INTRODUCTION 
This topic will give you some ideas about teaching the measurement of time to 
young children. Besides basic comprehension skills in telling time, this topic also 
covers the history of telling time as well as the strategy of teaching and learning 
the measurement of time. Specifically, the major mathematical skills related to 
the measurement of time are as stated below: 
(a) Tell the time and events of the day; 
(b) Name the days of the week; 
(c) Name the months of the year; and 
(d) Read and write the time.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 
160 
You will find that by following this topic with its step by step approach, it will be 
easy to learn the ideas of teaching the measurement of time especially to 
kindergarten or pre-school pupils. There are many examples of teaching 
activities in this topic. They have been designed for application in the classroom 
using concrete materials through practical methods including the inquiry-discovery 
method, demonstration, simulation, etc. The inquiry-discovery method 
covers activities such as planning, investigating, analysing and discovering. The 
activities in this chapter will guide you as to how to create a good and conducive 
classroom environment in order to teach the topic of ÂTimeÊ more efficiently. A 
discussion of the history of measuring time, the concept of events of a day, telling 
time, the days of the week, the months of the year and the calendar, etc. is 
included. In addition to hands-on materials such as the wall clock, models of 
clocks and the calendar, you are also encouraged to find some other materials 
like online calendars or tasks from websites to make your teaching more 
interesting, meaningful and enjoyable. There are many types of tasks which are 
suitable as consolidation activities such as games, songs, etc. and samples of 
worksheets are provided as well. Completing this topic will make you more 
confident in teaching the measurement of time. 
HISTORY OF MEASUREMENT OF TIME 
8.1 
In this section, we will further discuss the historical development of measuring 
time and calendar in further detail. 
8.1.1 Historical Development of Measuring Time 
Prehistoric man came up with a very primitive method of measuring time by 
simple observation of the stars, changes of the seasons, plus day and night. It was 
necessary for them to plan their nomadic activity, farming, sacred feasts, etc. 
Before clocks and watches existed, the earliest measurements of time were made 
using the sundial (see Figure 8.1), the hourglass, the sand clock, the wax clock 
and the water clock. 
In early times, the forerunners to the sundial were poles and sticks, as well as, 
larger objects such as pyramids and other tall structures. Later, the more formal 
sundial was invented. It was generally a round disk marked with the hours like a 
clock. However, the ancient Egyptian sundial clock (3100 B.C.) shape was quite 
different from the Chinese sundial (1100 B.C.).
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME  161 
Figure 8.1: The sundial 
Source: Mok (2005) 
The hourglass used in England 1200 years ago was made up of two rounded 
glass bulbs connected by a narrow neck of glass between them. When the 
hourglass was turned upside down, a measured amount of sand particles 
streamed through from the top to the bottom bulb of the glass (see Figure 8.3). 
Figure 8.2: The sand clock 
Source: Mok (2005) 
Another ancient tool for measuring time was the water clock or the clepsydra 
shown in Figure 8.3, found during the Roman civilisation (200BC). It was an 
evenly marked container with a spout in which water dripped out. As the water 
dripped out of the container, one could note what time it was by looking at the 
water level against the markings.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 
162 
Figure 8.3: The clepsydra 
Source: Mok (2005) 
The more advanced clocks known as mechanical clocks, which used weights or 
springs, came into existence in the 1300s. At first, they had no faces and no hour 
or minute hands, rather they struck a bell every hour. Later, clocks with the hour, 
and then the minute hands, began to appear. In the 1400s, clocks with their hands 
controlled by a coiled spring were made. With this discovery, smaller clocks and 
later watches were made. 
In 1656, Christian Huygens invented clocks which used weights and a swinging 
pendulum, known as the pendulum clock. These clocks were much more 
accurate than previous clocks. Then, in 1761, John Harrison finally succeeded at 
inventing a small clock accurate enough to be used for navigation at sea. This 
tiny pocket watch lasted only five to six weeks. In the early 1800s, Eli Terry 
developed machines, patterns, and techniques that produced clock parts that 
were exactly alike. This drove the price of clocks way down low and allowed 
common people to own at least one time-keeping device. 
8.1.2 Historical Development of the Calendar 
The oldest calendar in history was designed by the Egyptians around 4000BC. It 
had only 360 days, based on observation of the movement of the sun. It was later 
modified and improved by the Romans. The Roman calendar (46BC) contained 
365 days in a year with one day added for February every four years. Each 
month contained 30 or 31 days except for February, with 28 days in a normal 
year and 29 days for leap years.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME  163 
People of China and Arabia also devised their own calendars which were based 
on the movement of the moon. Both calendars were divided into 12 months with 
every month containing either 29 or 30 days. The Arabic calendar or Islamic 
calendar (i.e. Taqwim Hijrah begins with the month of Muharram as the first 
month and ends with the 12th month, Zulhijjah). 
In 1852, Pope Gregory XIII redesigned the Roman calendar to become a new 
calendar known as the Gregorian calendar. One year was divided into 52 weeks. 
Each week contained seven days beginning from Sunday and ending on 
Saturday. There are 12 months in one year starting from January and ending in 
December. This calendar is the one that is most popular and is generally accepted 
as the official calendar throughout the world today. Figure 8.4 explains the 
chronological development of calendars starting from Ancient Egypt in 3100BC 
until Europe in 1582AD. 
Figure 8.4: Chronological development of calendars 
Source: Mok (2005) 
TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 
8.2 
This section will further discuss the teaching measurement of time including time 
of the day, telling time, time duration, days of the week, months of the year and, 
finally, the difficulties in teaching the measurement of time. 
8.2.1 Time of the Day 
Children start learning about time by telling the time of the day i.e. day time and 
night time. This can be done by relating various phrases denoting time into their 
daily routines.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 
164 
MORNING  I wake up in the morning. 
 Norli goes to school in the morning. 
NOON  It is noon, I am in school. 
 Norli learns mathematics in school at noon. 
AFTERNOON  I have my lunch in the afternoon. 
 Norli goes home in the afternoon. 
EVENING  I am playing football in the evening. 
 Norli goes to the garden in the evening. 
NIGHT  I do my homework at night. 
 Norli watches television at night. 
MIDNIGHT  We will be fast asleep at midnight. 
To reinforce the usage of the correct time phrases mentioned above, take some 
pictures and stick them on the board in sequence, starting from day time to night 
time. You are encouraged to use appropriate pictures to illustrate the events 
happening at that time according to the time given (see Figure 8.5). 
Figure 8.5: Different times of a day
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME  165 
Guide your pupils to carry out a discussion according to the events in the 
pictures shown. When introducing them to telling the time of the day, include an 
appropriate analogue clock although they have not been taught how to tell the 
time yet. Figure 8.5 shows a sample of a teaching-learning material for teaching 
the skill of telling the time of a day to young children. 
SELF-CHECK 8.1 
List some activities or events of the day that children always do. Explain 
how to conduct an effective lesson on teaching your pupils how to tell 
time. 
8.2.2 Telling Time 
How do we start to teach kindergarten or young children to tell the time? Firstly, 
let them look back at the pictures used for teaching them how to tell the time of 
the day used in the previous lesson. Then teach them how to say the time shown 
on the clock face given in the pictures. Since they are able to count from 1 to 12, 
children should have no difficulty telling the time although they are usually not 
used to telling the time yet at this stage. 
Next, introduce the minute hand and hour hand on a clock face, see Figure 8.6. 
Figure 8.6: Clock face: Minute and hour hands 
Have them count the minutes on the clock in 5s and show them that every time 
the minute hand goes one complete round from the number Â12Ê to Â12Ê, the hour 
hand moves on to the next number. Then point out that every time the hour hand 
moves to another number, the minute hand is on the number 12. When the
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 
166 
minute hand is on the number 12, it is called o'clock (of the clock) and we read 
the time as the number that the hour hand is pointing to, such as, 7 oÊclock, for 
example. They build their understanding of the measurement of time by 
repeated reference to the clock, using the position of the hands for hours and 
minutes as shown in Figure 8.7. 
Figure 8.7: Telling the time 
In addition, you may put in the digital time together with the analogue time in 
your teaching material (i.e. using appropriate picture cards); see Figure 8.8. 
Relate how to tell the time with a specific Âtime of the dayÊ, for example, 4 oÊclock 
in the evening, see Figure 8.6. 
Figure 8.8: Timeline 
Figure 8.9: Picture card with clock face
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME  167 
Teaching the measurement of time requires repetitive hands-on experimentation. 
There are many types or multiple clock face manipulative for use in the classroom. 
The better ones have the hands geared together so that rotating the minute hand 
one full revolution causes the hour hand to move from one hour to the next. 
Children should answer questions about the time indicated on the clock, and 
record their responses, starting with the hour values. They should also be taught 
how to set the clocks according to the time given by turning the hands of the clock. 
Discuss different timepieces (e.g. clock, watch, timer, hourglass. Guide them to 
recognise the types of timepieces they have at home. Let children design a chart 
that displays their findings. Then, show some of the earliest instruments for 
measuring time using a PowerPoint presentation on the sundial, candle clock, 
sand clock, etc.) 
SELF-CHECK 8.2 
Teaching time using a circular clock face with the hour and minute 
hands will make it easier for children to learn the measurement of time. 
Discuss. 
8.2.3 Time Duration 
Figure 8.10: Time piece  the hourglass 
Have you seen the above instrument before? Can you think of its connection to 
this topic? 
Time duration is a difficult concept to teach because the circumstances vary so 
much from situation to situation. There are, however, several aspects of children's 
lives at school and at home in which elapsed time is important. Initially, you do 
not need to state the duration of time in minutes or seconds specifically. At this 
time, just let them know about the passing of time and compare among elapsed
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 
168 
times for short term events and longer timed events (in which case, you may teach 
them to state the period of time in hours). Events in daily life that help children to 
understand the concept of time duration include the following: 
(a) Elapsed time for: 
(i) Eating (e.g. Fried rice, pizza, doughnut); 
(ii) A movie/video/television show; 
(iii) A football game (or other games); 
(iv) Running around the field (and other distances); 
(v) A nap; and 
(vi) Various classes at school. 
(b) Longer time for: 
(i) A baby to be born; 
(ii) A chick to be hatched; and 
(iii) Bean plants to grow a metre high. 
Can you give some more appropriate examples of both types of time duration? 
Ask your children to estimate the time duration or period of time in hours. 
8.2.4 Days of the Week 
ACTIVITY 8.1 
Find attractive online calendars from any website which are suitable to be 
used when introducing this section in class. Do a slide presentation and 
discuss with your classmates. 
The days of the week starts with Sunday, Monday, right till Saturday. You are 
encouraged to introduce the days of the week using a calendar. For more 
interesting presentations, click on any attractive calendars on the Web e.g. 
Calendar for the year 2012 (United States), Utusan Malaysia Online, etc.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME  169 
Then, have the children name the days of the week on the calendar and sing a Â7 
days of the weekÊ song. The teacher can make large name cards for the days of 
the week and have children hold them up when they recite the days of the week. 
The children can also parade with the cards along with the music and sing the 
ÂDays of the weekÊ songs too (See Figure 8.11). 
Figure 8.11: Example of cards sing along with the music 
Source: Hummingbird Education Resource 
The important vocabulary that you have to use in teaching the days of the week 
include these words: 
The following examples show how we use these words in daily life situations.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 
170 
(a) In statement sentences as below: 
(b) In question form such as: 
(i) Today is Thursday. What day was yesterday? 
Answer: Yesterday was Wednesday. 
(ii) Today is Wednesday. What day is tomorrow? 
Answer: Tomorrow is Thursday. 
(iii) What day comes after Friday? 
Answer: Saturday comes after Friday. 
(iv) What day comes before Saturday? 
Answer: Friday comes before Saturday. 
SELF-CHECK 8.3 
Produce a suitable worksheet that can be used for teaching the days of 
the week.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME  171 
8.2.5 Months of the Year 
Figure 8.12: Example of a calendar 
Source: http://manhunt.wikia.com 
Find a suitable online calendar which can be used when introducing this section 
in the class, see Figure 8.12. Make use of slide presentations. 
There are 12 months in a year i.e. January, February, right till December. Since 
children are able to count from 1 to 12, there should be no difficulties in 
arranging all the months in sequence. However, they may face some difficulties 
in the spelling of the words. 
You may start your lesson by asking your children about the special days 
occurring in each month of the year. Let us look at some festive celebrations in 
Malaysia.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 
172 
Some other appropriate celebrations include MotherÊs Day, FatherÊs Day and 
ChildrenÊs Day. Find out which months they fall in. 
Singing varieties of songs of the Months of the Year will help children to master 
the learning of the months in a year easier. 
For example, do the actions for the song „Macarena‰ as you sing or chant the 
months in a year. Forming a square, repeat the song four times, see Figure 8.12. 
This is definitely a class favourite! 
Figure 8.13: Songs lyrics 
Source: Hummingbird Education Resource 
Generally, pupils are able to arrange all or most of the months in sequence from 
January to December, but they may also have difficulties in arranging some of 
the months. Thus, have them arrange a few months in sequence first and increase 
gradually or progressively as an exercise like the one described.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME  173 
Example: 
1. Arrange the months in sequence: 
2. Then, by using the questioning technique, ask them some questions as 
follows: 
(a) What is the month after March? September? July? 
(b) What is the month before March? September? July? 
(c) May comes before _____________. 
(d) October comes after _____________, and so on. 
(e) How many days are there in January? March? October? 
(f) Which month/s contain/s 30 days? 31 days? 28 days? 29 days? 
3. Guide pupils to read and write the months using word cards, for example: 
4. Finally, ask pupils to state their birthday (or any other celebrations day) 
and show the day on the calendar. Get them to recognise the date today! 
5. Distribute Worksheet 1. 
8.2.6 Difficulties in Teaching the Measurement of 
Time 
You ought to know some aspects about the measurement of time which make it 
difficult to be learnt amongst young children. This is because: 
(a) Time is an abstract concept; 
(b) Time is measured using a mixture of non-decimal systems such as base 12 
and base 60 systems and when extended to include days, months and years, 
base 4, 7, 365 and 28, 29, 30 as well as 31 systems are involved; 
(c) Time is measured indirectly  by the movement of the sun, the hands on a 
clock face, the changing of digits in a display, the changing seasons, etc.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 
174 
(d) Clocks come in all sorts of styles and designs  some with all 12 numerals 
shown, (some use Roman numerals), others with only 12, 3, 6 and 9 
numerals shown, and still others with no numerals at all on the clock face. 
ACTIVITY 8.2 
Search any suitable website to find various games which are suitable to be 
used in the teaching and learning of the measurement of time in the 
classroom. Discuss your findings with your classmates. 
SAMPLE LESSONS OR ACTIVITIES FOR 
TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 
8.3 
In this section, we will discuss further the sample lessons or activities for 
teaching the measurement of time. 
Lesson 1: Telling Time in Hours 
Vocabulary: 
 Hour, o'clock, minute hand, hour hand 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Recognise the elements of a clock and explain their functions; and 
(b) Tell time to the hour. 
Materials: 
 TeacherÊs transparency of a demo clock; 
 PupilsÊ individual clocks (cardboard/paper plate clock faces) with arrow 
cards; 
 Numeral cards (1  12); 
 Time index cards (1 oÊclock  12 oÊclock); and 
 PowerPoint presentations on the earliest instruments for measuring time.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME  175 
Procedure: 
(i) Set Induction 
Discuss different timepieces (e.g. clock, watch, timer, hourglass). Guide 
them to recognise the types of timepieces they have at home. Then show 
them various types of the earliest instruments for measuring time using a 
PowerPoint presentation e.g. sundial, candle clock, sand clock, etc. Use 
suitable websites. Tell them how prehistoric man measured time. 
(ii) Show the Big Demo Clock 
Ask pupils how many big numbers are on the clock? Have pupils point to 
the hour hand. Tell them that when the hour hand moves from one number 
to the next, one hour has passed. Get pupils to discuss what they can do in 
an hour. 
(iii) Have Pupils Point to the Minute Hand 
Tell them that when the minute hand moves from one tick mark to the 
next, one minute has passed. Ask them what they can do in a minute. 
(iv) Review 
Review that the minute (long-blue) hand points to the 12, while the hour 
(short-red) hand indicates the hour (i.e. 1, 4, 8, etc). Guide them to read the 
time for each time shown in the o'clock form. Later, let them write the 
time in words and symbols. 
e.g. „The minute hand points to 12‰. „The hour hand points to 1‰. 
„It is 1 oÊclock (or one oÊclock)‰. 
(v) Team or Group Work 
 Divide the classroom into teams. Have each group of pupils make a 
paper plate clock face. Using a brass paper fastener, attach a tag board 
or construction paper hands to the centre of the plate. These clocks can 
then be used in various reinforcement activities. For example, as the 
teacher calls out a specific time, the pupils show the correct time on 
their clocks (adapted to a team game).
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 
176 
 Give each pupil a worksheet (clock faces without the hour and minute 
hands) and let them draw in the minute and hour hands to show the 
correct time. Can you suggest some exercises to be included in the 
worksheet? Jot down your questions and answers. 
(vi) Simulation Activity 
Write times to the hour from 1 o'clock to 12 oÊclock on index cards and a 
number from 1 to 12 on a tag-board square. Place the numbers 1 to 12 in a 
large circle to form a clock-face. Children sit around the clock formed. Give 
12 children a time card each to be kept facedown. Two volunteers are 
needed to stand in the centre of the clock to be the hour hand (hold a long-blue 
arrow card) and the minute hand (hold short-red arrow card) 
respectively. 
(vii) Ask Who Wants to be the Minute Hand and the Hour Hand 
 Show 1 oÊclock. Where should the minute hand point to? Where 
should the hour hand point to? Both ÂminuteÊ and ÂhourÊ hand pupils 
have to point to the correct number on the tag-board. Check the 
answer! 
 Repeat the activity until all the children have a turn to show the time. 
(viii) Give out the second worksheet. 
(ix) Closure 
Have an open discussion on the importance of spending time effectively in 
their daily life. 
Lesson 2: Concept of Time and Period: Day Time and Night Time 
Vocabulary: 
 Morning, afternoon, noon, evening, night, midnight. 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Name the various parts of the day; and 
(b) Recognise the various parts of the day based on different daily activities.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME  177 
Materials: 
 PowerPoint slides (pictures related to daily activities); 
 Picture cards (activities of a day); 
 Flash cards (written ÂmorningÊ, ÂafternoonÊ, etc.); and 
 Clock. 
Procedure: 
(i) Set induction: 
Open discussion on what pupils do as a routine everyday during the day 
time and night time (e.g. in the morning, afternoon, noon, evening and 
night). 
(ii) Teacher shows a series of pictures related to daily activities using 
PowerPoint slides. Guide pupils to state what they see in the pictures, for 
example: Waking up in the morning, going to school, Âplaying footballÊ, 
etc.) 
(iii) Place a series of pictures related to daily activities in sequence. 
(iv) By referring to the pictures shown, introduce words such as morning, 
afternoon, noon, evening, night and midnight, see Figure 8.14. Guide 
pupils to place the flash cards just below the relevant picture. 
Figure 8.14: Word cards 
Guide pupils to read clearly all the events of a day by referring to the 
pictures given. 
(v) Guide the pupils to tell their own daily activities. 
 What do you do in the morning? In the afternoon? At night? 
 Can you tell the time? (Just let them think about the time).
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 
178 
(vi) Group activity: 
Teacher gives a different set of daily activities to each group. Ask them to 
arrange the events in sequence. Let them present and read the sentences 
related to the pictures. 
(vii) Let them do some exercises in a worksheet. 
(viii) Closure: 
Open discussion on the disadvantages of wasting time for everyone. 
Lesson 3: Calculate the Duration of Time from a Calendar 
Vocabulary: 
 Calendar 
Learning Outcomes: 
By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Read information from the calendar given; and 
(b) Calculate the numbers of days in a week, the numbers of months in a year, 
and the numbers of days in a year. 
Materials: 
 Calendar; 
 Activity cards; 
 Flash cards (day cards); 
 PowerPoint slides; and 
 Worksheet. 
Procedure: 
(i) Set induction: 
Show a calendar in the slides. Have them look at the calendar. Referring to 
the calendar, begin by asking questions: 
 What do you see in the calendar? 
 What is the purpose of a calendar? 
 Do you have any calendars at home? What types of calendars do you 
have?
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME  179 
(ii) Lead a discussion and guide pupils to tell the information in the calendar 
(e.g. Show a calendar for the month of January 2012). Introduce the concept 
of ÂweekÊ and ÂmonthÊ. 
 A week starts from Sunday to Saturday. How many days are there in a 
week? 
 How many weeks are there in a month? How many days are there in 
the month of January? 
(iii) Show the complete calendar for the year 2012. Give them a piece of the 
calendar (or photocopy of the calendar in A4 paper) each. 
 How many months are there in a year? 
 Can you count the number of days in the year 2012? Tell me how. 
(iv) Group activity (groups of four  five persons): 
Give them the seven-day name cards (Sunday, Monday, , Saturday). Ask 
them to arrange the days of a week using the day cards in sequence. 
 How many days are there in a week? (Seven days). 
 How many days are there from Sunday to Wednesday? 
 How many days are there from Wednesday to Friday? 
Guide them to count the number of days using their day cards. 
There are four days from Sunday to Wednesday. 
There are three days from Wednesday to Friday. 
(v) Repeat with other sequence of days in a week. Let them record their 
answers in Table 8.1.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 
180 
Table 8.1: Number of Days 
From To Number of Days 
Sunday Wednesday 
Monday Thursday 
Wednesday Friday 
Thursday Saturday 
Tuesday Saturday 
(vi) Have a quiz among the groups to ensure they have mastered the skills that 
they learnt today. 
(vii) Distribute a worksheet as homework. Have them complete their own 
calendar. 
Example: 
(viii) Closure: 
Lead a discussion about the importance of calendars in our daily life. 
 Conceptual understanding on the meanings of the measurement of time is 
very important because it will help pupils to learn this topic more efficiently 
and meaningfully. 
 Pupils may easily learn to tell the time by reading the numerals on the clock, 
tell the days of a week on the calendar, and so on, but the important thing is 
how they will understand and use the concept of the measurement of time in 
their daily life. 
 You need to pay attention to these aspects when you are planning the lessons.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME  181 
Gregorian Calendar 
Hour Hand 
Minute Hand 
OÊclock 
1. List down the pupilsÊ prior knowledge for learning the measurement of 
time. 
2. List down two difficulties in teaching the measurement of time. 
You are asked to plan a lesson according to the learning outcomes below: 
(a) Recognise the days of a week 
(b) Read and write the days of the week 
Write your lesson plan. (You have to focus on the set induction, development 
and consolidation aspects).
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 
182 
APPENDIX 
WORKSHEET 
1. Fill in the blanks with the correct days of the week. 
2. Write the correct answer in each box. 
(a) Tomorrow is Friday. Today is 
(b) The second month of the year is 
(c) Yesterday was Saturday. Today is 
(d) The month that comes before May is
TOPIC 8 TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME  183 
(e) The month that comes after December is 
(f) The fifth month of the year is 
(g) 
is the month of my birthday.
Topic 
9 
 Three 
Dimensional 
Shapes 
(3D Solids) 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Discuss the importance of geometry in solving daily life problems; 
2. Explain why the teaching of geometry should be introduced at 
primary school level; 
3. List down childrenÊs levels of understanding and learning geometry; 
and 
4. Plan instructional strategies and teaching-learning activities 
pertaining to geometry for kindergarten or pre-school and early 
primary school children. 
 INTRODUCTION 
We live in the world of three dimensional (3D) shapes or solids. Everything 
around us is in the form of solids such as the house we live in, the garden, the 
trees, the cars, the fruits and the furniture we use. The round shape of an apple 
we consume, the cylindrical shape of a pencil we use to write with and the 
cubical shape of the thick books that we read are all examples of 3D shapes 
around us. Most of the objects around us are three dimensional solids and occur 
as either regular or irregular solids.
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS)  
185 
SHAPES OF THE WORLD 
9.1 
Our world is made up of three dimensional (3D) shapes or solids with 
dimensions of length, breadth (width) and thickness (depth). Solids have either 
flat or curved surfaces. Cornflakes containers, classrooms, tables, cupboards and 
match boxes of cubical or cuboidal shapes are examples of solids with flat 
surfaces. Other 3D solids of spherical shapes with curved surfaces include globes, 
tennis balls, footballs, cones and cylinders whilst examples of 3D solids of oval 
shape are eggs or rugby balls. 
We have to understand more about shapes around our world. Shapes and figures 
change when looked at from different perspectives. As newborns open their eyes, 
they would either be looking directly at their mothersÊ faces as a plane or two-dimensional 
(2D) shape or be directly exposed to 3D solids from the front view. 
Slowly as they grow older, children will develop more advanced geometric 
thinking and better understand the concept of geometry dealing with solids, 
shapes and space applicable in the world they live in. 
SELF-CHECK 9.1 
How do architects, engineers or designers interpret the graphic 
drawings of 2D shapes in 3D models of houses, apartments, cars, 
aeroplanes, ships and tankers? Discuss. 
WHAT IS GEOMETRY? 
9.2 
Geometry is a branch of Mathematics. It is the study of angles and shapes formed 
by the relationship of lines, surfaces and solids in space as defined in LongmanÊs 
Dictionary. 
Geometry is the exploration or investigation of space or discovery of patterns 
and the relationship of shape, size and position or place in space. These are 
observed in and derived from the immediate environment and the much wider 
world, both natural and Âman-madeÊ. 
The teaching of geometry is the development of experiences, skills and processes 
for children to enable them to operate and understand their world or 
environment better. It is thus essential that children learn about geometry and its 
wide applications in real life well so as to be better equipped for the future.
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 
186 
ACTIVITY 9.1 
Think of some examples of real-life applications of geometry. Discuss the 
importance of geometry in real life. 
THE TEACHING OF GEOMETRY 
9.3 
The purpose of teaching geometry in primary and secondary schools is to help 
children acquire knowledge, provide basic concepts of geometry and critical 
geometric thinking that will improve the childrenÊs ability to manipulate their 3D 
environment. Since geometry is a branch of mathematics, it should be integrated 
within the Mathematics syllabus for KBSR and KBSM. The teaching of geometry 
should be done early at pre-school or primary level to be continued to secondary 
school and higher level education. 
The following are various reasons why geometry should be taught in schools: 
(a) Problem solving, the ability to solve daily life problems, is an important 
skill to be mastered by all children. Learning mathematics and geometry 
will prepare children to solve problems they face or are confronted with 
everyday in real life as stated by Tom Cooper (1986). 
(b) Solving geometry problems involve the manipulation of shapes and visual 
imagery within a geometric framework. A strong foundation in Geometry 
is thus necessary. 
(c) Learning about geometry and its applications to real life provides the basic 
knowledge and geometric understanding vital for application in future 
careers especially in the technical and vocational areas. Understanding 
geometry is essential in the fields of navigation and exploration. Geometry 
comprises important elements or essential knowledge for astronauts, pilots, 
sea navigators, architects, engineers, mathematicians, carpenters, interior 
decorators, models and fashion designers. 
ACTIVITY 9.2 
How do children learn geometry? Why should children learn geometry in 
stages? Explain.
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS)  
187 
THE TEACHING AND LEARNING OF 
GEOMETRY 
9.4 
When preparing experimental tasks or planning learning activities for young 
children, teachers have to take special consideration of the childÊs intellectual 
development as a frame of references. 
According to Jean PiagetÊs Model (1964-1967), a childÊs experience, living 
environment and biological maturation will all influence his or her development 
of geometric thinking and understanding, which are: 
(a) Level of development of mathematical abilities and understanding of 
geometric concept; and 
(b) Level of conceptual development within geometry, and perception of 
geometric properties and relationships within oneÊs environment. 
Children should thus be learning the concepts in stages. 
9.4.1 The Learning of Geometry 
Integration of Jean PiagetÊs research, Van Hiele's Model and other research 
findings will be the basis for designing instructional tasks and learning 
experiences for young children. There is no one universal theory in designing the 
teaching strategies or learning activities of geometry. Thomas Fox (2000) 
suggested that instructional tasks should be in line with the childrenÊs ability or 
their level of reasoning. Hannibal (1999) suggested the importance of language, 
vocabulary and description in helping childrenÊs development of defining and 
categorising features of shapes. 
9.4.2 Van Hiele’s Model of Learning Geometry 
Pierre van Hiele and Dina van Hiele-Degolf are two Dutch educators who 
provided guidance in designing the instruction and curriculum of geometry. The 
Van HielesÊ work which began in 1959 attracted a lot of attention especially in the 
Soviet Union (Hoffer, 1983). 
Today, the Van Hiele theory has become the most influential factor in designing 
the curriculum for geometry worldwide. Pierre and Dina van Hiele believed that 
children should learn geometry in five levels or stages. Learning activities must 
be in progressive stages and avoid gaps resulting in confusion. Hypothesis
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 
188 
showed that when children miss certain stages of these experiences, they would 
face obstructions in their progress in understanding geometric concepts. 
According to research by the Van Hieles, teachers or educators must provide 
children in elementary or primary school with at least the first three stages in the 
process of learning geometry. Instruction and learning activities should be well 
planned according to the pupilsÊ level of geometric thought. Pupils will 
successfully learn geometry when they are given the opportunity of a good 
learning environment and the right experiences according to Andria Troutman et 
al. (2003). 
Van HieleÊs five levels of geometric thought are explained in Table 9.1: 
Table 9.1: Van HieleÊs Five Levels of Geometric Thought 
Level Description 
Level One  
Visualisation 
This is the basic level where children recognise figures by looking at 
their appearance. They are able to identify the shapes of two 
dimensions or three dimensions through visualisation. Their ability 
to identify shapes is basic depending on the sense of sight or feeling 
without understanding the geometric properties of each figure. 
Level Two  
Analysis 
At this level, children are able to classify or group depending on the 
characteristics of shapes or figures but they cannot visualise the 
interrelationship between them. 
Level Three  
Informal 
Deduction 
After undergoing the first two levels, visualisation and analysis, 
children are able to establish or see interrelationships between 
figures. They are able to derive relationships among figures 
followed by simple proofs but not with complete understanding. 
Level Four  
Deduction 
PupilsÊ mental thinking and geometric thinking develop 
significantly. They can understand the significance of deduction, the 
role of postulates, theorems and proofs. They are able to write 
proofs with understanding. 
Level Five  
Rigour 
Pupils are now able to make abstract deductions and understand 
how to work in axiomatic systems and even non-Euclidean 
geometry can be understood at this level.
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS)  
189 
TEACHING STRATEGIES OF GEOMETRY 
Although we live in a three dimensional (3D) environment, learning about 
geometry can be very difficult and confusing to young children. This topic will 
provide kindergarten or preschool and year one primary school teachers the 
overview of teaching geometry to children four to seven years of age. 
Since there is no universal theory for the teaching of geometry, this topic will 
guide and expose teachers to a few research findings and models as a knowledge 
base in designing instructional teaching experiences and tasks for different age 
groups. 
Before designing or planning teaching and learning activities for young children, 
teachers have to know their pupilsÊ background experiences, living environment 
and their levels of thinking. The childrenÊs intellectual development and their 
levels of understanding will be the basis or the framework in designing 
geometric thinking. Learning geometry is even more critical and very important 
since it provides tools for critical thinking and analysis for problem solving in 
real world situations. 
The teaching of geometry to young children can be formal within the 
mathematics classroom or during informal activities at the canteen, playground 
or other outdoor venues. The introduction of simple geometry concepts can be 
within their environment or the childÊs natural settings. It can be integrated while 
they are playing in the playground, painting, acting in a drama, story-telling or 
having a puppet show. Tom Cooper (1986) suggested the following teaching 
approaches in line with the levels of Van HielesÊ Model, see Figure 9.1. 
Figure 9.1: Approaches for teaching geometry 
9.5
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 
190 
KINDERGARTEN OR PRE-SCHOOL 
GEOMETRY 
Children at the early age of four to seven years old are unable to visualise shapes 
or solids. To them, shapes or solids Âlook alikeÊ or Âare similarÊ and confusing. The 
spatial concepts of solids and space are still undeveloped in young children of 
three, four and five years of age. They cannot visualise shapes from different 
perspectives or do not possess visual imagery as yet. 
The way children learn about geometry is through exposure or appropriate 
learning activities and experience. Teachers have to plan and choose appropriate 
learning activities and suitable materials for relevant tasks to develop childrenÊs 
understanding of topology, simple Euclidean concepts and discovery of the 
properties of shapes, solids and space. Andria Troutman (2003) suggested that 
activities for kindergarten or preschool children should be of three kinds (see 
Table 9.2): 
Table 9.2: Andria Troutman's Three Kinds of Activities 
for Kindergarten or Pre-school Children 
Activity Description 
Refine topology 
ideas 
ChildrenÊs experience of indoor and outdoor activities will 
enhance childrenÊs understanding about topology, space and 
directions. Such activities help children to use relative 
prepositions and vocabulary such as enclosed boundary, inside, 
outside, adjacent, beside, between, from above, under, bottom, 
etc. Well-planned activities will help children to use suitable 
prepositions, whether written or oral, to describe where the object 
is located in space. These activities will facilitate the development 
of childrenÊs spatial sense. 
Extended geometric 
knowledge of 
simple Euclidean 
and topological 
ideas 
It is the study of shapes, size, direction, parallelism, perpendicular 
lines and angles. They can visualise and differentiate between 
shapes of triangles, rectangles, squares and trapeziums. 
Discover properties 
and relationships of 
geometric figures 
Children learn about three dimensional shapes by seeing or 
through observation (visualisation). They will observe the 
properties of the shape and study how they behave. Suitable 
materials and appropriate activities such as matching, sorting, 
fitting and altering shapes allow children to discover 
relationships and properties of shapes. 
9.6
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS)  
191 
Children have not developed the ability to understand the conservation of 
length, area, volume and proximity at this stage. Through appropriate drawing 
and painting activities, children can refine many properties of geometric figures. 
Drawings of young children show that mountains, trees, houses, and cars are 
smaller than flowers or themselves. Spatial relationship among objects within 
space is not established among young children yet but they begin to structure 
and order in space. 
During the process of a childÊs development, these three types of activities should 
be integrated with the respective geometric concept and relevant manipulative 
materials. Besides the commercially made or manufactured materials, it is 
important that teachers make geometry materials that will provide for a better and 
wider range of teaching aids to enhance their pupilsÊ understanding. 
TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 
FOR PRE-SCHOOL GEOMETRY 
9.7 
A wide range of teaching and learning activities can be used for teaching 
Geometry at pre-school level. Various learning outcomes to be achieved pertaining 
to the learning of pre-school Geometry include: 
(a) Identifying shapes using the surface area and exploring the relevant solids; 
(b) Matching and labelling each shape and solid through discovery; 
(c) Identifying similarities and differences between shapes and solids; and 
(d) Using the correct vocabulary and language to describe shapes and solids 
during activities. 
Some samples of teaching and learning activities suitable for teaching Geometry 
to pre-school children are described below. 
Activity 1: Identifying and Matching Shapes and Solids 
Learning Outcome: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Match and label each shape and solids given.
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 
192 
Materials: 
 Sets of playing blocks as shown in Figure 9.2; 
 Pencils; 
 Sets of coloured pencils or crayons; and 
 A4 paper. 
Procedure: 
(i) Divide the children into small groups of four to five pupils each. 
(ii) Each group will get a set of playing blocks, a set of coloured pencils or 
crayons, a piece of A4 paper and pencils for each pupil. 
(iii) Get pupils to match the surface area of the solids (blocks) to the respective 
template or hole in the circular box (see Figure 9.2). Teacher will facilitate 
the activities and give instructions to guide them while doing the activity. 
This activity should take about 10  15 minutes. 
(iv) Children in their groups will insert the blocks into the appropriate hole and 
each pupil should be given the opportunity to explore and discover on their 
own. 
Figure 9.2: Set of playing blocks 
(v) When they are done, check the childrenÊs findings. Point to one of the holes 
and ask the pupils to choose or select the suitable or appropriate block from 
the pile, see Figure 9.3 (a).
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS)  
193 
Figure 9.3 (a): Set of shapes of templates and playing blocks 
Check to confirm the pupilsÊ understanding. Repeat with other solids and 
let them try to fit into the respective hole of the shapes, see Figure 9.3 (b). 
Figure 9.3 (b): Set of playing blocks and shapes of templates 
(vi) Guide pupils to label and identify the shapes and solids given using their 
pencils and the piece of A4 paper. 
Activity 2: Visualise Shapes and Solids 
Learning Outcomes: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Identify and label each shape and solid given; and 
(b) Use the correct vocabulary and language to describe the relationship 
between 2D shapes and 3D solids. 
Materials: 
 Set of trace blocks; 
 Set of solids; 
 A4 paper; 
 Pencils; 
 Coloured pencils/crayons; and 
 Names of shapes and solids (word cards).
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 
194 
Procedure: 
(i) Let the children trace the surface area/shape of the blocks on the piece of 
A4 paper, match and then compare with that on the circular box, see Figure 
9.4 (a). 
Figure 9.4 (a): Set of playing blocks and shapes of surface area 
(ii) Introduce appropriate vocabulary and guide pupils to label each shape and 
solid with the correct geometrical terms (word cards). Use relevant 
language to describe the relationship between the 2D shapes and 3D solids. 
(iii) Using arrows, match or pair the shapes with the correct solids. The colour 
clue for respective pairs of shape and solid will guide the children to pair 
them up. Ask them to look at the similarities between them. Encourage 
them to use the right vocabulary and language in their descriptions, see 
Figure 9.4 (b). 
Figure 9.4 (b): Matching activity: Match the correct surface area to the playing block 
(iv) Match the shape and solids by colouring the correct pairs with the same 
colour, see Figure 9.4 (c). 
Figure 9.4 (c): Matching activity: Colour the correct pairs
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS)  
195 
At this level, introduce new vocabulary and use correct language to 
describe each solid and the respective surface area. Encourage them to use 
the new vocabulary and work in groups, only then can they freely 
communicate with each other during the play activities. 
Activity 3: Naming and Labelling of Solids 
Learning Outcome: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Name and label each solid given. 
Materials: 
 Models of 3D solids; and 
 Names of 3D solids. 
Procedure: 
(i) Naming and labelling of solids: 
Before this activity, teachers must introduce the correct geometrical terms 
and vocabulary for every solid using flash cards or suitable teaching aids. 
Teacher describes and explains to the young children simple procedures for 
identifying and naming the solids. The features of solids will give the solid 
its name and this can be used to identify them, see Figure 9.4 (d). Numbers 
can be introduced to describe the geometric features. For instance, a cube 
has 6 equal surfaces and a cuboid has 3 pairs of equal surfaces. Then, let 
them ÂdiscoverÊ the ideas and features for themselves. Check their 
understanding using worksheets or handouts.
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 
196 
Figure 9.4 (d): Matching activity: Match solid to name 
(ii) Naming of solids: Rearrange the letters (or spelling) to form the name. 
Ask the children to rearrange the letters to form the names of the solids from 
the flash cards. Each flash card bears a single solid and scrambled letters. (see 
Figure 9.5). 
Figure 9.5: Naming of solids 
Activity 4: Relationship and Properties of Shapes and Solids 
Learning Outcome: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Group given shapes and solids according to their similarities and differences.
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS)  
197 
Materials: 
 Models of 3D solids; and 
 Cut-outs of 2D shapes. 
Procedure: 
(a) Grouping shapes and solids according to their similarities and differences. 
Promote group discussion: 
Children in their groups will discuss similarities between different solids. 
They will have to group the solids according to their similar properties and 
how they behave. Each solid has certain properties of its own. 
For example, circular prisms can roll, possess a circular surface, with or 
without edges and do not have any vertices. Prisms have flat surfaces, 
edges plus vertices and can stand still on their surfaces. Teachers will guide 
children to classify them into different groups according to their similarities 
and differences (See Table 9.3). 
Allow children or give them time to discuss and improve their oral 
communication, so they are able to use suitable language and vocabulary to 
describe the relationship and properties of shapes and solids. 
Table 9.3: Grouping Activity: 2D Shapes and 3D Solids 
Types Circular/Oval 
Cylinders 
Triangular 
Prisms 
Quadrilateral 
Prisms 
Polygonal 
Prisms 
2D 
Shapes 
3D 
Solids
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 
198 
TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 
FOR ELEMENTARY GEOMETRY 
9.8 
Some teaching and learning activities for Elementary Geometry are discussed 
here. 
9.8.1 Learning Areas for Elementary Geometry 
Skills related to the learning of Elementary Geometry generally extend from what 
is learnt in pre-school and include the following: 
(a) Naming, labelling and using the correct vocabulary for describing each 3D 
solid; 
(b) Describing features or parts of solids including classifying and grouping 
shapes according to similarities and differences; and 
(c) Ability to assemble and explain types of shapes used to build models and 
relate models to solids in real life. 
9.8.2 Elementary Geometry: Early Experience of 
Space and Shape 
With respect to the learning of Elementary Geometry, three levels of the Van 
Hiele model discussed earlier are emphasised: 
(a) Level One (Visualisation) 
Identifying 3D shapes by intuitive understanding of symmetry and 
perspective. At this level, children are guided to identify geometric figures 
through various activities that enable them to visualise shapes, name them, 
use correct vocabulary and differentiate them from other shapes. 
(b) Level Two (Analysis) 
Analysing the attributes of geometric figures and introducing simple 
concepts of proximity, separation, direction, size, length, line, enclosure, 
properties and spatial ideas. 
(c) Level Three (Informal Deduction) 
ChildrenÊs ability to compare geometric figures covers visualising 
similarities and differences, developing basic concepts on spatial ideas and
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS)  
199 
simple Euclidean concepts as well as the transformation approach on 
extended concepts of geometry. 
Teachers have to develop effective and creative teaching materials to 
enhance pupilsÊ learning and understanding of geometric concepts. Models 
or manipulative teaching materials as illustrated below are required to 
promote the mental reasoning mentioned above (See Figure 9.6). 
Figure 9.6: Set of 3D models or manipulative 
9.8.3 Cycle for Teaching Elementary Geometry 
Figure 9.7 shows the cycle for teaching 3D solids. 
Figure 9.7: Cycle for teaching elementary geometry
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 
200 
9.8.4 Early Geometry Activities 
In general, activities for learning early Geometry at primary level are mostly 
extensions of pre-school activities and are concentrated on achieving the 
following learning outcomes: 
(a) Identifying and naming solids; 
(b) Making skeletons and opaque solids from straw and play dough (coloured 
plasticine); 
(c) Recognising and describing parts of solids; and 
(d) Building models of solids. 
Some practical activities are described in the following section. 
Activity 1: Naming of Solids 
Learning Outcome: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(i) Identify and name solids. 
Materials: 
 Blocks of solids/3D shapes; 
 Pictures of solids/3D shapes; 
 Play dough (multi-coloured); 
 Chart; and 
 Sets of flash cards (Vocabulary/Name cards). 
Procedure: 
The following activities are suitable for group activities. 
(i) Identifying and naming solids: 
This activity is in line with Level One (Visualisation) of the Van Hiele 
model. 
Teacher will give one flash card and a set of solids to every group and ask 
the children to choose an appropriate solid from the pile. Then, get them to 
stick the flash card on the board and display the chosen solid. 
(ii) Repeat the activity until all the solids have been identified and named.
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS)  
201 
(iii) Each group will be given a chart as shown in Table 9.4 and a set of picture 
cards of various solids; pupils have to match and name the appropriate 
solids accordingly. 
Table 9.4: Set of 3D Models or Manipulative 
Cube Cuboid Tetrahedron Pyramid Cylinder Cone Sphere 
At this level, children are guided to identify geometric figures through the 
visualisation of 3D shapes. 
(iv) Identifying and naming each figure: 
Encourage discussion among the children. Use correct vocabulary and 
suitable language to describe the features and properties of solids. Guide 
them to identify or differentiate the solids from the other shapes. 
Activity 2: Analysing Similarities within a Group of Solids 
Learning Outcomes: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Identify the properties of groups of solids e.g. cubes, cuboids, pyramids, 
cones, cylinders, spheres; 
(b) Make solids from play dough; and 
(c) Compare the differences within and between groups of solids e.g. 
triangular and quadrilateral prisms, etc. 
Materials: 
 Blocks of solids/3D shapes (cubes, cuboids, pyramids, cones, cylinders, 
tetrahedrons, prisms, spheres); 
 Pictures of solids/3D shapes (cubes, cuboids, pyramids, cones, cylinders, 
tetrahedrons, prisms, spheres); 
 Play dough (multi-coloured); 
 Chart; 
 Sets of flash cards; 
 Vocabulary (Name cards/word cards); and 
 Worksheet.
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 
202 
Procedure: 
(i) Visualisation: (Properties of Solids) 
Teacher guides pupils to visualise and explore the properties of a set of 
solids one by one and record the properties in a chart. 
Introduce appropriate vocabulary including face, edge, corner, etc. to 
describe the properties of solids. 
Repeat the steps for each solid in the set comprising cube, cuboid, pyramid, 
tetrahedron, cone, cylinder and sphere. (See Table 9.5 for a more detailed 
description of the procedure outlined in step (i)). 
Table 9.5: Procedure for Step (a) 
Level Teacher Pupils 
Visualisation 
of shapes or 
figures 
1. Teacher shows a cube 
2. Introduce appropriate 
vocabulary to describe the 
properties of a cube. 
3. Ask pupils to count and record 
the number of faces, corners 
and edges of a cube and write a 
summary. 
4. Teacher shows a cuboid next 
and repeats steps 2 and 3. 
5. Repeat the activity until all the 
solids in the set have been 
explored in sequence. 
Note: Pictures of 3D solids can 
be used in place of 3D models. 
1. Pick out a cube and other 
similar solids out of the pile. 
 same shape or size 
 similar size 
(bigger or smaller size) 
2. Label the corner, face and edge 
of the cube accordingly. 
3. Record a summary of the 
properties of the cube e.g.: 
 6 flat faces 
 8 corners 
 12 edges 
4. Pick out a cuboid and repeat 
the steps above for the solid 
chosen. 
5. Repeat each step as above for 
each solid displayed in 
sequence.
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS)  
203 
(ii) Learning experience: Making solids from play dough 
Group activity: 
Using 3D solids as samples, guide pupils to produce various solids as listed 
below: 
 Cube; 
 Cuboid; 
 Triangular Prism; 
 Quadrilateral Prism; 
 Pyramid; and 
 Tetrahedron. 
Guide pupils to explore the properties of each solid made. 
(iii) Comparing differences within and between groups of solids. 
Using the solids made in Step (ii) or other models, guide pupils to compare 
the similarities and differences within and between groups of solids. 
Begin with comparing triangular prisms with quadrilateral prisms. 
Ask pupils to record the properties of both solids by analysing the surface 
area (2D shapes) and the respective 3D solids as in Table 9.6.
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 
204 
Table 9.6: Comparison Chart 
Triangular Prisms Quadrilateral Prisms 
2D 
Shapes 
3 sides 
3 edges 
3 corners 
4 sides 
4 edges 
4 corners 
3D 
Solids 
5 flat surfaces 
6 vertices 
6 flat surfaces 
8 corners or 
vertices 
sets of 3 pairs 
(surfaces) 
12 edges 
(iv) Repeat the above step and compare different groups of solids e.g. cubes 
with cuboids, pyramids with tetrahedrons, etc. 
(v) Distribute worksheet to pupils. 
Activity 3: Building Models and Nets of Solids from 2D Shapes 
Learning Outcome: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Build models and nets of solids (cuboids and cubes) from 2D shapes. 
Materials: 
 Blocks of solids/3D shapes (e.g. cubes, cuboids, pyramids, cones, cylinders, 
tetrahedrons, prisms, spheres); 
 Objects: pencil box; 
 Cardboard; 
 A4 paper (multi-coloured); 
 Pencils; and 
 Worksheet.
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS)  
205 
Procedure: 
(a) Always guide young children on how to relate solids of three dimensions 
(3D) to shapes of two dimensions (2D). The visualisation of cuboids can be 
attained by using a pencil box to represent the cuboid. Let pupils rotate, 
visualise and trace the shapes from different perspectives by looking at the 
cuboid from different orientation or from different elevations i.e. top, front 
and side, see Figure 9.8 (a). 
Step 1: Visualisation 
Figure 9.8 (a): Views of a cuboid from different perspectives 
Step 2: Trace surfaces of a cuboid 
(i) Trace the surfaces of the cuboid from the top and bottom to get two 
similar faces. 
Cut the traced shapes and slide the two pieces over one another to 
check if they are congruent and similar, see Figure 9.8 (b). 
Figure 9.8 (b): Top and bottom views of the cuboid
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 
206 
(ii) Trace the surfaces from the left and right sides of the cuboid. 
Cut the traced shapes and slide the two pieces over one another to 
check if they are congruent and similar, see Figure 9.8 (c). 
Figure 9.8 (c): Left and right side views of the cuboid 
(iii) Trace the surfaces from the front and back elevation (looking from 
the front and back/behind). 
Cut the traced shapes and slide the two pieces over one another to see 
if they are congruent and similar, see Figure 9.8 (d). 
Figure 9.8 (d): Front and back views of the cuboid 
Step 3: Match and relate the traced surfaces for geometric reasoning 
Figure 9.8 (e) shows how to trace the surfaces of the cuboid.
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS)  
207 
Figure 9.8 (e): Traced surfaces of the cuboid 
Step 4: Attach the traced surfaces on to the cuboid/pencil box and make a 
net of a cuboid 
The cuboid/the pencil box has six surfaces (3 pairs of similar surfaces), 
refer Figure 9.8 (f)). 
Figure 9.8 (f): Net of the cuboid 
(b) Using the same procedure as in (a), produce nets of a cube like the ones 
shown in Figure 9.9: 
Figure 9.9: Nets for the cube
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 
208 
Activity 4: Drawing 3D Solids 
Learning Outcomes: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Draw 3D solids with the help of essential tools like graph paper and GSP; 
and 
(b) Identify the 3D solids drawn using GSP. 
Materials: 
 PowerPoint slides (3D shapes: prisms); 
 Graph paper/square dot paper/isometric dot paper; and 
 Computer software, GeometerÊs Sketchpad (GSP). 
Procedure: 
(a) Identifying 3D shapes by intuitive understanding of symmetry and 
perspective. 
Let pupils look at some animated pictures of 3D solid from a PowerPoint 
presentation (e.g. cubes, cuboids, triangular prisms, pyramids, tetrahedrons). 
Have an open discussion about symmetry and perspective to guide pupils to 
identify and name the 3D shapes shown in the slides. 
The drawing of solids will be easier for young children with the help of 
graph paper, square dot paper or isometric dot paper and computer 
software, such as the GeometerÊs Sketchpad (GSP). The GSP is often used 
as a tool to draw regular and irregular prims of 3D solids. Figure 9.10 
shows some examples of solids drawn using the GSP. Teach pupils how to 
draw the figures one by one.
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS)  
209 
Figure 9.10: Examples of regular and irregular prisms drawn using GSP 
(b) Ask pupils to identify the 3D solids drawn. 
Activity 5: Build Skeletons for 3D Solids 
Learning Outcomes: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Build skeletons for 3D solids (e.g. cubes, cuboids, pyramids, tetrahedrons, 
triangular prisms); and 
(b) Make a summary of the properties for each skeleton of the 3D solids made. 
Materials: 
 Play dough or plasticine; and 
 Drinking straws. 
Procedure: 
(i) After the drawing of solids, a suitable follow-up activity will be the the 
making of skeletons of 3D shapes using drinking straws and play dough as 
illustrated in Figure 9.11. All properties of solids (corners/vertices, edges 
and flat surfaces will be discussed here).
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 
210 
Figure 9.11: Examples of skeletons of 3D solids 
(ii) Ask pupils to name each of the skeletons of 3D solids and make a summary 
of the properties for all the skeletons constructed. 
Activity 6: Building Opaque Models of Solids 
Learning Outcomes: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Make solids from play dough; 
(b) Build models using a combination of various solids; and 
(c) Recognise and describe parts of solids. 
Materials: 
 Play dough or plasticine (multi-coloured); 
 3D blocks or solids (wooden/plastic); 
 Picture card chart of 3D solids (regular and irregular prisms, non-prisms); 
and 
 Flash cards (name cards/word cards). 
Procedure: 
(i) Distribute some play dough or plasticine and a picture card chart/guide to 
each group of pupils. Let pupils make models of 3D solids using play 
dough or plasticine based on the picture card chart.
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS)  
211 
(ii) Using the 3D models constructed or ready-made 3D blocks (wooden/ 
plastic), make models like the ones displayed in Figure 9.12. 
(iii) Creative play: Allow pupils to indulge in free-play and make models of 
their own using the play dough or plasticine. 
Figure 9.12: Examples of opaque models of 3D shapes 
(iv) Ask pupils to label and describe the parts of the solids constructed using 
appropriate vocabulary, language, name and word cards such as cube, 
cuboid, triangular prism, vertex, edge, face, etc. 
 In this topic, the theory and approaches of learning geometry are highlighted. 
 The teaching and learning of geometry should be aligned to pupilsÊ levels of 
thinking. 
 In planning instruction or teaching and learning activities, teachers have to 
consider the childrenÊs logical thinking, their levels or stages of learning 
geometry, their biological maturation as well as their living environment. 
 A few research findings and models of teaching geometry are integrated 
within this model as reference and as a basic framework for teachers when 
designing instruction or teaching and learning activities. 
 During the earlier part of the topic, discussion focused on the importance of 
learning geometry and the use of geometric concepts to solve real life 
problems. 
 The concepts of geometry and spatial sense, incorporated with numerical 
literacy, should be introduced to children at an early age.
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 
212 
 Teaching strategies of three dimensional (3D) shapes or solids for young 
children are suggested under various sub-headings. 
 Examples of teaching and learning activities for geometry given in this topic, 
take into account the theory and childrenÊs levels of thought, starting from 
kindergarten or pre-school and extending to early primary school. 
Apex 
Area 
Boundary 
Capacity 
Cone 
Corner 
Cube 
Cuboid 
Cylinder 
Edge 
Oval 
Polygon 
Polyhedron 
Prism 
Solid 
Sphere 
Symmetry 
Tessellate 
Tetrahedron 
Three dimensional (3D) 
Vertex 
Volume 
List three levels of teaching geometry for early primary or pre-school and suggest 
a suitable learning activity for each level. 
Pupils learn the concept of geometry while playing with and building models 
using the three dimensional solids. Think of a strategy to teach Euclidean 
Geometry to young children through play.
TOPIC 9 THREE DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS)  
213 
APPENDIX 
WORKSHEET 
1. Draw lines to match each 3D shape with the correct description.
Topic 
10 
 Two 
Dimensional 
Shapes (2D) 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Explain the shape and space in daily life; 
2. Identify shapes using the correct vocabulary related to 2D shapes; 
3. Classify two dimensional (2D) shapes; and 
4. Describe the teaching and learning of shape activities. 
 INTRODUCTION 
Look at things around you. How do they appear or look like? Almost everything 
around you is in the form of solids or in three-dimensional form, but topologically, 
they can be described as two dimensional shapes. What does an apple, an ice-cream 
cone, a star fruit and a ball look like to small children? Are children able to 
name and relate logically between three dimensional solids and two dimensional 
shapes? 
SHAPE AND SPACE IN DAILY LIFE 
10.1 
Understanding the environment we live in is very important as we live in an 
environment made up of shape and space. Take a look at the things around you  
many objects around are either in the form of two dimensional shapes or three 
dimensional solids. Some pertinent questions come to mind. How do young 
children see things surrounding them? How do they develop geometric thinking 
and mental reasoning about shapes? How does the human mind, or thinking, 
change and make connections between 3D solids and 2D shapes? Things like 
cauliflower, cabbage and broccoli are usually spherical in shape like that of a ball,
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D)  
215 
see Figure 10.1 (i.e. 3D in shape) but at certain angles, they may look like the face 
of a clock (i.e. 2D in shape)! 
Figure 10.1: Spherical 3D solids can be viewed as circular 2D shapes 
SPATIAL SENSE 
How do we deal with the space around us? To understand more about spatial 
sense, let us consider a few situations. How are bags and luggage arranged in the 
compartments of an aeroplane to accommodate all baggage checked in? How do 
we ensure that we can walk into a laboratory or classroom without stumbling 
over instruments and furniture? Why do drivers position their cars on the right 
lane of the road in order to avoid tragic accidents? Why is it we cannot simply 
drive on the road without getting a driving licence first? One has to apply spatial 
sense to be safe on the roads. To acquire a driving licence, we have to undergo 
several tests and practise driving for hours under the supervision of experts 
before we can drive independently and safely on the roads. 
SELF-CHECK 10.1 
Spatial sense is defined as an intuition about shape and the relationship 
among shapes, including our ability to mentally visualise objects and spatial 
relationships by turning things around in our minds. It is about our feeling of 
geometric aspects of objects and shapes that appear within our surroundings 
or our living environment. 
(Walle and Lovin, 2006) 
10.2 
1. What is meant by geometric spatial sense? 
2. Why is geometric spatial sense important for understanding our 
environment?
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 
216 
Spatial sense is spatial perception or spatial visualisation that helps students 
to understand the relationship between objects and their locations in three 
dimensional worlds. 
(Kennedy and Tipps, 2006) 
Geometry has several applications in real life. Spatial sense is spatial visualisation 
or spatial perception that helps children in understanding their world. 
Furthermore, spatial sense is an imaginary visualisation of object orientation in 
our minds. People with good spatial sense are able to analyse, using their 
geometric reasoning and ideas to appreciate nature, space exploration, home 
decoration, architecture, art and design. It promotes creativity in art and design. 
One is also able to imitate and transfer a bouquet of flowers into 2D shapes, see 
Figure 10.2. 
Figure 10.2: Bouquet of flowers 
ACTIVITY 10.1 
Do your pupils/young children have spatial sense? Is spatial sense innate 
in children or do we have to teach spatial sense in the classroom? Discuss. 
Next, carry out the following task. Take a look at the pictures shown in Figure 
10.3.
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D)  
217 
Figure 10.3: Pictures of objects 
Show these pictures to your pupils. Ask them to arrange the pictures in 
ascending order according to their size in real life. Discuss and look out for 
your pupilsÊ spatial reasoning when doing the arranging. 
The answer: (picture frame  door  Eiffel Tower) 
If their arrangement is as such, how did they know that Eiffel Tower is the 
biggest/ tallest among the three things? 
 Have they ever visited Eiffel Tower? 
 Did they use their spatial sense when arranging the pictures in ascending 
 Get your children to look closely at the picture of the rabbit and ask them 
whether it is possible that the size of the rose (flower) can be bigger than 
the rabbit in reality. 
GEOMETRIC THINKING 
order? 
10.3 
Geometry recognition is part of the primary mathematics curriculum. The aim of 
introducing two dimensional shapes in the primary school curriculum is to 
develop the pupilsÊ reasoning and spatial sense with respect to geometry since 
geometric practical applications are very useful in everyday life. Most of the 
mathematics primary curriculum incorporates number systems and numerical 
thinking as a foundation into the teaching of geometry. The development of the 
human mind on geometric concepts and reasoning of solids and shapes 
encompasses two basic areas, (see Table 10.1).
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 
218 
Table 10.1: Two Basic Areas of Human Mind on Geometric Concept 
Basic Area Description 
Visual spatial 
thinking 
This happens on the right hemisphere of the brain that is associated 
with literature and can occur unconsciously without one being aware 
of it. It can operate holistically and intuitively, with more than one 
thing at a time and is literally called simultaneous processing. 
Verbal logical 
thinking 
This lies on the left hemisphere of the brain consisting of continuous 
processing and one is always aware of it. It operates sequentially and 
logically and is related to language or symbols and numbers. 
Gardner proposed that the multiple intelligence of spatial ability can be 
developed through experience. Children are able to explain and demonstrate 
their discoveries after seeing how things work and observing their properties. 
The levels of thought, or childrenÊs thinking, is the basis for the instructional 
activities at primary school level. 
The Van Hiele Theory: Levels of Geometric Thinking 
Figure 10.4 explains the level of geometric thinking according to Van Hiele. 
Figure 10.4: Van HieleÊs levels of geometric thinking 
According to Pablo Picasso, „Observation is the most significant element of my 
life, but not just any kind of observation‰. This means that certain observations or 
the way we look at things will form a visual image that can be used in the study 
of mathematics and its applications.
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D)  
219 
GEOMETRIC SYSTEMS 
Children learn geometry at primary level which can be divided into four separate 
geometrical systems as suggested by many mathematicians (Kennedy and Tipps, 
2000), as described in Table 10.2. 
Table 10.2: Four Separate Geometrical Systems 
Geometrical 
System Description 
Euclidean 
geometry 
Euclidean geometry is the geometry of shapes and objects in a plane (2D) 
or in space (3D). It is about the properties or the characteristics of objects, 
points and lines, circles and spheres, triangles, polygons, pyramids, 
cylinders, cones and other solids. Shapes have properties including 
similarities and congruence, length of sides, number of parallel sides, 
lines or rotational symmetry. 
Coordinate 
geometry 
It is about the location of shapes on coordinate or grid systems. 
Coordinate geometry ranges from simple to complex uses that define the 
location of an object on plane coordinates of the vertical and horizontal 
axes for 2D shapes or the positioning of objects on grid systems for three 
dimensional spaces. Complex uses of coordinate geometry include the 
location of vessels in the Pacific Ocean or the location of a travellerÊs 
camp at the Antarctic or the grid location of Mount Everest. 
Transformation 
geometry 
Transformation geometry is about geometry in motion. It describes the 
movement of shapes or objects in a plane or in space. Objects or shapes in 
motion can be transformed by flipping (reflection), sliding or gliding 
(translation), and turning (rotation) or a combination of these 
transformations in many different ways. For example, during an 
aircraftÊs landing or departing, it slides on the runway, flips and turns in 
the sky or exhibits a combination of movements in different ways. 
Topological 
geometry 
Topological geometry describes the locations of objects and their 
relations in space or the recognition of objects in the environment. 
Children view everything and their perceptions relative to their standing 
positions or locations in space. It focuses on the development of the 
childrenÊs mental understanding, the use of extensive vocabulary, giving 
descriptions of objects in space, as well as the size and position of objects 
within their perspectives. The use of vocabulary to describe the locations 
of objects in space include words such as: far-near, high-low, big-small, 
above-below, inside-outside or in front, in between, front and behind, etc. 
10.4
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 
220 
ACTIVITY 10.2 
Group discussion: 
The teaching of geometry covers four areas of geometric systems and 
must be aligned to the Van HieleÊs theory of levels of thought. In groups, 
discuss how to integrate the teaching of the concept of geometry with any 
two areas underlined. 
GEOMETRIC CONTENT 
The Primary Mathematics curriculum touches on the simple concept of geometric 
systems. The Geometric content for primary schools focuses more on 
Visualisation and Euclidean Geometry, as well as Van HieleÊs theory of childrenÊs 
thinking. The sequence of teaching geometric content and the teaching of 
concepts at primary school level is as illustrated in Figure 10.5. 
Figure 10.5: Sequence of teaching geometry in primary schools 
10.5
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D)  
221 
Visualisation covers the recognition of shapes in the environment, classification, 
sorting and naming of shapes. Euclidean geometry is the study of shapes and 
their properties. Advance concepts of topological geometry, Euclidean Geometry, 
coordinate and transformation geometry will be taught at secondary school or at 
higher levels. 
The Geometric Content includes: 
(a) Identifying shapes  sorting, classification and grouping; 
(b) Knowing and naming shapes (vocabulary): 
(i) Triangle (types of triangles); 
(ii) Rectangle (quadrilaterals); 
(iii) Polygon; and 
(iv) Circle and ellipse. 
(c) Identifying geometric properties of shapes; 
(d) Classification and grouping; and 
(e) Shapes in the environment. 
THE TEACHING AND LEARNING OF 
SHAPES 
10.6 
The learning of shapes is the second stage for children learning about geometry. 
The teaching and learning of geometry should be associated with the childrenÊs 
levels of thinking and the four areas of geometric systems described earlier. As a 
teacher, we have to understand our pupilsÊ levels of thinking and mental 
reasoning before teaching them the concept of two dimensional shapes. Both 
hemispheres of our pupilsÊ minds must be stimulated. Exposure and experience 
through investigation and discovery will promote pupilsÊ learning. 
Some suggested teaching-learning activities for helping children to develop or 
consolidate ideas and further understanding of geometrical concepts are 
highlighted. There should be a progressive development of activities and a 
proper sequence for introducing concepts, starting from basic geometric concepts 
to the highest level of geometric problem solving.
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 
222 
Learning Activities 
The following are some suitable learning activities: 
(a) Contextual learning  children look around and observe the environment 
plus describe in words what they have seen. 
(b) Explore and experiment with shapes (visual images) in order to gain insight 
into the properties and their uses. 
(c) Analyse shapes informally, observe size and position in order to make 
inferences; then refine and extend knowledge that develop from various 
learning activities. 
Introduction of three dimensional shapes must be done earlier or before the 
teaching of 2D shapes. The concept of two dimensional shapes can be developed 
from three dimensional shapes. Shapes that can be introduced to pre-school or 
early primary level  include those easier concepts that are commonly found 
within their environment. 
Figure 10.6: Different views of the surface area of faces of a cuboid 
A teacher should always guide young children on how to relate solids of three 
dimensions (3D) to shapes of two dimensions (2D). As described previously in 
Topic 9, for the visualisation of cuboids, pencil boxes can be used to represent 
cuboids. Pupils can be encouraged to rotate, visualise and trace the shapes from 
different perspectives by looking at them from different orientations or from 
different sides or elevations (see Figure 10.6).
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D)  
223 
TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 
10.7 
Geometric thinking and spatial reasoning can be developed through formal or 
informal activities. A good instructional activity includes good planning, 
appropriate activities and a variety of selection of effective teaching materials. 
The learning of geometric concepts can be incorporated into the childrenÊs 
activities such as playing activities, discussion, role play, music activities, dramas 
as well as art and design activities while they are actively involved. Teaching and 
learning activities suggested here cover the four areas mentioned earlier and can 
be modified to teach 2D shapes to pre-school and early primary school children. 
Part I: Euclidean Geometry 
10.7.1 Identifying Shapes – Sorting, Classification and 
Grouping 
Shape is generally defined as Âspace within an enclosed boundaryÊ. 
Shapes are drawn on a flat surface called a plane. Two dimensional plane 
geometry is about shapes like lines, circles and triangles. As such, shapes can be 
enclosed by straight or curved lines. Shapes enclosed by only straight lines are 
called polygons. Other shapes are known as non-polygons. 
The activities described here are geared towards achieving the following learning 
outcomes with respect to 2D shapes: 
(a) Identify 2D shapes, i.e. figures with closed boundaries; 
(b) Sort and classify 2D shapes; 
(c) Discover features and properties of 2D shapes; 
(d) Identify similarities and differences of shapes between groups; and 
(e) Use correct vocabulary and language while doing activities. 
Activity 1.1: Identifying 2D Shapes 
Learning Outcomes: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Identify and colour 2D shapes i.e. figures with closed boundaries; and 
(b) Count how many figures there are with closed and open boundaries.
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 
224 
Materials: 
 Exercise sheet: Set of shapes (open and closed figures); and 
 Colour pencils. 
Procedure: 
(i) Distribute the Exercise sheet (see Figure 10.7), containing examples of 
various shapes to the pupils. 
(ii) Ask pupils to colour the shapes with closed boundaries and count how 
many shapes there are with closed boundaries and how many there are 
without. 
Figure 10.7: Set of shapes 
This activity is an early introduction to the concept of shapes whereby shapes are 
identified as figures that have closed boundaries. Children have to colour all the 
shapes with closed boundaries and leave out those with open boundaries. This 
activity serves to give a clear picture to young children about 2D shapes. 
ACTIVITY 10.3 
Play the game of Look Around. 
Children who can spot the most number of 2D shapes will be the winner.
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D)  
225 
Activity 1.2: Sort and Group 2D Shapes 
Learning Outcomes: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Sort, group and classify shapes to discover their features and properties. 
Materials: 
 Set of 2D shapes/Cut-outs of 2D shapes; 
 A4 paper/manila cards; and 
 Vocabulary (Word cards). 
Procedure: 
(i) Sort and group the shapes. Place the sorted shapes under the respective 
categories on the pieces of A4 paper/manila cards provided. Use common 
features for grouping the shapes into various categories: Triangles, 
Quadrilaterals/Rectangles, Polygons and Non-polygons/Enclosed 
boundaries (see Figure 10.8). 
(ii) Discuss what is interesting about each group? 
Figure 10.8: Examples of 2D shapes 
(iii) Ask simple questions and guide pupils to describe in simple words the 
common features used for sorting and grouping shapes: 
 How many groups of shapes are there? 
 What are the special features of the figures or shapes in each group? 
 What are the common features within each group? 
 Is there any difference between the groups?
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 
226 
(iv) Say in simple sentences or describe clearly the special features of each 
group. 
(v) Encourage the children to say in simple words what they understand about 
the interesting features of the shapes. 
(vi) Ask pupils to look for similarities and differences within and between the 
groups. 
(vii) Introduce simple geometric words and correct vocabulary to help pupils to 
describe the features and propertries of the shapes. 
(viii) Check the answers for the grouping of 2D shapes: For example as shown in 
Figure 10.9: 
Figure 10.9: Grouping of shapes under different categories 
(ix) Distribute worksheet to reinforce the concept learnt. 
10.7.2 Knowing and Naming Shapes (Vocabulary) 
Introduce different types of shapes and let pupils look for features and properties 
to identify the various groups of shapes. At this level, only simple geometry is 
used and the shapes shown here are to be considered as extra knowledge for 
teachers.
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D)  
227 
Activity 2.1: Identifying Polygons 
Polygons are two dimensional flat surfaces with length and breadth or width. 
Polygons have special names based on the number of angles and the number of 
sides (straight edges) that enclose them. A triangle is a polygon with the least 
number of points and sides to form a closed boundary, followed by quadrilaterals, 
pentagons, hexagons, heptagons, octagons, nonagons, decagons, dodecagons, etc. 
Other figures known as non-polygons also have enclosed boundaries but with 
sides that are circular and elliptical. Here, various examples of polygons and a few 
non-polygons are illustrated in Table 10.3 (to be used as teacherÊs notes). 
Table 10.3: Examples of Polygons and Non-Polygons 
Triangle 
3 points 
3 sides 
Quadrilateral 
4 points 
4 sides 
Pentagon 
5 points 
5 sides 
Hexagon 
6 points 
6 sides 
Heptagon 
7 points 
7 sides 
Octagon 
8 points 
8 sides 
Nonagon 
9 points, 9 
sides 
Decagon 
10 points, 10 
sides 
Hendecagon/Undecagon 
11 points, 11 sides 
Dodecagon 
12 points 
Non-polygons: 
Circle, Ellipse 
and other 
shapes 
Enclosed 
boundaries
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 
228 
Most of the polygons shown in Table 10.3 are irregular plane figures or polygons 
where all the sides and angles are not of equal measure. Regular polygons have 
sides that are all equal in length and angles that are all equal in measure. Figure 
10.10 shows an example of a regular and irregular hexagon. 
Figure 10.10: Regular and irregular hexagons 
ACTIVITY 10.4 
Stop and Have Fun! Activity: Shapes of games 
Take your pupils outside and play these games: 
(a) Shape jumping 
(b) Track to the moon 
(c) Play ting-ting
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D)  
229 
1. Shape jumping 
 Lay out a few sets of 
shapes (coloured, 
hard cardboard) on 
the floor. 
 Call out the shapes 
and jump to land on 
the shape called out 
e.g. triangles, 
quadrilaterals, 
polygons, curved 
shapes. 
2. Track to the moon 
 Lay out a few sets of 
plane figures 
(coloured, hard 
cardboard) on the 
floor. 
 Call out the shapes 
and Jump and sing 
the Jumping song: 
Names of shapes. 
3. Play ting-ting 
 Number and shapes 
 Jump in steps. 
 Count the number of 
sides, corners and 
angles. 
 Discuss special 
features of regular 
rectangles (squares). 
Activity 3: Vocabulary for Naming Shapes 
This activity is to enhance childrenÊs understanding on different types of shapes 
for each group and the differences between various classes of shapes. Provide the 
opportunity for pupils to look for special features and properties as well as learn 
the names of shapes. 
Learning Outcomes: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Identify different types of shapes (triangle, quadrilateral, polygon, etc.); 
(b) Name shapes; 
(c) Discover features and properties of shapes; 
(d) Identify special features and properties of each group of shapes; 
(e) Identify similarities and differences of shapes between groups; and 
(f) Use correct vocabulary and language while doing activities.
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 
230 
Materials: 
 Geoboard (safety nail pegs), see Figure 10.11; 
 Coloured rubber bands (see Figure 10.11); and 
 Vocabulary cards: (Names of shapes; properties of shapes). 
Figure 10.11: Geoboard and rubber bands 
Procedure: 
(i) Take a rubber band and form shapes using the pegs on the geoboard. 
(ii) Name and label the shapes made using appropriate vocabulary cards. 
(iii) Identify the features or properties of the shapes labelled. 
Activity 3.1: Triangles 
Learning Outcomes: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Discover features and properties of triangles; 
(b) Identify special features and properties of triangles; and 
(c) Use correct vocabulary and language to describe triangles. 
Materials: 
 Rubber bands; 
 Geoboard; 
 Grid paper; and 
 Vocabulary cards: (names of shapes, labels of properties).
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D)  
231 
Procedure: 
(i) Ask pupils to use three points and a rubber band to form a triangle. 
(ii) Then, ask them to form different types of triangles  see Figure 10.12 (a) - 
and draw the shapes on grid paper. 
(iii) Guide them to look for properties of triangles, classify and describe the 
triangles made. 
Figure 10.12 (a): Examples of triangles 
A. TeacherÊs Instructions: 
A triangle is a shape with three points (see Figure 10.12 (b)), three corners and 
three straight sides.
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 
232 
Figure 10.12 (b): Examples of triangles 
B. TeacherÊs notes: Extra information on types of triangles. 
Types of Triangles 
These are triangles, each of them has three straight sides, three corners or three 
vertices but they are all different. There are many types of triangles e.g. 
equilateral, right angle triangle, isosceles, acute, obtuse or scalene triangle (see 
Figure 10.12 (c)). 
At this level of visualisation, we want young children to be able to use their 
senses to observe differences and similarities between the shapes within a group. 
It may seem difficult to explain the different types of triangles but at this level, 
children only have to understand that there exists special properties for triangles 
and that there are many different types of triangles (see Figure 10.12 (d)).
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D)  
233 
Figure 10.12 (c): Types of triangles 
Figure 10.12 (d): Classification of triangles 
Activity 3.2: Matching Triangles 
Learning Outcomes: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Identify special features and properties of different types of triangles; and 
(b) Use correct vocabulary and language to describe the types of triangles. 
Materials: 
 Exercise sheet  Matching activity; and 
 Vocabulary cards (Names of shapes, labels of properties).
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 
234 
Procedure: 
(i) Can you see any differences between those four triangles in the upper row? 
Look at them closely  look for similarities and differences between them. 
(ii) Try to match those on the upper row by drawing arrows to those shown in 
Figure 10.13. 
Figure 10.13: Matching activity: Types of triangles 
Activity 3.3: Quadrilaterals 
Learning Outcomes: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Discover features and properties of quadrilaterals; 
(b) Identify special features and properties of quadrilaterals; and 
(c) Use correct vocabulary and language to describe quadrilaterals.
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D)  
235 
Materials: 
 Rubber bands; 
 Geoboard; 
 Grid paper; and 
 Vocabulary cards: (names of shapes, labels of properties). 
Procedure: 
(i) Ask pupils to use 4 points and a rubber band to form a quadrilateral. 
(ii) Then, ask them to form different types of quadrilaterals  see Figure 10.14 
(a) - and draw the shapes on grid paper. 
(iii) Guide them to look for properties of quadrilaterals, name and describe the 
quadrilaterals made, (see Figure 10.14 (b) and Figure 10.14 (c)). 
Figure 10.14 (a): Examples of quadrilaterals
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 
236 
A. TeacherÊs Instructions: 
Figure 10.14 (b): How to make the quadrilaterals 
Figure 10.14 (c): Examples of quadrilaterals shapes 
Activity 3.4: Polygons 
Learning outcomes: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Discover features and properties of polygons; 
(b) Identify special features and properties of polygons; and 
(c) Use correct vocabulary and language to describe polygons. 
Materials: 
 Rubber bands; 
 Geoboard; 
 Grid paper; and 
 Vocabulary cards (names of shapes, labels of properties).
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D)  
237 
Procedure: 
(i) Ask pupils to use five points and a rubber band to form a pentagon. 
(ii) Then, ask them to form different types of polygons using six pegs and 
more, see Figure 10.15 and draw the shapes on grid paper. 
(iii) Guide them to look for properties of polygons, name and describe the 
polygons made. 
Figure 10.15: Examples of polygons 
Activity 3.5: Curved Shapes: Circle and Ellipse 
Learning Outcomes: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Discover features and properties of non-polygons or curved shapes e.g. 
circle, ellipse; 
(b) Identify special features and properties of non-polygons or curved shapes; 
and 
(c) Use correct vocabulary and language to describe non-polygons or curved 
shapes. 
Materials: 
 Picture card: Set of pictures of curved shapes; 
 Vocabulary cards: Names of shapes (circle, semicircle, ellipse); and 
 Vocabulary cards: Features/properties (crescent/lunar/cloud/heart shape).
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 
238 
Procedure: 
(i) Ask pupils to look at the set of curved shapes in the picture card 
distributed. Explore and observe shapes through visual images to gain 
insight to their properties. Look for similarities and differences (see Figure 
10.16). 
(ii) Guide them to look for properties of non-polygons, name and describe the 
non-polygons shown. Introduce names, vocabulary or the language of 
geometry for describing non-polygons or curved shapes shown. 
(iii) Count the total number of faces, the number of similar faces and slowly 
introduce names and properties of the curved shapes. 
Figure 10.16: Examples of non-polygons or curved shapes 
Shapes in the Environment 
ACTIVITY 10.5 
Colour and print shapes of the environment 
Use any 3D solids or objects from the environment. Cut and colour the 
cross-sections or longitudinal sections of objects e.g. (star fruits, pears, 
banana stems, potatoes, leaves). Then, print them on to a piece of drawing 
paper. Use your creativity. Are they shapes of the environment? 
The learning of geometric concepts will be easier if pupils are actively involved in 
the fun learning process using appropriate teaching materials from the 
environment, such as the use of common materials from the childrenÊs 
environment like potatoes, star fruits, pears or banana stems as materials for 
drawing and painting shapes (see Figure 10.17).
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D)  
239 
Cross-sectional or longitudinal cuttings of: 
Figure 10.17: Cross-sectional or longitudinal cuttings of objects 
Part II: Transformation Geometry 
The following activity allows children to have some fun with shapes, with respect 
to motion geometry, where the learning of geometric concepts is incorporated 
into childrenÊs play. 
Activity 4.1: Fun with Shapes: The Most Powerful Spinning Propeller (Motion 
Geometry) 
Learning Outcomes: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Construct propellers of different shapes: semi-circular shape, crescent 
(lunar) shape, heart shape and arrow shape; and 
(b) Discover which shape forms the most powerful spinning propellers. 
Materials: 
 Instruction cards for making different shaped propellers; 
 Plastic glass; 
 Manila card; 
 Coloured paper/Fancy cards; 
 Straws; 
 Pencils; 
 Pins; and 
 Plasticine.
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 
240 
Procedure: 
(i) Divide the children into four groups of five. 
(ii) Ask each group to prepare different shapes of propellers as follows: 
 Group 1 : semi circular shaped propellers; 
 Group 2 : lunar shaped propellers; 
 Group 3 : heart shaped propellers; and 
 Group 4 : arrow shaped propellers. 
(iii) Using their finished products, ask pupils to blow on to the propellers to see 
which propellers will spin the fastest. 
Group 1 
Figure 10.18 (a), Figure 10.18 (b), Figure 10.18 (c) and Figure 10.18 (d) explain the 
steps in making the semi-circular, lunar, heart and arrow shaped propellers for 
each of the four groups. 
Figure 10.18 (a): The making of semi-circular propellers
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D)  
241 
Group 2 
Figure 10.18 (b): The making of lunar-shaped propellers 
Group 3 
Figure 10.18 (c): The making of heart-shaped propellers 
Group 4 
Figure 10.18 (d): The making of arrow-shaped propellers
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 
242 
Finished Products 
Figure 10.18 (e) shows the finished products of the different shaped propellers 
from each group. 
Figure 10.18 (e): Different shaped propellers 
Part III: Coordinate Geometry 
An activity about coordinate geometry dealing with the location of places or 
destinations is described next. 
Activity 5.1: Location of Places 
Learning Outcomes: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Explain the location and state the direction of places from a picture map. 
Materials: 
 Picture map; and 
 A4 paper. 
Procedure: 
(i) Distribute the picture map (see Figure 10.19) to your pupils. 
(ii) Ask them to study the map and explain the location of the places stated in 
the map to a tourist who lands at KLIA. 
(iii) Discuss in detail the location and direction of those places.
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D)  
243 
Figure 10.19: Picture map 
Part IV: Topological Geometry 
The last area of geometric concept to be discussed concerns topology and touches 
on the location of objects according to a relative standing position in space. 
Activity 6.1: Location of Shapes 
Learning Outcomes: 
At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: 
(a) Describe the locations and state the positions of objects with respect to a 
relative standing position from the picture provided. 
Materials: 
 Picture card; 
 A4 paper; and 
 Vocabulary cards: (positional words e.g. behind  in front, left  right, far  
near, beside  adjacent, etc.).
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 
244 
Procedure: 
(i) Ask pupils to colour the shapes according to the colour scheme given i.e. 
(triangles  green, quadrilaterals  red, polygons  light blue, circles  dark 
blue, and ellipses  yellow) or any scheme of their choice in the picture card 
as shown in Figure 10.20. 
(ii) Count the number of figures for every group of shapes that appears in the 
picture. 
(iii) Topology concept: Discuss the site or the location of objects in the picture 
from the girlÊs standing position i.e. behind  in front, left  right, far  near, 
beside  adjacent, etc. 
(iv) Ask pupils to describe and state the positions of objects using appropriate 
vocabulary. 
Figure 10.20: Picture card 
 This topic of two dimensional shapes discusses spatial sense in detail, how we 
understand our world, childrenÊs level of thinking and the teaching of 
geometry concepts within four geometric systems, which are: 
(a) Euclidean Geometry; 
(b) Transformation Geometry;
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D)  
245 
(c) Coordinate Geometry; and 
(d) Topological Geometry. 
 Examples and activities suggested are within the primary school curriculum 
prescribed especially for pre-school and early primary school levels. 
 Teachers are encouraged to develop good lesson plans, creative and effective 
teaching activities to suit pupilsÊ interest and their ability to understand the 
geometric aspects of their surrounding and the environment. 
Acute Angle 
Apex 
Base 
Boundary 
Circle 
Cone 
Corner 
Edge 
Equilateral Triangle 
Hexagon 
Isosceles Triangle 
Rectangle 
Scalene Triangle 
Sphere 
Square 
Symmetry 
Tessellate 
Triangle 
Two Dimensional 
Vertex (Vertices (p)) 
As an early childhood mathematics school teacher, you have to plan teaching and 
learning activities that covers the teaching of geometric concepts for the four 
geometric systems. Suggest suitable teaching and learning activities that can be 
carried out to enable the children to acquire the geometric concepts discussed. 
Teaching activities and teaching materials should be creative and effective based 
on respective learning outcomes.
TOPIC 10 TWO DIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 
246 
The teaching of geometric concepts has to be aligned to childrenÊs levels of 
thought, pupilsÊ experience and their geometric reasoning ability. List three 
learning activities that can suit the criteria mentioned. 
APPENDIX 
WORKSHEET 
1. Count the shapes. Fill in the blanks with the correct numbers: 
(a) There are _____ circles. 
(b) There are _____ rectangles. 
(c) There are _____ squares. 
(d) There are _____ triangles. 
(e) There are _____ stars.

HBMT 1203 Mathematic

  • 1.
    Topic 1 Numbers 0 to 10 LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Recognise the major mathematical skills of whole numbers from 0 to 10; 2. Identify the pedagogical content knowledge of pre-number concepts, early numbers and place value of numbers from 0 to 10; 3. Plan teaching and learning activities for pre-number concepts and early numbers from 0 to 10; and 4. Determine and learn the strategies for teaching and learning numbers in order to achieve Âactive learningÊ in the classroom. INTRODUCTION Beginning number concepts are much more complex than we realise. Just because children can say the words ÂoneÊ, ÂtwoÊ, ÂthreeÊ and so on, does not mean that they can count the numbers. We want children to think about what they are counting. Children can count numbers if they understand the words Âhow manyÊ. As teachers, we do not teach numerals in isolation with the quantity they represent because numerals are symbols that have meaning for children only when they are introduced as labels of quantities. In order to start teaching numbers effectively, it is important for you to have an overview of the mathematical skills of whole numbers. At the beginning of this topic, you will learn about the history of various numeration systems and basic number concepts such as the meanings of ÂnumberÊ, ÂnumeralÊ and ÂdigitÊ. You will also learn about the stages of conceptual development for whole numbers including pre-number concepts and early numbers. Children learn to recognise and write numerals as they learn to develop early number concepts. In the second part of this topic, you will learn more about the strategies for the teaching and learning of numbers through a few samples of
  • 2.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 2 teaching and learning activities. You are also encouraged to hold discussions with your tutor and classmates. Some suggested activities for discussion are also given. PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE OF WHOLE NUMBERS: NUMBERS 0 TO 10 1.1 In this section, we will be focusing on the major mathematical skills for pre-number concepts and whole numbers 0 to 10 as follows: (a) Determine pre-number concepts; (b) Compare the values of whole numbers 1 to 10; (c) Recognise and name whole numbers 0 to 10; (d) Count, read and write whole numbers 0 to 10; (e) Determine the base-10 place value for each digit 0 to 10 ; and (f) Arrange whole numbers 1 to 10 in ascending and descending order. 1.1.1 Pre-number Concepts The development of number concepts for children in kindergarten begins with pre-number concepts and emphasises on developing number sense the ability to deal meaningfully with whole number ideas as opposed to memorising (Troutman, 2003). At this level, children are guided to interact with sets of things. As they interact, they sort, compare, make observations, see connections, tell, discuss ideas, ask and answer questions, draw pictures, write as well as build strategies. They begin to form and organise cognitive understanding. In short, children will have to learn the prerequisite skills needed as stated below: (a) Develop classification abilities by their physical attributes; (b) Compare the quantities of two sets of objects using one-to-one matching; (c) Determine quantitative relationships including Âas many asÊ, Âmore thanÊ and Âless thanÊ; (d) Arrange objects into a sequence according to size (small to big), length (short to long), height (short to tall) or width (thin to thick) and vice versa; and
  • 3.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 3 (e) Recognise repeating patterns and create patterns by copying repeating patterns using objects such as blocks, beads, etc. 1.1.2 Early Numbers Mathematics starts with the counting of numbers. There are no historical records of the first uses of numbers, their names and their symbols. Various symbols are used to represent numbers based on their numeration systems. A numeration system consists of a set of symbols and the rules for combining the symbols. Different early numeration systems appeared to have originated from tallying. Ancient people measured things by drawing on cave walls, bricks, pottery or pieces of tree trunks to record their properties. At that time, ÂnumbersÊ were represented by using simple Âtally marksÊ (/). Some numeration systems including our present day system are shown in Table 1.1. Table 1.1: Early Number Representations Today 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Ancient Egypt Babylon Mayan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About 5000 years ago, people in places of ancient civilisations began to use different symbols to represent numbers for counting. They created various numeration systems. For example, the Egyptian numeration system used picture symbols called hieroglyphics as illustrated in Figure 1.1.
  • 4.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 4 Figure 1.1: Egyptian hieroglyphics This is a base-10 system where each symbol represents a power of 10. What number is represented by the following illustration? 2(10 000) + 1000 + 3(100) + 4(10) + 6 = 21 346 Try writing the following numbers in hieroglyphics: (a) 245 (b) 1 869 234 On the other hand, the Babylonians used a base-60 system consisting of only two symbols as given below. one ten As such, the number 45 is represented as follows: 4(10) + 5 = 45 For numbers larger than 60, base-60 is used to represent numbers in the Babylonian Numeration System. Have fun computing the following illustrations: (a)
  • 5.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 5 (b) Apart from the nine symbols in Table 1.1, the Mayan Numeration System consists of 20 symbols altogether and is a base-20 system, as shown in Figure 1.2. Figure 1.2: Mayan numerals The following illustration depicts clearly the unique vertical place value format of the Mayan Numeration System, see Figure 1.3. Figure 1.3: Mayan number chart Source: Mayan number chart from http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Maya_numerals What number is represented thus? 12 + 7(20) + 0(20.18) + 14(20.18.20) = 12 + 140 + 0 + 100800 = 100952
  • 6.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 6 Simple addition can be carried out by combining two or more sets of symbols as shown in the examples given below. Try computing these operations using Hindu-Arabic numerals. (a) (b) Solutions: (a) 6 + 8 = 14 (b) {7 + 0(20) + 14(20.18) + 1(20.18.20)} + {14 + 0(20) + 3(20.18) + 2(20.18.20)} + {1 + 1(20) + 17(20.18) + 3(20.18.20)} = 7 + 0 + 5040 + 7200 + 14 + 0 + 1080 + 14400 + 1 + 20 + 6120 + 21600} = 55482 The complexities of the above examples and illustrations of the various ancient numeration systems discussed in this section should help you to realise why they are no longer in use today. Table 1.2 shows some other famous historical numeration systems used to this day including the Roman Numeration System, Greek Numeration System and our Hindu-Arabic Numeration System. Table 1.2: Famous Number Representations Roman 200 B.C. I II III IV V VI VII VIII IX Greek 500 B.C. z Hindu- Arabic 500 A.D. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Hindu- Arabic 976 A.D. l 7 8 9
  • 7.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 7 Along with the development of numbers, mathematics was further developed by famous mathematicians. The numeration system used today is based on the Hindu-Arabic numeration system. Can you explain why the Hindu-Arabic numeration system is being used today? At this point, you should have a clearer picture about the difference between a ÂnumberÊ, a ÂnumeralÊ and a ÂdigitÊ. The terms ÂnumberÊ, ÂnumeralÊ and ÂdigitÊ are all different. A number is an abstract idea that addresses the question, Âhow manyÊ and means Ârelated to quantityÊ, whereas a numeral is a symbol for representing a number that we can see, write or touch. Thus, numerals are names for numbers. A ÂdigitÊ refers to the type of numerals used in a numeration system. For example, our present numeration system is made up of only 10 different digits, that is, 0 to 9. SAMPLES OF TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 1.2 In this section, you will read about some samples of teaching and learning activities that you can implement in your classroom. 1.2.1 Teaching Pre-number Concepts There are many pre-number concepts that children must acquire in order to develop good number sense. These are as follows: (a) Classify and sort things in terms of properties (e.g. colour, shape, size, etc.); (b) Compare two sets and find out whether one set has Âas many asÊ, Âmore thanÊ, or Âless thanÊ the other set; (c) Learn the concepts of Âone moreÊ and Âone lessÊ. (d) Order sets of objects according to a sequence according to size, length, height or width; and (e) Recognise and copy repeating patterns using objects such as blocks, beads, etc. Now, let us look at some activities that you can do with your pupils.
  • 8.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 8 Activity 1: Classifying Things by Their Properties Learning Outcomes: By the end of this activity, your pupils should be able to: (a) Classify things by their general and specific properties. Materials: Sets of toys; Sets of pattern blocks (various shapes, colour, size, etc.); and Plastic containers or boxes. Procedure: (a) Classify Objects by Their General Properties Teacher asks children to work in groups of five and distributes four types of toys (e.g. car, train, boat and aeroplane) to each group. Teacher says: „LetÊs work together, look at the toys.‰ Teacher asks: „Which are the toys that can fly? Which one can sail in the sea? Which is the longest vehicle? Which is the smallest vehicle? Which is the fastest vehicle? Which is the slowest vehicle?‰ Children respond to questions asked. In this activity, children should be asked why they chose that specific object and not the others. Teacher listens to childrenÊs responses. (b) Classify Objects by Their Specific Properties Teacher distributes a set of pattern blocks with different shapes, sizes and colours to each group, see Figure 1.4.
  • 9.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 9 Figure 1.4: Pattern blocks (i) Teacher says: „Firstly, classify these objects by their shapes.‰ „Put the objects into the boxes: A, B, C and D according to their shapes.‰ (e.g. circle, triangle, rectangle and rhombus, see Figure 1.5 (a). Figure 1.5 (a): Pattern blocks and containers (ii) Teacher says: „Secondly, classify these objects by their sizes.‰ „Put the objects into the boxes: A, B and C according to their sizes.‰ (e.g. small size in box A, medium size in box B and large size in box C with respect to their shapes, see Figure 1.5 (b). Figure 1.5 (b): Pattern blocks and containers
  • 10.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 10 (iii) Teacher says: „Lastly, classify these objects by their colours.‰ „Put the objects into the boxes: A, B, C, D, E and F according to their colours‰. (e.g. orange, blue, yellow, red, green and purple, see Figure 1.5 (c). Figure 1.5 (c): Pattern blocks and containers At this stage, children will recognise that shape is the first property to consider, followed by size and colour. Children should be encouraged to find as many properties as they can when classifying objects. You can also try some other activities with the children such as classifying objects by their texture (smooth, rough and fuzzy) or by their size (short and long), etc. to prepare them to learn about putting objects into a sequence, that is, the skill of ordering or seriation, which is more difficult than comparing since it involves making many decisions. For example, when ordering three drinking straws of different lengths from short to long, the middle one must be longer than the one before it, but shorter than the one after it. Next, in Activity 2, your pupils will be asked to find the relationship between two sets of black and white objects. Let us now take a look at Activity 2.
  • 11.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 11 Activity 2: Finding the Relationship between Two Sets of Objects Learning Outcomes: By the end of this activity, your pupils should be able to: (a) Match items on a one-to-one matching basis; (b) Understand and master the concept of Âas many asÊ, Âmore thanÊ and Âless thanÊ; and (c) Compare the number of objects between two sets. Materials: Picture cards (A, B, C and D); Erasers; and Pencils, etc. Procedure: (i) One-to-One Matching Correspondence Children are presented with two picture cards, (Card A and Card B) consisting of the same number of objects. Teacher demonstrates how the relationship of Âas many asÊ can be introduced using a one-to-one matching basis as follows, see Figure 1.6 (a): Figure 1.6 (a): One-to-one matching correspondence Teacher asks: „Are there as many moons as stars? Why?‰ (ii) As Many As, More and Less Teacher takes out a star from Card B and asks, „Are there as many moons as stars now? Why? How can you tell? etc.‰ See example in Figure 1.6 (b).
  • 12.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 12 Figure 1.6 (b): One-to-one matching correspondence Teacher guides the children to build the concept of ÂmoreÊ and ÂlessÊ. For example, which card has more moons? Which card has fewer stars? (iii) More Than, Less Than The children are presented with another two picture cards (Card C and Card D) with different numbers of objects. Teacher guides the children to compare the number of objects between the two sets and introduces the concept of Âmore thanÊ and Âless thanÊ. Teacher says: „Can you match each marble in Card C one-to-one with a marble in Card D? Why?‰ Teacher says: „Children, we can say that Card C has more marbles than Card D, or, Card D has less marbles than Card C‰. In addition, teacher can ask her pupils to do a group activity as follows: Teacher says: „Sit together with your friends in a group‰. „Everybody, show all the erasers and pencils you have to your friends‰. „Can you compare the number of objects and tell your friends using the words, Âmore thanÊ or Âless thanÊ?‰ Pupils should be able to respond as such: „I have more erasers than you but, I have fewer pencils than you‰, „You have more erasers than me‰, etc. Do try and think of other appropriate activities you can plan and implement to help children to acquire pre-number experience or concepts essential for developing good number sense prior to learning whole numbers. ACTIVITY 1.1 Which of the pupilsÊ learning activities do you like the most? Explain.
  • 13.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 13 1.2.2 Teaching Early Numbers This section elaborates on the activities which you can implement with your pupils to help them understand the concept of early numbers. Activity 3: Name Numbers and Recognise Numerals 1 to 10 Learning Outcomes: By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Name and recognise numerals 1 to 5. Materials: Picture cards (0 to 5); Number cards (1 to 5); and PowerPoint slides. Procedure: (a) Clap and Count Teacher claps and counts 1 to 5. Teacher and pupils clap and count a series of claps together. ÂClapÊ, say ÂoneÊ. ÂClapÊ, ÂClapÊ, say ÂoneÊ, ÂtwoÊ. Teacher asks pupils to clap twice and count one, two; Clap four times and count one, two, three, four, etc. Pupils respond accordingly. Do the same until number 5 is done. (b) Slide Show Teacher displays a series of PowerPoint slides one by one as shown in Figure 1.7. The numerals come out after the objects. Figure 1.7: Picture numeral cards
  • 14.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 14 Teacher asks: „How many balls are there in this slide?‰ and says, „Let us count together.‰ Teacher points to the balls and asks pupils to count one by one. Then, point to the numeral and say the number name. Guide pupils to respond (e.g. „There is one ball‰, „There are two balls‰, etc.). Repeat with different numbers and different pictures of objects. (c) Class Activity (i) Teacher shows a picture card and asks pupils to stick the correct number card beside it on the white board. e.g.: Teacher says: „Look at the picture. How many clocks are there?‰ Pupils respond accordingly. Then teacher asks a pupil to choose the correct number card and stick it beside the picture card on the white board. Teacher repeats the steps until the fifth picture card is used. At the end, teacher asks pupils to arrange the picture cards in ascending order (1 to 5) and then asks them to count accordingly. (ii) Teacher shows a number card and asks the pupils to stick the correct picture card beside it on the white board. e.g.: Teacher says: „Look at the card. What is the number written on the card?‰
  • 15.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 15 Pupils respond accordingly. Then teacher asks a pupil to choose the correct picture card and stick it beside the number card on the white board. Teacher repeats the steps until the fifth numeral card is done. At the end, teacher asks pupils to arrange the number cards in ascending or descending order (e.g. 1 to 5 or 5 to 1) before asking them to count in sequence and at random. (d) Group Activity Pupils sit in groups of five. Teacher distributes five picture cards of objects and five corresponding numeral cards (1 to 5). Teacher says: „Choose a pupil in your group. Put up the number five card in his/her left hand and the correct picture card on his/her right hand. Help him/her to get the correct answer.‰ Teacher asks the group to choose another pupil to do the same for the rest of the cards. Repeat for all the numbers 1 to 5. Teacher distributes a worksheet. Teacher says: „LetÊs sing a song about busy people together.‰ (refer to Appendix 1) Activity 4: Read and Write Numbers, 1 to 10 Learning Outcomes: By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Read and write numbers from 1 to 10. Materials: Picture cards; Cut-out number cards (1 5); Number names (name cards, one to five); and Plasticine.
  • 16.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 16 Procedure: (i) Numbers 1 to 5 Teacher shows the picture cards with numbers, 1 to 5 in sequence. Pupils count the objects in the picture card, point to the number and say the number name out loud. e.g.: Teacher sticks the picture card on the writing board. Repeat this activity for all the picture and number cards, that is, until the fifth card is done. (ii) Technique of Writing Numbers Teacher demonstrates in sequence the technique of writing numerals, 1 to 5. Firstly, teacher writes the number Â1Ê on the writing board step by step as follows: e.g.: 1 Teacher writes the number in the air followed by the pupils. Repeat until number 5 is done. Repeat until the pupils are able to write numbers in the correct way. (iii) Plasticine Numerals Teacher distributes some plasticine to pupils and says: „Let us build the numerals with plasticine for numbers 1 to 5. Arrange your numbers in sequence.‰
  • 17.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 17 (iv) Cut-out Number Card Teacher gives pupils the cut-out number cards, 1 to 5. Then, teacher asks them to trace the shape of each number on a piece of paper. e.g.: Teacher distributes Worksheet 1 (refer to Appendix 2). Note: This strategy can also be used to teach the writing of numbers, from 6 to 10. Can you write these numbers in the correct way? Activity 5: The Concept of Zero Learning Outcomes: By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Understand the concept of ÂzeroÊ or ÂnothingÊ; and (b) Determine, name and write the number zero. Materials: Picture cards; and Three boxes and five balls (Given to each group). Procedure: (i) Teacher shows three picture cards.
  • 18.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 18 Teacher asks: „How many rabbits are there in Cage A, B and C?‰ Pupils respond: „There is one rabbit in Cage B, two rabbits in Cage C and no rabbits in Cage A.‰ Teacher introduces the number Â0Ê to represent Âno rabbitsÊ or ÂnothingÊ. (ii) Teacher distributes some balls into three boxes. Teacher asks: How many balls are there in Box A, Box B and Box C respectively?‰ Teacher guides pupils to determine the concept of ÂzeroÊ or ÂnothingÊ according to the number of balls in Box B. Teacher reads and writes the digit Â0‰ (zero), followed by pupils. Activity 6: Count On (Ascending) and Count Back (Descending) in Ones, from 1 to 10 Learning Outcomes: By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Count on in ones from 1 to 10; (b) Count back in ones from 10 to 1; and (c) Determine the base-10 place value for each digit from 1 to 10. Materials: Number cards (1 10); Picture cards; and PowerPoint slides.
  • 19.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 19 Procedure: (a) Picture Cards (i) Ascending Order Teacher flashes picture cards and the corresponding number cards in ascending order, (i.e. 1 to 10). Pupils count the objects in the picture cards and say the numbers. Teacher sticks the cards on the whiteboard in sequence. e.g.: Continue until the 10th picture card is done. Pupils are asked to count on in ones from 1 to 10. The activity is repeated. (ii) Descending Order Teacher flashes picture cards and the corresponding number cards in descending order, (i.e. 10 to 1). Pupils count the objects in the picture cards and say the numbers. Teacher sticks the cards on the whiteboard in sequence. e.g.:
  • 20.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 20 Continue until the first picture card is done. Pupils are asked to count back in ones from 10 to 1. The activity is repeated. (b) Slide Show (i) Ascending Order Pupils are presented a series of slides (PowerPoint presentation): Teacher asks pupils to count and say the number name, e.g. „one‰. Teacher clicks a button to show the second stage and asks pupils to count and say the number.
  • 21.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 21 Continue until the 10th stage. Repeat until the pupils are able to count on in ones from 1 to 10. (ii) Descending Order Teacher repeats the process as above but in descending order (i.e. 10 to 1). Teacher presents another slide show, see Figure 1.8: Figure 1.8: Number ladder (c) Teacher Distributes a Worksheet (i) Jump on the Number Blocks Teacher asks pupils to sing the ÂNumbers Up and DownÊ song while jumping on the number blocks around the pond, that is, counting on or counting back again and again! „Let us sing the ÂNumbers Up and DownÊ song together‰ (see Figure 1.9). Figure 1.9: Number blocks
  • 22.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 22 (ii) Arranging Pupils in Sequence Teacher selects two groups of 10 pupils and gives each group a set of number cards, 1 to 10, see Figure 1.10. Teacher asks them to stand in front of the class in groups. Teacher asks both groups to arrange themselves in order. The group that finishes first is the winner. The losing group is asked to count on and count back the numbers in ones. Repeat the game. Figure 1.10: Number cards (iii) Going Up and Down the Stairs Pupils are asked to count on in ones while going up the stairs and count back in ones while going down the stairs. As a mathematics teacher, you have to generate as many ideas as possible about the teaching and learning of whole numbers. There is no „one best way‰ to teach whole numbers. As we know, the goal for children working on this topic is to go beyond simply counting from one to 10 and recognising numerals. The emphasis here is developing number sense, number relationships and the facility with counting. The samples of teaching and learning activities in this topic will help you to understand basic number skills associated with childrenÊs early learning of mathematics. They need to acquire ongoing experiences resulting from these activities in order to develop consistency and accuracy with counting skills.
  • 23.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 23 Ascending order Descending order Digit Early numbers Number Numeral One-to-one matching correspondence Pre-number Concepts Seriation Whole numbers 1. Describe the chronological development of numbers from ancient civilisation until now. Present your answer in a mind map. 2. Teaching number concepts using concrete materials can help pupils learn more effectively. Explain. 1. Pupils might have difficulties in understanding the meaning of 0 and 10 compared to the numbers 1 to 9. Explain. 2. Learning outcomes: At the end of the lesson, pupils will be able to count numbers in ascending order (1 to 9) and descending order (9 to 1) either through: (a) Picture cards first and number cards later; or (b) Number cards first and picture cards later. Suggest the best strategy that can be used in the teaching and learning process of numbers according to the above learning outcomes.
  • 24.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 24 APPENDIX Busy People One busy person sweeping the floor Two busy people closing the door Three busy people washing babyÊs socks Four busy people lifting the rocks Five busy people washing the bowls Six busy people stirring ÂdodolÊ Seven busy people chasing the mouse Eight busy people painting the house Nine busy people sewing clothes Resource: Pusat Perkembangan Kurikulum Numbers Up and Down I'm learning how to count, From zero up to ten. I start from zero every time And I count back down again. Zero, one, two, three, Four and five, I say. Six, seven, eight and nine, Now I'm at ten ~ Hooray! But, I'm not finished, no not yet, I got right up to ten. Now I must count from ten back down, To get to zero again! Ten, nine, eight, seven, Six and five, I say. Four, three, two, one, I'm back at zero ~ Hooray! Resource: Mary Flynn's Songs 4 Teachers
  • 25.
    TOPIC 1 NUMBERS0 TO 10 25 WORKSHEET How many seeds are there in each apple? Count and write the numbers.
  • 26.
    Topic 2 Addition within 10 and Place Value LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Identify the major mathematical skills related to addition within 10 and place value; 2. Recognise the pedagogical content knowledge related to addition within 10 and place value; and 3. Plan teaching and learning activities for addition within 10 and introduction to the place value concept. INTRODUCTION Adding is a quick and efficient way of counting. Sometimes we notice that adding and counting are alike, but adding is faster than counting. You will also see that addition is more powerful than mere counting. It has its own special vocabulary or words, and is easy to learn because only a few simple rules are used in the addition of whole numbers. When teaching addition to young pupils, it is important that you recognise the meaningful learning processes which can be acquired through real life experiences. The activities in this topic are designed as an introduction to addition. It provides the kind of practice that most young children need. What do children need to know in addition? Children do not gain understanding of addition just by working with symbols such as Â+Ê and Â=Ê. You have to present the concept of addition through real-world experiences because symbols will only be meaningful when they are associated with these experiences. Young children must be able to see the connection between the process of addition and the world they live in. They need to learn that certain symbols and words such as ÂaddÊ, ÂsumÊ, ÂtotalÊ and ÂequalÊ are used as tools in everyday life.
  • 27.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 27 This topic is divided into two main sections. The first section deals with pedagogical skills pertaining to addition within 10 and includes an introduction to the concept of place-value. The second section provides some samples of teaching and learning activities for addition within 10. You will find that by reading the input in this topic, you will be able to teach addition to young pupils more effectively and meaningfully. PEDAGOGICAL SKILLS OF ADDITION WITHIN 10 2.1 In this section, we will discuss further the pedagogical skills of addition within 10. This section will look into the concept of 'more than', teaching and learning addition through addition stories, acting out stories to go with equations, number bonds up to 10, reading and writing addition equations and finally reinforcement activities. 2.1.1 The Concept of ‘More Than’ It is important for pupils to understand and use the vocabulary of comparing and arranging numbers or quantities before learning about addition. We can start by comparing two numbers. For example, a teacher gives four oranges (or any other concrete object) each to two pupils. The teacher then gives another orange to one of the pupils and asks them to count the number of oranges each of them has. Teacher: How many oranges do you have? Who has more oranges? Teacher introduces the concept of Âmore thanÊ, Âand one moreÊ as well as Âadd one moreÊ for addition by referring to the example above. The pupils are guided to say the following sentences to reinforce their understanding of addition with respect to the above concept. e.g.: Five oranges are more than four oranges. Five is more than four. Four and one more is five. Four add one more is five. Teacher repeats with other numbers using different picture cards or counters and pupils practise using the sentence structures given above.
  • 28.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 28 2.1.2 Teaching and Learning Addition Through Addition Stories Initially, addition can be introduced through story problems that children can act out. Early story situations should be simple and straightforward. Here is an example of a simple story problem for teaching addition with two addends: Salmah has three balls. Her mother bought two more balls for her. How many balls does Salmah have altogether? At this stage, children have to make connections between the real world and the process of addition by interpreting the addition stories. Children must read and write the equations that describe the process they are working with. The concept of ÂadditionÊ should be introduced using real things or concrete objects. At the same time, they have to read and write the equations using common words, such as ÂandÊ, ÂmakeÊ, as well as ÂequalsÊ as shown in Figure 2.1: Figure 2.1: Acting out addition stories However, you have to study effective ways in which your pupils can act out the stories. Based on the situations given, pupils can act out the stories in different ways as follows: (a) Act out stories using real things as counters such as marbles, ice-cream sticks, top-up cards, etc.; (b) Act out stories using counters and counting boards (e.g. trees, oceans. roads, beaches, etc.); (c) Act out stories using models such as counting blocks; and (d) Act out stories using imagination (without real things). Figure 2.2 shows some appropriate teaching aids for teaching and learning addition.
  • 29.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 29 Figure 2.2: Acting out addition stories using appropriate teaching aids 2.1.3 Acting Out Stories to go with Equations Figure 2.3 suggests a way for acting out stories to go with equations using the ÂplusÊ and ÂequalÊ signs: Figure 2.3: Flowchart for ÂActing out stories to go with equationsÊ
  • 30.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 30 After pupils are able to write equations according to teacher-directed stories, they can begin writing equations independently using suitable materials (refer to Figure 2.2). Here are some examples of how to use the materials. Example 1: Counting Board (e.g. Aquarium) I have two clown fish in my aquarium. My mother bought three goldfish yesterday. How many fish do I have altogether? See Figure 2.4. 2 clown fish and 3 gold fish make 5 fish altogether. 2 + 3 = 5 Figure 2.4: Story problem ACTIVITY 2.1 Use the above example to show that 2 + 3 = 3 + 2 = 5. 2.1.4 Number Bonds Up to 10 Activity 1: Count On and Count Back in Ones, from 1 to 10 There are three boys playing football. Then another boy joins them. How many boys are playing football altogether? See Figure 2.5. 3 + 1 = 4 Figure 2.5: Count on: Using an Abacus Teachers can also use number cards as a number line. The teacher reads or writes the story problem and then begins a discussion with pupils on how to use the number line to answer the question as in the example shown in Figure 2.6:
  • 31.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 31 „Four pupils and three pupils are seven pupils‰ „Four plus three equals seven‰ 4 + 3 = 7 Figure 2.6: Count on: Aligning number cards to form a number line Teachers are encouraged to teach the addition of two addends within 5 first, followed by addition within 6 until 10. Pupils need to be ÂimmersedÊ in the activities and go through the experience several times. By repeating the tasks, pupils will learn the different number combinations for bonds up to 10 efficiently. Activity 2: Count On and Count Back in Ones, from 1 to 10 The activities on number bonds provide opportunities for teachers to apply a variety of addition strategies. The objective of these activities is to recognise the addition of pairs of numbers up to 10. You can start by asking your pupils to build a tower of 10 cubes and then break it into two towers, for example, a tower of four cubes and a tower of six cubes, (refer Figure 2.7) or any pairs of numbers adding up to 10. Example: Figure 2.7: Number towers Guide pupils to produce addition pairs up to 10, e.g. 4 + 6 = 10 or 6 + 4 = 10. Repeat with other pairs of numbers. Ask pupils what patterns they can see before getting them to produce all the possible pairs that add up to 10. Record each addition pair in a table as shown in Table 2.1:
  • 32.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 32 Table 2.1: Sample Table for ÂAddition ActivityÊ: Addition Pairs Up to 10 After Breaking Height of Tower Before into Two Towers Breaking into Two Towers (Cubes) Height of First Tower (Cubes) Height of Second Tower (Cubes) 10 0 10 10 1 9 10 2 8 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 Discuss the results with pupils and ask them to practise saying the number bonds repeatedly to facilitate instant and spontaneous recall in order to master the basic facts of addition up to 10. To develop the skill, the teacher should first break the tower of 10 cubes into two parts. Show one part of the tower and hide the other. Then, ask pupils to state the height of the hidden tower. To extend the skill, you may progressively ask the pupils to learn how to add other pairs of numbers, such as 9, 8, 7 and so on. ACTIVITY 2.2 What is the Âcommutative law in additionÊ? How do you introduce this concept to your pupils? Explain clearly the strategy used for the teaching and learning of the commutative law in addition. 2.1.5 Reading and Writing Addition Equations As we know, there are two common methods of writing the addition of numbers, either horizontally or vertically, as shown below:
  • 33.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 33 (a) Adding horizontally, in row form (i.e. Writing and counting numbers from left to right). Example: 4 + 5 = 9 The activities discussed above are mostly based on this method, which are suitable for adding two single numbers. (b) Adding vertically, in column form (i.e. Writing and counting numbers from top to bottom). Example: 3 + 4 7 This method is suitable for finding a sum of two or more large numbers because putting large numbers in columns makes the process of adding easier compared to putting them in a row. ACTIVITY 2.3 Numbers are most easily added by placing them in columns. Describe how you can create suitable teaching aids to enhance the addition of two addends using this method. 2.1.6 Reinforcement Activities To be an effective mathematics teacher, you are encouraged to plan small group or individual activities as reinforcement activities for addition within 10. Here are some examples of learning activities that you can do with your pupils. (a) Number Shapes Have pupils take turns rolling a number cube to see how many counters they have to place on their number shapes. Then they fill in the remaining spaces with counters of different colours. Finally, they describe the number combinations formed, as illustrated in Figure 2.8. Repeat with different number shapes.
  • 34.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 34 Figure 2.8: Number shapes (b) Number Trains Let pupils fill their number-train outlines (e.g. 7, 8 or 9) with connecting cubes of two different colours. Ask them to describe the number combinations formed. See Figure 2.9. Figure 2.9: Number train In addition, pupils can also describe the number combination formed as Âthree plus three plus two equals eightÊ, that is (3 + 3 + 2 = 8). PLACE VALUE 2.2 This section teaches you how to introduce the place-value concept to your pupils. 2.2.1 Counting from 11 to 20 Pupils will be able to read, write and count numbers up to 20 through the same activities as for learning numbers up to 10 covered in Topic 1. Similar teaching aids and methods can be used. The only difference is that we should now have more counters, say, at least 20. In this section, we will not be focusing on counting numbers from 11 to 20 because it would just be repeating the process of counting numbers from 1 to 10. You are, however, encouraged to have some references on the strategies of teaching and learning numbers from 11 to 20.
  • 35.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 35 ACTIVITY 2.4 Describe a strategy you would use for the teaching and learning of ÂCounting from 11 to 20Ê. 2.2.2 Teaching and Learning about Place Value The concept of place value is not easily understood by pupils. Although they can read and write numbers up to 20 or beyond, it does not mean that they know about the different values for each numeral in two-digit numbers. We are lucky because our number system requires us to learn only 10 different numerals. Pupils can easily learn how to write any number, no matter how large it is. Once pupils have discovered the patterns in the number system, the task of writing two-digit numbers and beyond is simplified enormously. They will encounter the same sequence of numerals, 0 to 9 over and over again. However, many pupils do not understand that numbers are constructed by organising quantities into groups of tens and ones, and the numerals change in value depending on their position in a number. In this section, you will be introduced to the concept of place value by forming and counting groups, recognising patterns in the number system and organising groups into tens and ones. The place-value concept can be taught in kindergarten in order to help pupils count large numbers in a meaningful way. You can start teaching place value by asking pupils to form and count manipulative materials, such as counting cubes, ice-cream sticks, beans and cups, etc. For example, ask pupils to count and group the connected cubes from 1 to 10 placed either in a row or horizontally as shown in Figure 2.10. Figure 2.10: Connected cubes placed horizontally You can now introduce the concept of place value of ones and tens (10 ones) to your pupils. The following steps can be used to demonstrate the relationship between the numbers (11 to 19), tens and ones. The cubes can also be arranged in a column or vertically as shown below. Here, you are encouraged to use the enquiry method to help pupils familiarise themselves with the place-value of tens and ones illustrated as follows:
  • 36.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 36 Example: Teacher asks: What number is 10 and one more? See Figure 2.11 (Pupils should respond with 11). Can you show me using the connecting cubes? The above step is repeated for numbers 12, 13, , 20. Figure 2.11: Connected cubes placed vertically In order to make your lesson more effective, you should use place-value boards or charts to help pupils organise their counters into tens and ones. A place-value board is a piece of thick paper or soft-board that is divided into two parts of different colours. The size of the board depends on the size of the counters used. An example of the place-value board is given in Figure 2.12: Figure 2.12: Place value board
  • 37.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 37 The repetition of the pattern for numbers 12 to 19 and 20 will make your pupils understand better and be more familiar with the concept of place value. They will be able to learn about counting numbers from 11 to 20 or beyond more meaningfully. At the same time, you can also relate the place-value concept to the addition process. For example, 1 tens and 2 ones make 12, which means 10 and two more make 12. ACTIVITY 2.5 In groups of four, create some reinforcement activities for teaching numbers 11 to 20 using the place-value method. Describe clearly how you will conduct the activities using suitable Âhands-onÊ teaching aids. SAMPLES OF TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 2.3 This section provides some samples of teaching and learning activities you can carry out with your pupils to enhance their knowledge of addition within 10 and the place-value concept. Activity 1: Adding Using Patterns Learning Outcomes: At the end of this activity, your pupils should be able to: (a) Add two numbers up to 10 using patterns; (b) Read and write equations for addition of numbers using common words; and (c) Read and write equations for addition of numbers using symbols and signs. Materials: Picture cards; and PowerPoint slides.
  • 38.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 38 Procedure: (a) Adding Using Patterns (in Rows) (i) Teacher divides the class into 5 groups of 6 pupils, and gives 10 oranges to each group. Teacher then asks each group to count the oranges, see Figure 2.13. Teacher says: „Can you arrange the oranges so that you can count more easily?‰ Discuss with your friends. Teacher says: „Now, take a look at this picture card.‰ Figure 2.13: Picture card: Addition using patterns (ii) Teacher says: „Can you see the pattern? Let us count in groups of fives instead of counting on in ones.‰ For example: Five and five equals ten, or 5 + 5 = 10 (iii) Teacher says: „Now, let us look at another pattern. How many eggs are there in the picture given below (see Figure 2.14)?‰ Figure 2.14: Picture card: Addition using patterns (in rows) (iv) Teacher says: „Did you count every egg to find out how many there are altogether? Or did you manage to see the pattern and count along one row first to get 4, and then add with another row of 4 to make 8 eggs altogether?‰ „Well done, if you have done so!‰ Let your pupils add using different patterns of different numbers of objects with the help of PowerPoint slides. Guide your pupils to read and write equations of addition of numbers in words, symbols and signs (You may discuss how to write the story-board of your PowerPoint presentation).
  • 39.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 39 (b) Adding Using Patterns (in Columns) (i) Teacher says: „Let us look at the pictures and try to recognise the patterns (see Figure 2.15). Discuss with your friends.‰ Figure 2.15: Picture cards (ii) Teacher discusses the patterns with pupils. For example, teacher shows the third picture [Picture (c)] and tells that it can be divided into two parts, namely, the top and bottom parts as shown in Figure 2.16: Figure 2.16: Picture card: Addition using patterns (in columns) (iii) This is a way of showing how to teach addition using columns by the inquiry-discovery method. As a conclusion, the teacher explains to the pupils that arranging the objects in patterns will make it easier to add them. Using columns to add also makes the addition of large numbers easier and faster. (c) Teacher distributes a worksheet on addition using patterns (in rows or in columns).
  • 40.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 40 Activity 2: Addition within the Highest Total of 10 Learning Outcomes: By the end of this activity, your pupils should be able to: (a) Add using fingers; (b) Add by combining two groups of objects; and (c) Solve simple problems involving addition within 10. Materials: Fingers; Counting board (tree); Picture cards; Number cards; Counters; Storybooks; Apples; and Other concrete objects, etc. Procedure: (a) Addition Using Fingers (i) Initially, use fingers to practise adding two numbers as a method of working out the addition of two groups of objects, see Figure 2.17. e.g.: Figure 2.17: Finger addition
  • 41.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 41 (b) Addition of Two Groups of Objects (i) Teacher puts three green apples on the right side of the tree and another four red apples on the left side. Teacher asks pupils to count the number of green apples and red apples respectively. (ii) Teacher asks: „How many green apples are there? How many red apples are there?‰ (iii) Teacher tells and asks: „Put all the apples at the centre of the tree. Count on in ones together. How many apples are there altogether?‰ (iv) Teacher guides them to say and write the mathematical sentence as shown: „Three apples and four apples make seven apples‰. (v) Repeat with different numbers of apples or objects. Introduce the concept of plus and equals in a mathematical sentence. e.g. „There are two green apples and three red apples in Box A.‰ „There are five apples altogether.‰ „Two plus three equals five.‰ (vi) Teacher sticks the picture cards on the whiteboard. Encourage pupils to add by counting on in ones (e.g. 4 ... 5, 6 ,7) and guide them to say that „Four plus three equals seven‰ (see Figure 2.18). Figure 2.18: Picture card: Addition of two groups of objects (vii) Introduce the symbols for representing „plus‰ and „equals‰ in a number sentence. Ask them to stick the correct number cards below the picture cards to form an addition equation as above. Repeat this step using different numbers. (c) Problem Solving in Addition (i) Teacher shows three balls in the box and asks pupils to put in some more balls to make it 10 balls altogether.
  • 42.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 42 (ii) Teacher asks: „How many balls do you need to make up 10? How did you get the answer?‰ Let them discuss in groups using some counters. Ask them to explain how they came up with their answers. (iii) Repeat the above steps with different pairs of numbers. (iv) Teacher discusses the following problem with the pupils. Sarah has to read six story books this semester. If she has finished reading four books, how many more story books has she got to read? (v) Teacher asks them to discuss the answer in groups. Encourage them to work with models or counters and let them come up with their own ideas for solving the problem. For example: (Note: They can also use mental calculation to solve the problem.) Activity 3: Reinforcement Activity (Game) Learning Outcomes: By the end of this activity, your pupils should be able to: (a) Complete the addition table given; and (b) Add two numbers shown at the toss of two dices up to a highest total of 10. Materials: Laminated Chart (Addition Table Table 1.2); Two dices for each group; and Crayons or colour pencils.
  • 43.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 43 Procedure: (i) Teacher guides pupils to complete the addition table given. (Print out the table in A4 size paper and laminate it). You can also use the table to explain the additive identity (i.e. A + 0 = 0 + A = A). Table 2.2: Adding Squares + 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Instructions for Game: (i) Toss two dices at one go. Add the numbers obtained and check your answer from the table. (ii) Colour the numbers 10 in green (Table 2.2). List down all the pairs adding up to 10. (iii) Colour the numbers totalling 9 in red. List down all pairs adding up to 9. (iv) Continue with other pairs of numbers using different colours for different sums.
  • 44.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 44 Activity 4: Place Value and Ordering Learning Outcomes: By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Read and write numerals from 0 to 20; (b) Explain the value represented by each digit in a two-digit number; and (c) Use vocabulary for comparing and ordering numbers up to 20. Materials: Connecting cubes; Counting board; Place-value block/frame; and Counters. Procedure: (a) Groups of Tens (i) Teacher divides the class into 6 groups of 5 pupils each. Teacher distributes some connecting cubes (say, at least 40 cubes) to each group. (ii) Teacher asks the following questions and pupils are required to answer them using the connecting cubes: What number is one more than 6?, 8?, and 9? 11?, 17? and 19? What number comes after 5?, 7?, and 9? 12?, 16? and 19? Which number is more, 7 or 9?, 3 or 7?, 14 or 11? etc. e.g.: 14 is more than 11 as shown in Figure 2.19. Figure 2.19: Representing numbers using connecting cubes
  • 45.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 45 16 is one more than a number. What is that number? Repeat the above steps with different numbers. (b) Place Value and Ordering (i) Teacher introduces a place-value block and asks pupils to count beginning with number 1 by putting a counter into the first column (see Figure 2.20 (a). Teacher asks them to put one more counter on the board in that order. Repeat until number 9 is obtained. Teacher then introduces the concept of „ones‰. 1 ones represents 1 2 ones represent 2, ..., 9 ones represent 9 Figure 2.20 (a): Representing numbers with place-value block and counters (ii) Teacher asks: „What is the number after 10? How do you represent number 11 on the place-value block?‰ Teacher introduces the concept of „tens‰ and „ones‰ as follows, see Figure 2.20 (b):
  • 46.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 46 Figure 2.20 (b): Representing numbers with place-value block and counters (iii) Teacher asks pupils to put the correct number of counters into the correct column to represent the numbers 11, 12, etc. until 20. (iv) Teacher asks pupils to complete Table 1.3. Table 2.3: Place Value Number Tens Ones Number Tens Ones 11 1 3 12 9 13 17 16 14 4 19 1 8 20 15 1 (v) Teacher distributes a worksheet to reinforce the concept of place value learnt. A teacher should know his/her pupilsÊ levels of proficiency when applying strategies to solve problems related to addition. Problem solving related to addition depends on pupilsÊ ability to work based on their counting skills.
  • 47.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 47 At an early stage, it is enough if they could work using counting all or counting on. However, you have to guide and encourage them to work by seeing the relationship or answer by knowing and mastering the number combinations or number bonds. Adding Addition Equation Place Value Sum Plus 1. An effective way to teach addition is to ask pupils to act out the stories in real life using their imagination (without real things) and their own ideas. Elaborate using one example. 2. Describe clearly how you would teach addition up to 10 involving zero using real materials. 3. Counting numbers from 11 to 20 should be taught after pupils are introduced to the concept of place value. Give your comments on this. Based on the following learning outcome, „At the end of the lesson, pupils will be able to count numbers from 11 to 20 using place-value blocks‰, suggest the best strategy or method that can be used in the teaching and learning process to achieve this learning outcome.
  • 48.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 48 APPENDIX WORKSHEET (a) Count and add. (i) (ii) (b) Count and add. (c) Draw the correct number of fish on each plate and complete the equation.
  • 49.
    TOPIC 2 ADDITIONWITHIN 10 AND PLACE VALUE 49 (d) Match the following. (e) Match the following (Read and add).
  • 50.
    Topic 3 Subtraction within 10 LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Recognise the major mathematical skills pertaining to subtraction within 10; 2. Identify the pedagogical content knowledge pertaining to subtraction within 10; and 3. Plan teaching and learning activities for subtraction within 10. INTRODUCTION This topic will provide you with the instruction and practice you need to understand about subtraction. Beginning with the comprehension of basic skills in subtraction, this topic will cover various strategies for teaching and learning subtraction. The step-by-step approach used in this topic will make it easy for you to understand the ideas about teaching and learning subtraction especially at kindergarten level. As in all other topics, some examples of teaching-learning activities are also given. They include several classroom activities incorporating the use of concrete materials and a variety of methods such as inquiry-discovery, demonstration, simulation, etc. The inquiry-discovery method comprises activities such as planning, investigating, analysing and discovering. It is very important that pupils take an active part in the teaching-learning activities because by doing mathematics, they will learn more meaningfully and effectively.
  • 51.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 51 PEDAGOGICAL SKILLS OF SUBTRACTION WITHIN 10 3.1 Subtraction in simple words means taking away. When you take objects away from a group, the mathematical term for this process is known as ÂsubtractionÊ or ÂsubtractingÊ. It is all about separating a large group of things into smaller groups of things. Besides taking away, some other common terms or vocabulary that also indicate subtraction are ÂremainderÊ or Âwhat is leftÊ, Âcounting backÊ and Âfinding the differenceÊ. Subtraction is also involved when phrases or questions such as ÂHow many more?Ê, ÂWhat is the amount to be added?Ê, as well as ÂHow many remain?Ê etc., are used. There are at least three ways to illustrate the meaning of subtraction as listed below: (a) Subtraction as counting back; (b) Subtraction as taking away; and (c) Subtraction as the difference. You will be shown how to teach subtraction contextually according to each of the meanings of subtraction mentioned above. In addition, you also have to know about other important parts related to the teaching and learning of subtraction such as teaching materials, the relationship of subtraction with addition and pairs of basic subtraction facts. 3.1.1 Subtraction as Counting Back Subtraction is the reverse of addition. Counting on in ones is simply counting by ones or moving forward between numbers one at a time. As counting on is a reliable but slow way of adding, counting back is the reverse and is thus a slow but reliable way of subtracting. Initially, subtraction within 10 as counting back can be introduced by counting backwards either from 5 to 0 or from 10 to 0, that is 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 or 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0. Take a look at Figure 3.1. For example, a teacher can give out number cards of 0 to 5 to six pupils and ask them to come out to the front and hold up their cards. Get the pupils to arrange themselves in ascending order and ask who should come first if the numbers are to be counted backwards from 5 to 0.
  • 52.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 52 Figure 3.1: Count on and count back using number cards Ask pupils to count backwards from 5 to 0. Repeat with counting backwards, starting with any other number less than 5, for example starting from 4 or 3, etc. Next, ask pupils to try doing the same thing without using number cards. Then, guide the pupils to compare the difference between counting onwards and counting backwards. At this stage, do not introduce the words subtract or minus yet. Just use common words such as Âone lessÊ and ÂbeforeÊ as shown below: „In the sequence of numbers between 0 to 5, what is the number before 5?, before 4?‰ and so on. „4 is one less than 5‰, „3 is one less than 4‰, „2 is one less than 3‰, etc. Let them try to count backwards from 10 to 0, 9 to 0 and so on. At this stage, pupils should also be able to arrange the numbers in descending order from 10 to 0. Subtraction can also be done by counting back using a ruler as a number line. Here is an example of how to count back using a ruler in order to solve the subtraction problem given: Sally has 7 sweets. She wants to give 3 to her friend. How many can she keep for herself (see Figure 3.2)? Answer: The result is 4. So Sally can keep 4 sweets for herself.
  • 53.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 53 Figure 3.2: Counting back using a ruler Suggest a teaching and learning activity to demonstrate subtraction as the process of counting back using a calendar. 3.1.2 Subtraction as Taking Away Subtraction facts are the numbers we get when we take one or more objects from a group of objects, or the answer we get when we take one number from another. First, let us look at the following steps for finding the six basic subtraction facts illustrated in Figure 3.3 (a), (b) and (c). For example, we start off with a group of six oranges. (a) Put the oranges in a row, to make it easier to see what we are doing (see Figure 3.3 (a). Figure 3.3 (a): One group of six oranges (b) Separate them into two groups, see Figure 3.3 (b): (Separating, in actual fact, is a way of subtracting). Figure 3.3 (b): Two groups of oranges ACTIVITY 3.1
  • 54.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 54 The numbers in the boxes tell us how many members are in each group. We can describe the ÂsubtractionÊ process using common words like below: Six take away one leaves five, or Taking one from six leaves five. (c) Repeat by working with groups of two and four oranges, as illustrated in Figure 3.3 (c): Figure 3.3 (c): Another two groups of oranges Six take away two leaves four, or Taking two from six leaves four. (d) Repeat with other possible combinations of two groups of oranges, i.e. three and three, four and two, as well as five and one in that order. At this stage, you may also introduce subtracting terms, such as, minus, in order to teach pupils to read and write the subtraction equations or mathematical sentences given below: Six take away one leaves five. Six minus one equals five. 6 – 1 = 5 Six take away two leaves four. Six minus two equals four. 6 2 = 4 3.1.3 Subtraction as the Difference Sometimes you need to count on to find the difference between two numbers. For example, if you have to answer 10 questions as practice but you have just finished six only, you can find the number of remaining questions to be answered in this way: „I have finished six questions. To find out how many more questions I need to answer in order to finish all the 10 questions, I can count on in ones starting from 7‰. „7 + 1 = 8, 8 + 1 = 9, and 9 + 1 = 10‰, meaning 7 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 10
  • 55.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 55 By using a ruler as a number line, you can find that the difference between 10 and 6 is 4 by counting on in ones as illustrated in Figure 3.4: Figure 3.4: Number line The difference is thus 4 questions. This means that you need to do 4 more questions to finish off. It is now obvious that by counting on from seven to 10, six plus four gives 10. Pupils can be guided to state that the difference between 10 and six is four, i.e. Â6 + 4 = 10Ê is the same as Â10 6 = 4Ê. This may be the case with your pupils because they were probably right to think that counting on was much easier than subtracting. However, this was only because the numbers were small. A real-life example is counting change. For example if we gave RM1 (or ten 10 sen) to the cashier at the shop counter, and the price of the things that you bought was only 60 sen, usually, the cashier will give you back 40 sen as your change by counting on in 10 sen. The cashier will normally say: „70 sen, 80 sen, 90 sen, RM 1. Here is the change, 40 sen.‰ What do you think of this way of doing subtraction? Is this a correct way to do subtraction? Do you have other ideas? 3.1.4 Pairs of Subtraction Facts We usually get two subtraction facts from each addition fact. Pupils have learnt that adding two numbers together in any order gives the same result. However, you have to encourage them to find out the results when they do subtraction. Here is a way in which they can discover related subtraction facts. Pupils are asked to work in groups. (a) Give out seven rings to each group. Ask them to arrange the rings in a row and separate them into two groups, i.e. a group of 3 rings and a group of 4 rings respectively, as illustrated below:
  • 56.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 56 Let them read and write the addition fact depicted in the diagram above: 3 + 4 = 7 (b) Using the above addition fact, guide them to work out the subtraction facts below: (i) First subtraction fact: 7 3 = 4 (ii) Second subtraction fact: 7 4 = 3 Note: The order of the numbers to be subtracted is important! ACTIVITY 3.2 Try listing out other fact families such as for the addition fact, 3 + 5 = 8. 3.1.5 Subtraction Using Models Another way to do subtraction is to use any type of counters or teaching materials as models to set up the problem.
  • 57.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 57 Here are some examples: (a) Subtract 3 from 8 using Counters (i) Set up 8 counters as 8 units like below. (ii) Subtract 3 units by crossing out three counters as shown. (iii) Then, count the units that are left. The answer is 5 units. Ask pupils to write down the subtraction equation as follows: 8 3 = 5 (iv) You are also encouraged to use another model such as illustrated below: Say: 8 take away 3 leaves 5 (b) Subtract 2 from 7 using Counting Board and Counters (i) Story problem: There are seven apples on a tree. Two of them fall down to the ground. How many apples are left on the tree? (See Figure 3.5)
  • 58.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 58 Figure 3.5: Story problem that can be used in teaching subtraction (ii) First, ask them to stick on seven green counters on the tree. Then colour two of them in red and pull them down from the tree. Put them on the ground. (You may like to make your counters from either soft paper or manila card. Explain your choice.) (iii) Write down the subtraction equation and find the answer: 7 2 = 5 Say: Taking away two from seven leaves five. Answer: There are five mangosteens left on the tree. (c) Subtract 4 from 9 using an Abacus and Counting Chips Figure 3.6: Sample subtraction of 4 from 9
  • 59.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 59 (i) Ask pupils to put on 9 counting chips in the first column of the abacus. Then pull out 4 chips (either one by one or all at once), refer to Figure 3.6. (ii) Ask pupils to count and say how many chips are left. (iii) Guide your pupils to write and read the subtraction equation as follows: Taking four from nine leaves five 9 4 = 5 (iv) Repeat the activity with different numbers of chips. 3.1.6 Number Sentences for Subtraction We can write subtraction equations in rows or columns. Most of the examples in this topic thus far have focused on writing equation in rows. Subtraction in a column requires us to put the number we are subtracting from at the top and the number we are going to subtract at the bottom. Make sure the numbers are lined up exactly below each other in the column. Take a look at the following example in Figure 3.7: Figure 3.7: Number sentences for subtraction ACTIVITY 3.3 What happens to the signs: Â-Ê and Â=Ê when you write down the ÂrowÊ equation into a ÂcolumnÊ equation? Explain the process that occurs.
  • 60.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 60 SAMPLES OF TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES Some samples of teaching-learning activities that you can implement to help guide young children to understand and build the concept of subtraction in order to acquire the skill are included in this section. Activity 1: Working Out ÂOne Less ThanÊ Learning Outcomes: By the end of this activity, your pupils should be able to: (a) Use Âone less thanÊ to compare two numbers within 10; and (b) Count back in ones from 10 to 0. Materials: 10 balloons; 11 number cards (0 10); String; and Worksheet 1. Procedure: (a) Get 10 balloons and hang them in a row or horizontal line. Initially, stack the 11 number cards, numbered 0 - 10 in sequence, with the card numbered 10 at the top followed by the card numbered 9 below and so on, with the card numbered 0 at the bottom of the pile. Hook the stack of number cards on the extreme right as shown in Figure 3.8. Figure 3.8: Ten balloons in a row (i) Get one pupil to count the balloons and say the number out loud. (ii) Ask another pupil to pick and burst any one of the balloons, count the remaining balloons and say „9‰. Then, take out the card numbered 10 to show the card numbered 9 underneath. 3.2
  • 61.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 61 (iii) Teacher asks the pupils: „How many balloons are left?‰ (9) „Are there more or less balloons now compared to before?‰ (less) „How many less?‰ (1 less) (iv) Teacher explains that 9 is Âone less thanÊ 10. (v) Continue doing the activity until the last balloon is pricked. (b) Ask pupils to count back in ones, starting with any number up to 10 e.g. You can start with number 8 or 7 and so on. (c) Get the 11 number cards and ask pupils to arrange the cards in sequence again. Practise using the phrase Âone less thanÊ to compare two numbers within 10 e.g. Start from number 10 and say. Â9 is one less than 10Ê, 8 is one less than 9, etc. (d) Teacher distributes Worksheet 1 (refer to Appendix). Activity 2: Subtracting Sums by Finding the Difference Learning Outcomes: By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Use Âless thanÊ and Âmore thanÊ to compare two numbers; and (b) Find the difference of two numbers. Materials: Table (worksheet); Balls; PowerPoint slides; and Plain paper. Procedure: (a) Start with a story problem (PowerPoint slides). 1st Slide: Salleh has 5 balls, while Salmah has 3 balls. Who has more balls? What is the difference?
  • 62.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 62 2nd Slide: Show the following illustration, see Figure 3.9 (a). Figure 3.9 (a): Finding the difference Teacher asks: „Who has more balls?‰ „How many are there?‰ „Which one is more, 3 or 5?‰ „Which one is less, 3 or 5?‰ (At this stage, the teacher just wants to introduce the concept of Âone-to-one matchingÊ and it is not necessary for pupils to answer the questions yet if they are unable to do so). (b) Teacher asks them to show how they arrived at the answer using the materials given. (i) Step 1: Distribute some counters and a piece of plain paper to each group. (ii) Step 2: Guide them to work out the Âone-to-one matchingÊ correspondence using the materials given as shown in Figure 3.9 (b).
  • 63.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 63 Figure 3.9 (b): One-to-one matching correspondence (iii) Step 3: „How many balls have no match?‰ Teacher now introduces the concept of difference and relates this to the words, more and less. e.g. 5 is more than 3. 3 is less than 5. The difference between 5 and 3 is 2. (iv) Step 4: Teacher guides pupils to compare two numbers by using the words more and less before finding the difference using Table 3.1 given. e.g. Compare the numbers 4 and 6. Which is more? Which is less? What is the difference? Teacher then asks pupils to write the numbers in the correct space in the table before finding the difference. For example, write 6 in the ÂmoreÊ column, 4 in the ÂlessÊ column and 2 as the difference in the space provided (see Table 3.1).
  • 64.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 64 Table 3.1: Sample of a Table that can be Used for Recording the Difference between Two Numbers (v) Step 5: Teacher gets pupils to do the same for the other numbers in Table 3.1 above and asks them to record the answers in the table given. (c) Group activity: Give a set of number cards numbering 1 to 10 to each group. Ask them to play the game as follows: (i) Step 1: Teacher gives the instructions on how to play the game. (ii) Step 2: Teacher says: „Listen, choose two numbers with a difference of 1. Whoever gets the correct answer first is the winner. Check your answers together.‰ (iii) Step 3: Repeat the game using other numbers with differences of 2, 3, etc.
  • 65.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 65 (iv) Step 4: Teacher asks them to find out all possible pairs of numbers in their groups using the number cards and record the results in Table 3.2. Table 3.2: Subtraction Pairs Difference List Down All Possible Pairs 1 e.g. 10 - 9 2 10 - 8 9 - 7 3 10 - 7 9 - 6 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (v) Step 5: Check all the answers together. (d) Closure: (You may teach subtraction involving zero in the next lesson!). Teacher: „What is the answer of 5 0? 4 4? 7 0?‰ ACTIVITY 3.4 Suggest two suitable teaching and learning activities for this statement: „Subtracting zero from a number does not change the value of the number‰. Activity 3: Subtracting by Taking Away Learning Outcomes: By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Subtract by taking away; and (b) Use subtraction to solve word problems.
  • 66.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 66 Materials: Counting boards; Counters; and Plasticine. Procedure: (i) Initially, use fingers to practise taking away as a method for working out the subtraction process, see Figure 3.10. e.g.: Figure 3.10: Subtracting with fingers (ii) Teacher shows a story problem on a question card. Aida has 8 apples. She gives 3 of them to Sharifah. How many apples are left? Get two pupils to come in front and act out the story. They will act as Aida and Sharifah, respectively. The others are asked to solve the problem by observing the action shown. (iii) Teacher shows the subtraction process using a counting board and some counters, see Figure 3.11.
  • 67.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 67 Figure 3.11: Subtraction using a counting board and counters (iv) Teacher shows another story problem with a different context. There are 6 players on the field. 2 of them take a rest. How many players are left on the field? Ask pupils to act out the story using a counting board and some plasticine or encourage them to role play in the class, see Figure 3.12. Figure 3.12: Sample subtraction of 4 from 9 (v) Teacher asks them to solve the story problem in groups. „Write the subtraction equations on the card given. Present your answers in front of the class‰. (vi) Do a quick mental-recall of the activity in the class. This will help pupils to work fast and accurately. e.g. 8 take away 4? 10 take away 5? Take away 4? Take away 6? What take away 5 leaves 3? Leaves 2? Leaves 5? (vii) Distribute Worksheet 2 (refer to Appendix). Can you think of another suitable activity like the above?
  • 68.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 68 Activity 4: Predicting the Missing Part Learning Outcomes: By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Predict the missing part in a subtraction problem; and (b) Relate the subtraction problem to the addition process. Materials: Connecting cubes; Number lines; Beads; and Cups. Procedure: (a) Teacher puts several connecting cubes (or counters) on a number line. e.g. 8 connecting cubes. (b) Teacher then keeps any 3 of the cubes behind her/him, while the pupils predict how many cubes are hidden. (c) Teacher guides the pupils to get the answer as follows: (i) How many connecting cubes are there at first? (8) (ii) How many connecting cubes are there left now? (5) (iii) How many connecting cubes are hidden? Let pupils brainstorm to get some suggestions from them.
  • 69.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 69 (d) Teacher shows a way to solve the problem as shown below: (i) „We have 5 cubes left. How many more cubes do we need to make 8 cubes?‰ (ii) Teacher adds 3 red cubes one by one on the number line and asks pupils to count on in-ones from 5 to 8. „Start at 5, then 6, 7 and 8‰. (iii) „We have added 3 red cubes which represents the number of cubes hidden‰. „We thus write the subtraction equation as 8 3 = 5‰. (iv) „We can also write down the addition equation as 5 + ? = 8, to find the number of cubes hidden‰. (e) Ask them to work out the game in groups. You are encouraged to let them work out another game, e.g. Âbeads and cupÊ. (i) First, count the number of beads given to pupils. (ii) Put some of the beads into the cup. Take out 3 beads and ask pupils to predict the number of beads (hidden) under the cup. (f) Let pupils do other examples to reinforce the skill learnt. ACTIVITY 3.5 Create another game as an enrichment activity for the subtraction process.
  • 70.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 70 You need to pay attention when teaching the meanings of subtraction because conceptual understanding of this operation will help students learn the topic more efficiently. The concrete materials used can help pupils master the subtraction algorithms better. The samples of teaching and learning activities for subtraction provided in this topic are to motivate you to collect a set of good teaching-learning activities for subtraction. The more activities you know of, the more creative and innovative you will be when planning your mathematics lessons. Counting back Difference Fact family Subtraction Subtraction fact Taking away 1. Define the term ÂfactÊ. 2. Subtraction can be defined as Âtake awayÊ. Explain this meaning of subtraction with the help of a suitable teaching and learning activity using concrete materials. 3. Addition is the reverse of the subtraction process. Explain addition as the reverse of the Âtake awayÊ process with the help of a suitable teaching and learning activity using concrete materials.
  • 71.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 71 Explain the statements below with the help of a suitable teaching and learning activity using concrete materials: (a) ÂThe differenceÊ. (b) The order of the numbers in a subtraction problem is important. (c) You can subtract only one number at a time, but you can add more than one number at one go. APPENDICES WORKSHEET 1 Answer all questions. 1. Write the number which is one less than the one given in the space provided. 2. Colour the number which is less. 3.
  • 72.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 72 4. Fill in the blanks starting with the biggest number for each row of numbers. WORKSHEET 2 Answer all questions. 1. 6 take away 4 leaves 8 take away 4 leaves 7 take away 5 leaves 9 take away 3 leaves 2. Complete the subtraction sentences below: 3. Circle the objects which have to be taken away. Write down the subtraction sentences.
  • 73.
    TOPIC 3 SUBTRACTIONWITHIN 10 73 4. 4 3 = ________ 7 1 = ________ 6 3 = ________ 9 7 = ________ 10 3 = _______ 10 2 = _______ 5. Colour two pairs of numbers that give the same answer. 6. Circle the correct answers. (a) (g) (b) (h) (c) (i) (d) (i) (e) (k) (f) (l)
  • 74.
    Topic 4 Numbers to 100 and Place Value LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Explain how to say, count, read and write numbers to 100; 2. Demonstrate how to count in tens and ones; 3. Describe how to arrange numbers to 100 count on and count back; and 4. Explain the concept of place value of numbers to 100. INTRODUCTION You need to recall what was discussed in Topic 1 in order to understand this topic better. After mastering numbers 1 to 10, children should now learn how to say numbers up to 100 progressively. For example, you have to teach them to understand, count and write numbers from 10 to 20 before getting them to count in tens and ones until 100. To ensure that your pupils know how to say numbers to 100 either in words or in symbols correctly, it is essential to stress on the correct pronunciation of the names of numbers up to 100. The next step is to teach pupils to read and write numbers to 100 in words as well as in symbols neatly and correctly. Then, let pupils arrange numbers to 100 in sequence either by counting on (in ascending order), or counting back (in descending order), using various methods. Last but not least, teach pupils to recognise place value, first discussed in Topic 2. The place-value concept of tens and ones is introduced for counting numbers up to 100, especially when larger numbers are involved. Pupils can do regrouping with numbers from 10 onwards e.g. ten ones is the same as one tens and zero ones; eleven ones can be regrouped as one tens and one ones, and so on and so forth. In conclusion, the most important thing to remember when teaching kindergarten and elementary Mathematics is to make the teaching
  • 75.
    TOPIC 4 NUMBERSTO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 75 and learning process as interesting and as fun as possible. The samples given in the following section will help you to teach Mathematics more effectively and meaningfully to the young ones. SAY AND COUNT NUMBERS TO 100 4.1 This section will further discuss how to say and count numbers to 100. 4.1.1 Say Numbers to 100 In general, parents or guardians normally feel so proud or are thrilled when they hear their children say numbers written in words or symbols flawlessly for the first time. With this in mind, it is thus the responsibility of parents or guardians and teachers especially, to guide them to pronounce the names of numbers up to 100 correctly. There are a lot of ways to encourage pupils to practise saying the numbers. One effective way is by using picture-number cards that have numbers in words and/or symbols on them, or number charts. For example, you can easily use number charts in the form of 10 X 10 grids made from manila cards (or other suitable material) like the one in Table 4.1: Table 4.1: Number Chart (Numbers 1 to 100) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 Using the 10 X 10 grid shown above, cover some numbers and let the pupils say the numbers occupying the covered spots. Alternatively, you may also jumble up the sequence of the numbers by putting the numbers at the wrong places and
  • 76.
    TOPIC 4 NUMBERSTO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 76 then ask the pupils to rearrange them in order before getting them to say the numbers. Some sample teaching-learning activities to reinforce the skill of counting numbers up to 100 are discussed here. Activity 1: Say the Number Names Learning Outcome: By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: (a) Pronounce the names of numbers up to 100 correctly. Materials: 10 pieces of manila cards (size 15 cm by 20cm) per group; Colour pencils; and Books or magazines with page numbers. Procedure: In general, there are five steps, which are: (i) Divide pupils into two groups. Ask them to make five picture number cards with numbers written in symbols by drawing some pictures/objects for different numerals (numbers up to 100) allocated to each group and another five drawings for cards with numbers written in words. Ask them to give the finished products to you to be checked for accuracy before giving them back the respective cards. (ii) Once they are ready, you can start the activity of „Saying number names‰. Tell them to make sure that all the drawings can only be revealed one by one by their own group members. The first group (Group 1) will show one of their picture numeral cards, for example, the card with the numeral „99‰ written on it. The other group (Group 2) will have to say the number Âninety-nineÊ out loudly and clearly. Award two points if the second group can say it correctly. (iii) Next, the second group takes turns to show a picture number card with the number written in words e.g. Âsixty-fourÊ and ask the other group to say the number on the card loudly and clearly. Award two points to Group 1 if they can say the number name correctly. Continue doing this until all the drawings have been shown.
  • 77.
    TOPIC 4 NUMBERSTO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 77 (iv) Another way to let your pupils practise saying numbers to 100 is by showing them the page numbers from various kinds of books or magazines. Just randomly flip through one page at a time and then ask the pupils to say what number is on the next page. This activity can be carried out in pairs or groups. (v) Finally, distribute Worksheet 1 to your pupils to reinforce the skill of saying numbers to 100. 4.1.2 Count Numbers to 100 It is natural for pupils to use their fingers when they first start counting and if that is not enough, some will even continue to count using their toes which can be rather awkward. However, when counting larger numbers such as numbers more than 20, other more suitable manipulatives (e.g. counters) are required. The fun way to teach pupils to count is by using counting objects such as beads, beans, nuts, marbles, etc. Fill up a jar with beads, beans, nuts or marbles and pour them out onto a mat or table cloth. Then, ask the pupils to count them in different ways other than in ones. For example, get the pupils to group the beads into groups of ÂfivesÊ or ÂtensÊ. Counting in tens means adding ten to the previous number in the sequence each time, for instance, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 and 100. Finally, help the pupils make some conclusions. When counting on in tens, the numbers create a pattern. All the numbers end with zero and the first digits are the same as when you count from 1 to 9, that is, (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, etc.). Once the pupils have discovered the patterns in the number system, the task of writing numerals of two digits and beyond is simplified enormously. They will encounter the same sequence of numerals, 0 to 9 over and over again. However, at this stage, many pupils do not know yet that numbers are constructed by organising quantities into groups of tens and ones, and that the digits in numerals change value depending on their positions in a number, thereby giving rise to the concept of place value in our number system. Activity 2: Count Numbers to 100 Learning Outcome: By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: (a) Count numbers to 100.
  • 78.
    TOPIC 4 NUMBERSTO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 78 Materials: Picture cards of bicycles, aeroplanes, flowers, motorcycles, etc.; Manila cards with pictures; Colour pencils; and Objects (Beads or beans or nuts or marbles, etc.). Procedure: In general, there are three steps, which are: (i) Show pupils the pictures of bicycles, aeroplanes, flowers, motorcycles, etc. Ask them to count the number of objects on the cards. (ii) Ask them to colour the pictures on the manila cards and then count how many objects there are on each card. (iii) Distribute Worksheet 2 to the pupils. READ AND WRITE NUMBERS TO 100 This section will guide you through some relevant activities on reading and writing numbers to 100. It is useful to revise the correct techniques of writing 0 to 9 taught in Topic 1 earlier. 4.2.1 Read and Write Numbers to 100 First of all, you need to revise or teach the pupils the correct way of writing the numbers as shown in Figure 4.1. Figure 4.1: Correct way for writing numbers 4.2
  • 79.
    TOPIC 4 NUMBERSTO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 79 Write down the numbers randomly on a piece of manila card or on a sheet of paper. Ask the pupils to read the numerals. Next, do the reverse, that is, get them to write down the numbers, in words, randomly on the manila card or on the sheet of paper. Then, ask the pupils to read the numbers in word form. Activity 3: Read and Write Numbers to 100 Learning Outcome: By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: (a) Read and write numbers to 100 correctly. Materials: Manila card or a sheet of paper; and Pencils. Procedure: (i) Ask the pupils to fill in the empty boxes in Table 4.2: Table 4.2: Drawing and Writing numbers Read Draw and Write the Numerals Write the Numbers in Words 20 55 Fifty-five 67 77 Seventy-seven 18 29 98 Ninety-eight (ii) Distribute Worksheet 3 to your pupils.
  • 80.
    TOPIC 4 NUMBERSTO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 80 ARRANGE NUMBERS TO 100 IN ORDER (ASCENDING OR DESCENDING ORDER) 4.3 This section will focus on „arranging the numbers to 100‰ in ascending or descending order. 4.3.1 Arrange Numbers to 100 in Order In general, there are two ways in arranging numbers to 100 in order, which are: (a) Arrange Numbers to 100 in Ascending Order (Count On) ÂCount onÊ order means arranging the numbers in ascending order. You can start at any number as long as the sequence of the numbers is in order. The same thing goes with the gap or the difference in value between the numbers. You can have any value for the difference as long as it is the same throughout the whole number sequence. (b) Arrange Numbers to 100 in Descending Order (Count Back) ÂCount backÊ order means arranging the numbers in descending order. You can again start at any number as long as the sequence of the numbers is in order. The same thing goes with the gap or the difference in value between the numbers. You can have any value for the differences as long as it is the same throughout the whole number sequence. Activity 4: Count On and Count Back in Ones using a Number Ladder or Number Chart Up to 100 (Snakes and Ladders Game) Learning Outcome: By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: (a) Count on and count back in ones to 100. Materials: Dice; Markers; and Number ladder game (Snakes and Ladders Game).
  • 81.
    TOPIC 4 NUMBERSTO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 81 Procedure: In general, there are five steps, which are: (i) Several pupils can participate in this game at the same time. Each of them will be given a marker. Players take turns to roll the dice. (ii) After taking turns to throw the dice, the players have to move their markers according to the number rolled. For example, if the first player rolls a 5, he will have to move his marker along five squares until it reaches the fifth square. If it happens that at the fifth square there is a ladder pointing to square number 23, then the player will have to climb up the ladder to end on the square number 23. (iii) On the other hand, if the marker lands on a square with a snake slithering down, the player will have to follow suit and slide down the snake to wherever it should be. e.g. If the marker reaches, say, square number 46 showing a snake slithering down to square number 14, the player must follow the snake and place his/her marker on square number 14. (iv) The winner is the first player to reach the number 100. (v) Distribute Worksheet 4 to your pupils. PLACE VALUE OF NUMBERS TO 100 4.4 When objects are placed in order, we use ordinal numbers to tell their position. Ordinal numbers are similar to the numbers that you have learned before. The pupils need to understand the ordinality of numbers to enable them to position items in a set. If 10 pupils ran a race, we would say that the pupil who ran the fastest was in first place, the next pupil was in second place, and so on until the last runner. Here, we are actually arranging the winners in order. In short, the first 10 ordinal numbers are listed as: first, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth and tenth. 4.4.1 Place Value of Numbers to 100 Place value is used within number systems to allow a digit to carry a different value based on its position, that is, the place it occupies has a value. The concept of place value is very important when applied to basic mathematical operations. The skill of regrouping numbers in tens and ones is very important to help develop the concept of place value at the early stage for numbers to 100.
  • 82.
    TOPIC 4 NUMBERSTO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 82 In our present number system, place value works in the same way for all whole numbers no matter how big the number is. Numbers, such as Â84Ê, have two digits. Each digit is at a different place value. For instance, the left digit, Â8Ê is at the tens place. It tells you that there are 8 tens in this number. The last digit on the right is in the ones place, that is, 4 ones in this example. Therefore, there are 8 tens plus 4 ones in the number 84, as illustrated below: Activity 5: Ordinal Numbers and Place Value of Tens and Ones Learning Outcomes: By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Label pupils in a row from left to right using ordinal numbers such as, first, second, third, etc; and (b) Identify the place value of tens and ones for two-digit numbers up to 100. Materials: Word cards (Ordinal numbers: first, second, ... tenth); Ten pupils; Number cards (two-digit numbers up to 100); and Place value chart/mat. Procedure: The four steps in this procedure are: (i) Ask 10 pupils to line up from left to right in front of the class. Then ask another pupil to determine which pupil is in third position from the left side? Label the pupilÊs position using the correct ordinal card. Do the same with other positions, e.g. the sixth from pupilsÊ left, etc. (ii) Repeat the activity by asking pupils to label various positions of the pupils from the right side using the appropriate ordinal number cards.
  • 83.
    TOPIC 4 NUMBERSTO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 83 (iii) Show pupils how to identify the place value for each digit in a two-digit number. Ask pupils to fill in the place value for numbers up to 100 given in the place-value chart or place value mat below: Place Value Number Tens Ones 98 9 8 29 2 9 64 ? ? 75 13 60 (iv) Distribute Worksheet 5. Familiarise yourself with numerals and numbers in words by saying them loud and clear. Know how to read and write numbers in words and in symbols spontaneously. Know how to arrange the numbers to 100 in ascending or descending order. The skill of regrouping by tens and ones is an important process to understand the concept of counting and place value. Ascending Count back Count on Descending Ordinal Numbers
  • 84.
    TOPIC 4 NUMBERSTO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 84 What other concrete objects can you use as base-10 materials in teaching the concept of place value? How would you use the materials to show ones, tens and hundreds? Consider the following scenario: LetÊs say one of your pupils knows how to count using concrete materials and can clearly count out loud e.g.„one, two and three, etc.‰. When you ask her: „How many objects are there?‰, she immediately starts to count them all over again. Discuss based on the above scenario. What do you know about her understanding of counting? What do you think is the next step in her learning? How might you enable her to achieve this? APPENDICES WORKSHEET 1 1. (a) Say the numbers given on the door of each house. 44 34 66 70 98 22 10 33 50 79
  • 85.
    TOPIC 4 NUMBERSTO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 85 (b) Say the numbers written on the manila cards. Fifty-eight Ninety-six Sixty-one Eighty-two One hundred Twenty-seven WORKSHEET 2 Answer all questions. 1. Count the heart-shaped beads. Write the numerals in the boxes provided. (a) (b)
  • 86.
    TOPIC 4 NUMBERSTO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 86 (c) (d) 2. Fill in the boxes with the correct numbers. (a) (b)
  • 87.
    TOPIC 4 NUMBERSTO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 87 (c) (d) (e) (f)
  • 88.
    TOPIC 4 NUMBERSTO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 88 WORKSHEET 3 1. Write the missing numerals or words. (a) thirty-four = (k) = (b) sixty-nine = (l) = (c) thirteen = (m) = (d) forty = (n) = (e) ninetythree = (o) = (f) thirtyeight = (p) = (g) forty-four = (q) = (h) thirty-seven = (r) = (i) thirty = (s) = (j) sixteen = (t) = 99 87 77 70 61 35 11 79 80 36
  • 89.
    TOPIC 4 NUMBERSTO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 89 WORKSHEET 4 1. Fill in the missing numbers in the boxes/spaces below. (Count on/count back). Number Patterns (a) (i) (ii) (b) (i) 21, 31, 41, __, __, 71, __, __ (ii) 80, 70, 60, 50, __, __, 20, __ (c) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (d) Now try to write your own number patterns. (i) __, __, __, __, __, __, __, __, __, __, (ii) __, __, __, __, __, __, __, __, __, __ (e) (i) Between 51, _____, 53 (ii) Just after 1, 2, _____ (iii) Just before _____, 5, 6
  • 90.
    TOPIC 4 NUMBERSTO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 90 (iv) Just before and after _____, 74, _____ (v) In the middle of 98, _____, 96 (f) Order each group of numbers from smallest to largest. (i) 37, 11, 90 _____, _____, _____ (ii) 26, 12, 82 _____, _____, _____ (iii) 83, 59, 95 _____, _____, _____ (iv) 97, 0, 15 _____, _____, _____ (g) Order each group of numbers from largest to smallest. (i) 74, 42, 47 _____, _____, _____ (ii) 39, 74, 91 _____, _____, _____ (iii) 28, 82, 49 _____, _____, _____ (iv) 27, 1, 80 _____, _____, _____ WORKSHEET 5 (a) What is the position of the yellow car from the right? (b) What is the position of the yellow car from the left? (c) What is the position of the red car from the right? (d) What is the position of the red car from the left? (e) Which car is in the first position from the left? (f) Which car is in the last position from the left? (g) Which cars are in the first three positions from the right? (h) Which cars are in the last two positions from the right? (i) Which car is in the middle? (j) What is the position of the purple car from the left?
  • 91.
    TOPIC 4 NUMBERSTO 100 AND PLACE VALUE 91 (k) What is the position of the purple car from the right? (l) Which car is in the fifth position from the right? (m) Which car is in the second position from the right?
  • 92.
    Topic 5 Addition within 18 LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Describe how to add one more, two more and beyond to a number for addition within 18; 2. Explain how to add numbers by combining two groups of objects for addition within 18; 3. Explain how to add numbers by counting on for addition within 18; and 4. Demonstrate how to write number bonds for addition within 18. INTRODUCTION Previously, in Topic 2, addition within 10 was introduced whereby pupils learned the concept of Âone moreÊ either by counting all or counting on. Number bonds up to 10 were also highlighted. Here, the discussion is further extended to include addition within 18 and covers number bonds up to 18. A sound knowledge of number bonds, or basic facts of addition, is a must to enable pupils to apply them when adding bigger numbers to go beyond totals of 18. The process of addition is usually taught with the help of suitable teaching aids and concrete manipulatives such as counters, number lines, picture cards, etc. As in other chapters, some samples of teaching and learning activities for addition within 18 are provided to show how pupils can be helped to acquire this basic concept effectively.
  • 93.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 93 ADDING ‘ONE MORE’ TO A NUMBER In this section, we will discuss further the concept of adding 'one more' to a number. 5.1.1 The Concept of ‘One More’ In order to approach the concept of addition as Âone moreÊ than a number, a variety of methods can be used. For instance, if you want the pupils to learn what is one more than 16, you can try the ones suggested below. (a) Use suitable counters such as beads, beans, nuts or marbles, etc. to add one more to a number. Ask pupils to first count how many beads are in a jar and then ask them how many beads will there be if one more bead is added. For example, if there are 16 beads in the jar initially, how many beads will there be if one more bead is added? Encourage them to first say ÂOne more than 16 is 17Ê or Â17 is one more than 16Ê and then show them how to write the mathematical sentence for the addition operation as in Figure 5.1: Figure 5.1: Adding one more to a number using counters (b) Next, you can also use a number line. Addition on a number line corresponds to moving to the right along the markings on a number line. The number line below is marked with ticks at equal distance intervals of 1 unit. To add one more to 16, first move 16 units from 0 and then move 1 more unit to finally end up at 17. The sum of 16 + 1 which is equal to 17 is shown in Figure 5.2. The addition operation that corresponds to the situation acted out on the number line is represented as 16 + 1 = 17. Figure 5.2: Adding one more to a number using a number line 5.1
  • 94.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 94 (c) Another way is to use number cards, see Figure 5.3. For example, first show the number card 16 to the pupils. Then, ask the pupils what number card is supposed to come out next if you add one more to the number 16. Get them to write the mathematical sentence for this operation, that is, 16 add one equals 17. Figure 5.3: Adding one more to a number using number card (d) The concept of addition can be modelled using other concrete and manipulative materials. Addition can be done by counting on or by counting all as shown in Figure 5.4. (i) Finding one more than a number. e.g. 1 more than 10 is ___. (Ask pupils to get the answer by counting on). (ii) Finding the total by counting all the objects. e.g. ____ is 1 more than 13. (Ask pupils to get the answer by counting all the objects). Figure 5.4: Adding one more to a number using concrete materials Activity 1: Adding One More to a Number Learning Outcomes: By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: (a) Add one more to numbers up to 18; and (b) Write the mathematical sentence for addition within 18.
  • 95.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 95 Materials: Counters e.g. beads, beans, nuts, marbles, etc.; Numeral cards (e.g. 1, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 16, 17, 18); and Symbol cards (+, = ). Procedure: In general, there are five steps, which are: (i) Fill a plate with 11 marbles. Then ask the pupils what is the total number of marbles if you add one more marble to the plate. Guide pupils to say ÂtwelveÊ. (ii) Ask one of the pupils to represent the operation with a mathematical sentence using the respective numeral cards and symbol cards e.g. 11 + 1 = 12. (iii) Get the pupils to write the mathematical sentence for the addition performed. (iv) Repeat the above steps using other quantities of numbers up to 17 in order to get a highest total of 18 e.g. 12 + 1 = 13, 17 + 1 = 18, etc. (v) Distribute Worksheet 1 to your pupils. ADDING TWO OR MORE TO A NUMBER 5.2 The above activities described in Section 5.1 can be repeated to develop the addition of two or more to a number. Let us now take a look at the addition of two or more to numbers up to a highest total of 18. 5.2.1 Adding More than One to Numbers up to a Highest Total of 18 In order to approach the addition of more than one (e.g. 2, 3 etc.) to a number, you can use the following suggested methods. (a) Use beads, beans, nuts, marbles, etc. to add two more to a number. Ask the pupils to count how many beads are in the jar and then ask them how many beads will there be if you add two more beads.
  • 96.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 96 For example, if there are 16 beads in the jar, how many beads will there be altogether if you add two more? Encourage the pupils to say Âtwo more than 16 is 18Ê or Â18 is two more than 16Ê and then ask them to write the mathematical sentence for the addition operation (see Figure 5.5): Figure 5.5: Adding two more to a number using counters (b) You can also use a number line. As mentioned earlier, addition corresponds to moving to the right along the markings on a number line. First, move 16 units from 0 and then move 2 more units to finally arrive at 18. The sum of adding two more to 16 is shown in Figure 5.6. The addition sentence that corresponds to the situation is 16 + 2 = 18. Figure 5.6: Adding two more to a number using a number line (c) You can also use number cards, see Figure 5.7. For example, show the number card 16 to the pupils and then ask the pupils what number card is supposed to come out next if you add two more to the number. Ask pupils to write the mathematical sentence for the operation performed. Figure 5.7: Adding two more to a number using number cards
  • 97.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 97 (d) Use the counting on and counting all techniques to add two more to a number, see Figure 5.8. Model the concept of addition using other concrete and manipulative materials as before. (i) Finding two more than a number by counting on. (ii) Finding totals by counting all the objects. ____ is 2 more than 13. Figure 5.8: Adding two more to a number using concrete materials Activity 2: Adding More than One to a Number Learning Outcomes: By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: (a) Add more than one (e.g. 2 or more) to a number with a highest total of 18; and (b) Write the corresponding mathematical sentences for addition within 18. Materials: Counting objects (e.g. beads, beans, nuts, marbles, etc.) Procedure: In general, there are three steps, which are: (i) Fill a plate with 11 marbles. Then ask the pupils what is the total number of marbles if three more marbles are added to the plate. (ii) Get pupils to write the corresponding mathematical sentence for the above operation e.g. 11 + 3 = 14. (iii) Repeat the above steps using different quantities to be added to get a highest total of 18.
  • 98.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 98 5.2.2 Adding by Combining Two Groups of Objects Apart from the above approaches to addition described in the previous sections, the meaning of addition can also be developed simply as the process of combining two groups or sets of objects as follows. (a) Combining two groups or sets of objects; see Figure 5.9. Figure 5.9: Adding by combining two sets of objects (b) Combining two numbers using a number line; see Figure 5.10. Figure 5.10: Adding by combining two numbers on a number line Activity 3: Addition of Two Numbers Learning Outcome: By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: (a) Add two numbers by combining two sets of objects. Materials: Counting objects e.g. beads, beans, nuts, marbles, shells, pencils, etc.
  • 99.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 99 Procedure: In general, there are six steps, which are: (i) Choose two pupils to come in front. Give eight pencils to one pupil and nine pencils to the other. (ii) Ask the pupils to put (combine) the two sets of pencils together and count how many pencils there are altogether. (iii) Get the pupils to write the mathematical sentence in words and then in symbols for the addition operation performed. e.g. Eight plus nine equals seventeen 8 + 9 = 17 (iv) Repeat the activity using different quantities for the sets of objects to be added or combined to get a highest total of 18. (v) The above steps can be repeated using different counting objects. (vi) Distribute Worksheet 2 to the pupils. Activity 4: Combining Two Numbers to Derive Basic Facts of Addition Learning Outcome: By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: (a) List down all the possible combinations of any two single digit numbers for deriving basic facts of addition. Materials: Sets of numeral cards (0 to 18); and Sets of 10 flash cards per group. Procedure: In general, there are six steps, which are: (i) Teacher asks pupils to work in groups and give each group a set of numeral cards from 0 to 18. (ii) First, ask a pupil to choose any two-digit number card within 18 and say aloud the number e.g. the Number 12 before pasting the number card on the board.
  • 100.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 100 (iii) Ask the class what two single digit numbers when added together give a total of 12, e.g. 7 + 5, etc. Then, get the pupil to write the mathematical sentence for the basic fact of addition derived e.g. 7+ 5 = 12 on a flash card and show it to the whole class. (iv) Get the pupils from each group to choose any 2 cards that sum up to 12 other than 7 and 5 mentioned above e.g. 8 + 4; 3 + 9; 11 + 1, 12 + 0; etc. and hold them up for everyone to see. (v) Ask each group of pupils to jot down all the possible combinations for getting a total of 12 on the flash cards provided. (vi) Repeat with other numbers until the pupils are familiar with all possible combinations comprising two single digit numbers for deriving various basic facts of addition. Activity 5: Lucky Throws Learning Outcome: By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: (a) Total up the two numbers shown on the faces of two tossed dice. Materials: Two dices with different numbers (1 to 6 and 7 to 12) on their faces. Procedure: In general, there are five steps, which are: (i) Prepare two dice, one which has the numbers 1 to 6 on its faces and another with numbers 7 to 12 on its faces. (ii) Give the two dice to one pupil. (iii) Ask the pupil to toss the dice on the table simultaneously and say out loud the sum of the numbers shown on the faces of the tossed dice. (iv) Ask their friends to check the accuracy of the answer. (v) Get pupils to work in pairs. Pupils take turns at tossing the dice and checking the answers.
  • 101.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 101 Activity 6: Number Wheel Learning Outcome: By the end of this activity, the pupils should be able to: (a) Add two numbers shown on the number wheel up to a highest total of 18. Materials: Number wheel; and Sets of number cards with single digit and two digit numbers from 0 to 18. Procedure: In general, there are five steps, which are: (i) Give two number cards to a pupil and ask the pupil to paste the two cards along the diameter of the wheel. The sum of the two numbers should be within 18 e.g. numbers 7 and 5. (ii) The two numbers should be put diagonally on a straight line as shown in Figure 5.11. Figure 5.11: Adding by combining two numbers on a number wheel (iii) Get pupils to call out the sum by combining the two numbers displayed on the wheel. (iv) Ask another pupil to pick any two cards and fill up the remaining spaces on the wheel and get the pupils to add up the numbers. (v) Repeat the activity by getting the pupils to work in groups. Give each group a set of number cards. Pupils take turns to pick and paste the cards whilst the rest of the members add and check the answers.
  • 102.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 102 5.2.3 Adding Two Numbers by Counting On It is not easy to answer questions or solve word problems on addition especially when ordinal numbers are involved such as in the following examples. (a) The original height of a plant is 7cm. If it increased its height by 5cm, what is its present height? Refer to Figure 5.12. (b) This year is ArifÊs fifth birthday. What will his age be in 10 yearsÊ time? The first question can be easily answered with the help of a count on model. Number lines can be used to solve this problem. Figure 5.12: Adding two numbers by counting on a number line The use of a combination of two models for adding, such as combining two groups and counting on, is an important step in developing the understanding of the addition operation among pupils. At this stage, pupils know how to find the total of two groups without having to count all the objects one by one all over again. Pupils who have not really understood the technique will count one by one all over again when trying to find the answer for the combination of two groups of objects. 5.2.4 Adding Two Numbers According to Place Value Conventional algorithms involve adding digits according to their place value. Basically, there are two ways to do the addition of two numbers, which are: (a) Horizontal Form This is commonly used when adding single digit numbers. (b) Vertical Form This is commonly used when adding two or more digit numbers.
  • 103.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 103 Pupils can manipulate a place value model to build sets of ten to find the sum of two whole numbers less than 10. It is important for children to remember the basic facts of addition derived from simple combinations of any two single digit numbers before moving on to perform the addition of two-digit and single digit numbers after having learnt about place value. You are encouraged to start with simple sums like the one below: In order to perform the addition given according to place value, first add 5 to 3 and then 10 to 0 to get 8 and 10 respectively as follows: In short, the addition in the above example was carried out by first adding the ones before adding the tens, that is, according to place value. 5.2.5 Families of Addition Facts Addition facts for different sums can be organised into families. Basically, as described earlier, addition involves combining two groups into one bigger group. Conversely, a separation activity is used for splitting a single group into two subsets or smaller groups. The advantage of this activity is that it can be used to introduce the families of addition facts for a number. For instance, let us take the number 6. Pupils can discover many patterns as well as find the combinations for getting a total of six and organise them into a table (see Table 5.1). Table 5.1: Family of Addition Facts for Six 0 + 6 = 6 1 + 5 = 6 2 + 4 = 6 3 + 3 = 6 4 + 2 = 6 5 + 1 = 6 6 + 0 = 6
  • 104.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 104 As can be seen from Table 5.1, there is an addition fact in the form of 6 + 0 = 6, or 0 + 6 = 0. Zero is called the identity element for addition. This is true for all whole numbers. Other addition facts occur in the form of pairs like 2 + 4 = 6 and 4 + 2 = 6. This is again true for all whole numbers and the operation of addition of all numbers is said to be commutative, that is, reversing the order of the numbers to be added does not affect the result. These two properties are important for learning the basic facts of addition and for learning more advanced mathematics. Developing the facts for sums greater than 10 is also important. This is done after many activities with sums of less than 10 and equal to 10 are introduced. By then, pupils should be able to organise what they already know accordingly: (a) Know the basic facts and can put them under families, where each fact in the family gives the same total. (b) Know that the family facts for 10 are important and can build 10s. (c) Able to use place value to build numbers that are equal to and greater than 10. The three skills above can be used together to help pupils learn facts for sums greater than 10 as illustrated in the following example: What is 6 plus 5 equal to? Figure 5.13 shows how pupils can be helped to develop facts for sums greater than 10. Figure 5.13: Adding two numbers by building a set of ten (a) Use counting chips or loose objects to represent 6 and 5. (b) Then build a set of 10 e.g. 6 + 4 = 10.
  • 105.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 105 (c) Look at the results and write an addition fact for the action performed e.g, 10+1= 11. (d) Justify the actions undertaken. The above process or steps can be explained thus: This is because in the family of addition facts for 10, to make a set of 10 with a set of 6, a set of 4 is needed, which has to come from the set of 5. The family of addition facts for 5 tells us that if you take 4 to make 10 with 6, there will be 1 left, resulting in a ten and one, such that 10 + 1 = 11. Actually, describing this process in words is more difficult than demonstrating it with objects as illustrated in the figure above. Experience working with families of addition facts for numbers and place value will enable children to pick up visual and sensory impressions and put these concepts together to develop a clearer understanding of the whole addition process. The following developmental activity illustrates how children can use place value and fact families to find sums greater than 10 by using facts for sums less than or equal to 10. Activity 7: Family Facts of Addition Learning Outcome: By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Use families of addition facts for sums less than or equal to 10 to find addition facts for sums greater than 10. Materials: Unifix cubes (red and blue). Procedure: In general, there are seven steps, which are: (i) Ask pupils to first take out 8 loose blue cubes and then 6 loose red cubes. (ii) Next, put them all in a row, see Figure 5.14 (a). (iii) Join the blue cubes together to make a bar of 8; (iv) Ask them to make a ten-bar by combining with two red cubes as in Figure 5.14 (b). (v) Record the respective mathematical sentence for each step, as illustrated In Figure 5.14 (c).
  • 106.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 106 Figure 5.14 (a): Adding two single digit numbers by using cubes or blocks Figure 5.14 (b): Adding two numbers by using the family facts for six and ten Figure 5.14 (c): Adding two numbers using families of addition facts (vi) Do the same with other quantities of coloured cubes e.g. 7 + 5, 9 + 3, etc. to find sums greater than ten by building sets of tens and using relevant family facts of addition. (vii) Emphasise that 7 + 5 = 7 + 3 + 2 = 10 +2 = 12. Get pupils to record the whole process using appropriate mathematical sentences for each step involved. Activity 8: Build a Ten Learning Outcome: By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Build a 10 for addition within 18. Materials: Counters; and Worksheet. Procedure: (i) Give pupils two sets of counters. (ii) Ask them to count the number of counters in each set. (iii) Let them write the numerals for each set in the blanks provided in the worksheet, see Figure 5.15. (iv) Then, ask pupils to build a set of ten. (v) Write the new numerals and find the sum.
  • 107.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 107 Figure 5.15: Adding two numbers by building a ten Another important property for addition is the associative property of addition. This property helps us to rewrite sums in terms of relevant facts that represent sums greater than 10 to make them easier to learn. Any sum that is greater than 10 can be found by rewriting one of the numbers so that a fact for 10 is obvious. Then, the expression involving 10 plus another number is simply a place value expression that can be written directly. This shows the importance of the associative property in making the regrouping process possible (see Table 5.2). Table 5.2: Associative Property of Addition Sum Rewriting the Sum in Terms of Relevant Facts Use of Associative Property Simplification 7 + 6 7 + (3 + 3) (7 + 3) + 3 10 + 3 = 13 8 + 7 8 + (2 + 5) (8 + 2) + 5 10 + 5 = 15 9 + 5 9 + (1 + 4) (9 + 1) + 4 10 + 4 = 14 Separation activities can also be used to relate the addition operation to the subtraction operation, especially to emphasise addition as the inverse of subtraction. 5.2.6 Writing Mathematical Sentences for Addition It is essential to teach pupils how to write the mathematical sentence for the addition operation carried out both in words and in symbols. Provide enough practice on writing the relevant mathematical sentences for addition to help pupils master the skill of addition within 18. For example, when adding a set of eight objects to a set of seven objects, the addition process can be recorded as such: Eight plus seven is equal to fifteen OR 8 + 7 = 15.
  • 108.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 108 NUMBER BONDS UP TO 18 A number bond is a pair of numbers making up a particular total. Pairs making a 10 such as 1 + 9, 2 + 8, 3 + 7, 4 + 6, 5 + 5, etc. were previously discussed in Topic 2. To help pupils master the skill of adding within 18, it is useful to teach them number bonds up to 18 which actually correspond to all the basic facts of addition within 18. Word problems can be used to introduce number bonds. e.g. Abu has 8 balloons and Osu has 7. How many balloons are there altogether? 8 + 7 = 15 Number Bonds Corresponding to 15 The following Table 5.3 shows all number bonds that make up a total of 15. Table 5.3: Number Bonds of 15 0 + 15 = 15 1 + 14 = 15 2 + 13 = 15 3 + 12 = 15 4 + 11 = 15 5 + 10 = 15 6 + 9 = 15 7 + 8 = 15 8 + 7 = 15 9 + 6 = 15 10 + 5 = 15 11 + 4 = 15 12 + 3 = 15 13 + 2 = 15 14 + 1 = 15 15 + 0 = 15 5.3
  • 109.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 109 Magic Square Figure 5.16: A 3 x 3 magic square with a magic sum of 15 Another example that shows number bonds of 15 is a 3 by 3 magic square consisting of a square array of numbers such that the sum along each column, row and diagonal is the same and is equal to 15, see Figure 5.16. This common value is called the „magic sum‰. The order of a magic square is simply the number of rows (and columns) in the square. Try to find the missing entries in the magic square provided. Have fun! 8 3 (a) (b) 5 (c ) 6 7 (d) Solutions: (a) 4; (b) 1; (c) 9; and (d) 2.
  • 110.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 110 5.3.1 Number Bonds to 18 The following Table 5.4 shows number bonds corresponding to 18. Table 5.4: Number Bonds of 18 0 + 18 = 18 1 + 17 = 18 2 + 16 = 18 3 + 15 = 18 4 + 14 = 18 5 + 13 = 18 6 + 12 = 18 7 +11 = 18 8 + 10 = 18 9 + 9 = 18 10 + 8 = 18 11 + 7 = 18 12 + 6 = 18 13 + 5 = 18 14 + 4 = 18 15 + 3 = 18 16 + 2 = 18 17 + 1 = 18 18 + 0 = 18 The addition operation concept can be explained by carrying out combination and counting on activities with the numbers involved. Developing the facts for sums greater than 10 is important. This can be done by learning up the basic facts of addition and organising them into fact families, where each pair of numbers in a family gives the same sum. Also, the putting of the addition facts into families facilitates the learning of mathematical sentences for addition.
  • 111.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 111 Pupils should also know how to build 10s and recognise that the fact family for 10 is very important and useful in performing addition especially when carrying out the combination of two groups of objects. The extremely important point for learning facts with sums greater than 10 is using place value concepts to build numbers that are 10 or greater. Associative property Commutative operation Identity element Magic square Number bond The number line is a significant tool that can be used as a teaching aid in various explorations in more advanced mathematics. Plan a strategy to show how to apply this tool in teaching the concept of addition. APPENDICES WORKSHEET 1 1. Underline the correct numbers. (a) One more than 11 is (12, 13). (b) One more than (17, 14) is 18. (c) (15, 17) is one more than 16. (d) What is one more than 10? (13, 11). (e) One more than (11, 14) is 15. (f) (12, 14) is one more than 13.
  • 112.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 112 (g) (10, 13) is one more than 11. (h) One more than (16, 17) is 18. 2. Fill in the blanks with the correct numbers (words). (a) One more than twelve is __________________. (b) One more than ______________ is thirteen. (c) ______________ is one more than sixteen. (d) What is one more than fifteen? ______________. (e) One more than seventeen is ________________. (f) ______________ is one more than seventeen. (g) ______________ is one more than eleven. (h) One more than ______________ is fourteen. WORKSHEET 2 1. Write the missing numbers in the table. Add Sum Write in Words 5 + 6 11 6 + __ 12 Twelve __ + 11 15 Fifteen 12 + 4 Sixteen 8 + 5 13 9 + __ Eighteen __ +13 Seventeen 12 + 0 12 + 5
  • 113.
    TOPIC 5 ADDITIONWITHIN 18 113 2. Write the correct numbers in the boxes. (a) (b) (c) 3. Match the following.
  • 114.
    Topic 6 Subtraction within 18 LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Identify Âone lessÊ or Âmore than one lessÊ than a number given; 2. Explain the differences between two numbers; 3. Subtract two numbers by taking away; 4. Subtract by finding the difference between numbers of objects in two groups; 5. Write mathematical sentences for subtraction; and 6. Count back in steps from any number. INTRODUCTION Subtraction and addition are closely related such that they undo each other and for that reason they are called inverse operations. There are several types of subtraction situations. They include the idea of taking away, the additive principle (what is needed), the comparative situation (comparison of two sets), the partitioning concept (separating a set of objects into parts) and the incremental aspect (involving decrease) to illustrate subtraction. The most intuitive idea for subtraction is taking away. Reinforcing the take away interpretation requires the presence of both addition and subtraction situations at the same time. All five types of situations occur in real life and pupils must explore them for themselves. Attention must be focused on the basic idea of subtraction and how it relates to each of these situations.
  • 115.
    TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTIONWITHIN 18 115 As place value concepts are developed, pupils should also learn basic arithmetic facts for sums greater than 10 by building sets of 10. If not, they will encounter difficulties when they begin to learn the procedures for computing with large numbers. THE CONCEPT OF ‘LESS THAN’ 6.1 For subtraction involving numbers greater than 10, pupils should manipulate loose objects, such as blocks, tiles or counting chips, so that they can participate actively in the regrouping process. Suppose we want to subtract 5 from 13, we can do so in the following way: Represent 13 as one ten bar and three loose blocks ------------- Subtract 3 to get a ten bar Or one tens -------------------------- Exchange the one tens for ten ones, and then subtract 2 more ones -------------- End up with 8 ones --------------- When pupils have had experience working with loose objects and begin to appreciate the regrouping process, they can work with visual models on a worksheet. The models on the worksheet must lead them through the reasoning that is necessary for finding the missing number in a subtraction mathematical sentence. For example: Find the missing number in the mathematical sentence: 13 5 = (a) Put out one 10 and 3 loose blocks for representing 13 (b) Subtract to get a ten i.e. (13 3 = 10) (c) Subtract 2 more to get to subtract 5 in all. That gives 8. The regrouping process is extremely important. Pupils must learn that when they add facts with sums greater than 10, they have to regroup. Similarly, they must also learn that some subtraction situations require regrouping too. The activity represented either physically or pictorially, should relate addition to subtraction. This practical tool is superior to counting forwards or backwards to find a sum or
  • 116.
    TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTIONWITHIN 18 116 difference. It is a beginning towards building the facility to do mental arithmetic as illustrated as follows. Break tens down and always use families of relevant facts For example: When I add, I sometimes build tens. What is 12 5? To subtract 5 from 12, I have to think that: 12 is 1 set of ten and 2 singles. Removing 2 singles is easy and that gets me to 10. There are 3 more to be removed and that is easy too because I know my family of facts for 10. I break down the ten (regroup) and remove 3 more. This leaves 7. Thus, 12 5 = 7. 6.1.1 Patterns for Subtraction While practising subtraction with regrouping, pupils can be prompted to notice helpful patterns that involve families of facts. If I subtract 5 from 12, that is easy because 6 + 6 = 12 and I have subtracted one less than 6 which is 5. Therefore we must have 7 remaining. Sometimes a subtraction sentence can be translated into an easier subtraction sentence as below: 6.1.2 ‘One Less’ Than a Number Subtracting one or more from a number to show Âone or more lessÊ than a number can be done easily using a number line as shown in Figure 6.1 and Figure 6.2.
  • 117.
    TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTIONWITHIN 18 117 Figure 6.1: Subtracting 1 from 15 on a number line is 1 less than 15, that is 14 Figure 6.2: Subtracting 2 from 17 on a number line is 2 less from 17, that is 15 6.1.3 ‘Take Away’ Several types of problem situations fall into the subtraction category. Unfortunately, these problem situations are not as intuitive as problem situations for addition. This is because many subtraction problems sound like addition. Teaching subtraction requires extra attention, thus there is a need to get used to all types of subtraction situations. In general, subtraction of whole numbers applies to two kinds of situations. The first is called Âtake- awayÊ. This is the easiest and most natural interpretation of subtraction for pupils to learn. It is easy to represent the situation with objects, and it is a natural extension of the combination interpretation for addition. Have pupils characterise situations by describing and drawing rather than have them write the appropriate mathematical sentence. When reinforcing the Âtake awayÊ interpretation for subtraction, present equivalent addition and subtraction situations at the same time. For example: A bowler with 10 pins knocks down 8 of them. From 10 pins, the bowler takes away 8 pins. There are now 2 pins left. The subtraction is thus represented as 10 8 = 2. The following terminologies are used with subtraction:
  • 118.
    TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTIONWITHIN 18 118 The ÂminuendÊ is the number from which another number is being subtracted. The ÂsubtrahendÊ is the number being subtracted. The ÂdifferenceÊ is the result of subtracting the subtrahend from the minuend. Related Sentences for Subtraction Subtraction is often defined in terms of addition. e.g. 5 2 is that number which when added to 2 gives 5. Thus the subtraction sentence can be written as: 5 2 = 3 (Taking away 2 from 5 gives 3) There is a related addition sentence for this situation: 5 = 3 + 2 (Putting back the 2 gives 5 again) In fact, we know that the answers we find for subtractions are correct only because of the related addition operations. Subtracting on a Number Line Subtraction also corresponds to moving distances on a number line. The number line below is marked with tick marks at equal distances of 1 unit. To perform this operation, we first move 10 units to the right from 0 and then to the left 8 units, to end up at 2. The subtraction that corresponds to this situation is written as 10 8 = 2 (see Figure 6.3) Figure 6.3: Subtracting on a number line
  • 119.
    TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTIONWITHIN 18 119 Revision of the ÂTake AwayÊ Situation Table 6.1 explain the revision of the 'take away' situation in detail. Table 6.1: Revision of the 'Take Away' Situation Physical Objects Mathematical Sentence There are 3 birds sitting on a fence. Soon 2 more birds fly onto the fence. How many birds are on the fence now? Pick out 3 counters, then 2 more. Ask: „How many 3 + 2 = 5 counters in all?‰ There are 5 birds sitting on a fence. Three of them fly away. How many birds are still sitting on the fence? Put out 5 counters, then remove 3. Ask: „How 5 3 = 2 many are left?‰ If pupils perform this activity often enough, they will naturally be able to construct concepts that relate to subtraction and addition. Pupils are ready to move on to a pictorial representation of the operation by covering up or marking out pictures of objects. Here are six cherries; mark out 3 to show how many the crows ate. Tell us how many are left. 6 3 = 3 6.1.4 ‘Difference’ between Two Groups of Objects Besides the take away idea, there are many other types of subtraction situations as to how to know the difference between two groups of objects. Sometimes we can use the additive situation to focus on what is needed. We can ask „How many must be added to what I already have to obtain a certain amount? For example: Dani has 3 stamps, but needs a total of 5 to mail his letters. How many more stamps does he need?
  • 120.
    TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTIONWITHIN 18 120 The comparative situation is matching objects in two groups on a one-to-one basis. A strong foundation, based on the one-to-one matching test for the comparison of two sets, can be used to help children with this application. Questions that could be asked include „Which is more?‰ to „How many more‰ to provide pupils with a procedure to solve problems of this type. The partitioning situation involves separating or partitioning a set of objects into parts. It is extremely important for pupils to draw pictures and diagrams in this case. For example: Here are 5 cars. If 3 of them are blue and the rest are green, how many are green? The last type of subtraction situation, known as the incremental situation, involves a decrease in quantity. All measurements require this type, for example, when situations such as losing weight, shortening the length of a pair of pants or the temperature drops when it is cold, etc. are involved. The following are some samples of teaching-learning activities denoting the various types of subtraction situations. Activity 1 4: Representing Different Subtraction Situations Learning Outcomes: By the end of the activities, pupils should be able to: (a) Represent different subtraction situations such as taking away, additive, comparative and partitioning types; and (b) Write the appropriate mathematical sentence for the subtraction performed. Materials: Groovy Boards with dots; and Rubber band. Figure 6.4: The board with 2 dots on one side
  • 121.
    TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTIONWITHIN 18 121 Procedure: Situation 1 (Take Away) (i) Teacher shows board with 2 dots on one side of the rubber band and 3 on the other side (see Figure 6.4). (ii) Ask pupils to show the operation of 2 + 3 = 5. (iii) Teacher shows how to represent this operation as subtraction. (iv) Teacher asks: „How many dots are there altogether? If 2 dots are covered, how many dots are left?‰ (v) Let pupils think and say together: 5 2 = 3 That is: Five take away two gives three Figure 6.5: The board with 5 dots Procedure: Situation 2 (Additive) (i) Teacher shows board with 2 dots and tells that there are 5 in all. (ii) Ask pupils how many more do they need to get to 5. (iii) Let them put the rubber band so that they can see 2 on one side. (iv) Ask them how many more do they need to have all the dots on the board. (v) Let pupils think and say together: 5 2 = 3 (additive). Figure 6.6: The boards with 2 dots and 3 dots separately
  • 122.
    TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTIONWITHIN 18 122 Procedure: Situation 3 (Comparative) (i) Teacher shows board that have 5 dots and 2 dots separately. The boards need to be put on a one-to-one matching basis. (ii) Ask pupils to examine the lengths of the 2 dots board and the 5 dots board (see Figure 6.7). Ask pupils how much longer the 5 dot-board is compared to the 2 dot- board. (iii) Ask them to compare and say together: 5 2 = 3 (comparative). (iv) Both boards can be matched on a one-to-one basis. Figure 6.7: The boards with 2 dots and 5 dots separately Procedure: Situation 4 (Partitioning) (i) Teacher shows 5 dots in all. Show the pupils that 2 dots are on one side of the rubber band (see Figure 6.8). (ii) Ask them how many are on the other side. (iii) Let them put the rubber band in place and think of the subtraction as: 5 2 = 3 (partitioning). Figure 6.8: The boards with 2 dots on one side with rubber band
  • 123.
    TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTIONWITHIN 18 123 Exercises on finding the difference between two groups of objects. 1. The difference between 7 and 3 is 4: There are 4 more circles in the row of 7 compared to the row of 3. 2. Find the difference between these numbers: Between 8 and 5, the difference is _____ 3. Possible pairs of numbers with a difference that is equal to a given number. 15 6 = 16 4 = 12 6 = 13 3 = 14 7 = 18 6 = 13 5 = 18 4 = 15 9 = 15 8 = 6.1.5 Writing Mathematical Sentences for Subtraction The following equation with a missing addend can be considered as a special mathematical sentence for subtraction. For example, take a look at the following equation: 7 + = 18
  • 124.
    TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTIONWITHIN 18 124 It is referred to as a missing addend sentence because it is an addition sentence in which one of the addends is not known. Constructing this new concept should just be a matter of helping pupils to reorganise what they already know. Using relevant families of facts can help pupils to master the missing addend idea with ease. Activity 5: Writing the Subtraction Sentence with the Help of a Number Line Learning Outcome: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Write a mathematical sentence for subtraction within 18 using a number line. Materials: Number line Worksheet. Procedure: (i) Ask pupils to get a partner. Find the missing number in each subtraction sentence. 13 7 = 10 4 = (ii) Start at 13, then go back 7 spaces. End up at 6: 13 7 = (iii) Start at 10, then go back 4 spaces. End up at 6: 10 4 =
  • 125.
    TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTIONWITHIN 18 125 (iv) Story problem that will fit both sentences. Danial, the hopping cricket, must hop on the number line to show 13 7. He will start at 13 and hop back 7 spaces. What must Fakri do if he must start at 10 and then go back to meet Danial? COUNTING BACK A type of subtraction situation, known as the incremental situation, involves a decrease in quantity. Counting back is also an activity of counting numbers in descending order. It is also the inverse of counting on in the addition concept. In real life, we are not always dealing with concrete objects that can be counted. All measurements require this type of subtraction such as the calculation of weight loss, the drop in temperature when it is cold and the shortening of the length of a pair of pants. Pupils should realise that they need to subtract in these instances by exploring the various situations. Examples of Subtraction in Real Life Example 1: Pupils can explore what happens to the length of a chain or the height of a tower when the number of links or cubes is decreased. HumairaÊs weight is 20 kg. Three weeks later she loses 5 kg. What is her weight now? Example 2: What is the number that is 3 less than 12, see Figure 6.9. Figure 6.9: Subtracting on a number line 6.2
  • 126.
    TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTIONWITHIN 18 126 SUBTRACTION SQUARES (Enrichment Activity) The following activity can be used to provide subtraction computation practice at many levels (i.e. involving single and multiple digits and subtraction beyond 18) in different and interesting formats. This enrichment activity can be used in different forms and can serve as one of the following: Group activity Independent activity Cooperative activity Abstract procedure Learning Outcome: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to (a) Perform subtraction involving single and multiple digits in different and interesting formats. Materials: Worksheet Subtraction squares (Arithmagons). Procedure: (i) Ask pupils to perform subtractions along horizontal, vertical and diagonal lines for each of the subtraction square (arithmagon) provided in the Worksheet (Steps 1 4). 17 16 = 1 12 8 = 4 16 8 = 8 17 12 = 5 6 4 = 2 6 2 = 4 8 2 = 6 8 4 = 4 Along Diagonal Lines
  • 127.
    TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTIONWITHIN 18 127 4 2 = 2 6 4 = 2 Along Vertical and Horizontal lines 2 2 = 0 Along Diagonal Lines (ii) The above steps can be repeated using other numbers to provide more practice on subtraction. (iii) A master copy of the template (Blank Subtraction Squares or Arithmagons) is provided for you to make photocopies. Prepare enough copies of the template and distribute to pupils. Master Copy of the Blank Subtraction Squares (Arithmagon Template)
  • 128.
    TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTIONWITHIN 18 128 Try to find the answer for each question and state what is the best type of subtraction to use to solve each problem. (a) Rolando had 12 crayons and bought 6 more. (i) How many crayons does he have? (ii) He broke 6 crayons. How many crayons does he still have? (b) A mail carrier had 18 letters to deliver. He delivered 12 letters to the first house, 3 letters to the second house and 2 letters to the last house on the same street. How many more letters does he still have to deliver? (c) Timmy earned 9 stars for good behaviour last week and 7 stars this week but then he lost 10 stars for fighting. How many stars does he still have? Several types of problem situations fall under the subtraction category. All five types of subtraction situations (take away, additive, comparative, partitioning and incremental) make use of the minus or subtraction symbol () for recording the operation. To perform subtraction involving numbers greater than 10, pupils should be provided with the opportunity to manipulate loose objects so that they can participate meaningfully in the regrouping process. While practising subtraction with regrouping, pupils can be prompted to note down helpful patterns involving families of relevant facts. Additive Comparative Difference Incremental Partitioning Take away
  • 129.
    TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTIONWITHIN 18 129 In your discussion groups, try to differentiate between the 5 types of subtraction that have been discussed in this topic. Supposing your pupils have difficulty in deciding that a problem requires subtraction in order to be solved and then have trouble writing the appropriate subtraction sentence, explain how can you tackle this problem. APPENDIX WORKSHEET 1. Draw lines to match the following.
  • 130.
    TOPIC 6 SUBSTRACTIONWITHIN 18 130 Tick (ÂÊ) the answer in the correct boxes. 2. Complete the table below. Subtract, find the remainder and write the missing numbers in words in the correct columns. Subtract Remainder Write in Words 18 8 10 __ 3 thirteen __ 0 15 12 2 ten 18 9 9 17 __ eleven __ 5 thirteen 13 3 10 14 3 eleven
  • 131.
    Topic 7 Money LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Explain the concept of money in the form of notes and coins in Malaysian currency to your pupils; 2. Represent the value of Malaysian money in symbols, viz. ÂRMÊ and ÂsenÊ; 3. Differentiate between the value of various denominations of money; 4. Exchange notes and coins for a given value of money within RM10; 5. Add and subtract money in the form of coins and notes within RM10; and 6. Solve simple problems involving money within RM10 in real-life situations. INTRODUCTION Children gain a lot of mathematical knowledge informally through their experience with money in their daily lives. Learning how to count and use, as well as identify, coins are important basic skills related to money to be acquired at an early age. Spending money is an interesting way to reinforce your pupilsÊ basic mathematical skills such as addition, subtraction, multiplication and division besides other language skills such as reading comprehension. Understanding how to exchange money, plus knowing how much change you will receive when spending money and purchasing items, are crucial.
  • 132.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 132 However, pupilsÊ classroom learning experience is also important to help them clarify their misconceptions regarding money. One of the first concepts that children must understand is the value of coins and notes. In this topic, you will learn how you can help children to formalise their conceptual understanding of money. RECOGNISING NOTES AND COINS Money, both notes and coins, have its own size, shape and colour. In the Malaysian currency, different denominations of notes and coins are used in everyday life. It is important that children learn to recognise the various notes (named Ringgit) and coins (named Sen) in our currency. First, introduce your pupils to the sen, and then the ringgit. Use the following printable pages to assist in early money identification. Pupils may use the sheets as a colouring activity involving money including coins and notes or merely as a money reference sheet. Refer to Table 7.1 and Table 7.2 for Malaysian coins and notes in various denominations. Table 7.1: Malaysian Coins in Various Denominations Value Front Back 1 sen 5 sen 10 sen 7.1
  • 133.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 133 20 sen 50 sen Table 7.2: Malaysian Notes in Various Denominations Value Front Back RM 1 RM 2 RM 5 RM 10
  • 134.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 134 7.1.1 Recognise the Symbols for Money Before 1993, the symbols of Â$Ê and Â¢Ê were used to denote a certain value for money e.g. 20¢, 75¢, $5.00, $9.50, etc. The Malaysian currency was officially changed to the Ringgit (RM) in place of the dollar ($), while ÂsenÊ replaced cents (¢) e.g. 20 sen, 75 sen, RM5.00, RM9.50, etc. Some samples of teaching and learning activities for ÂMoneyÊ are described in this topic. The following activity allows children to learn to recognise and write money using the correct symbols. Activity 1: Recognise and Write Symbols and Words for Money Learning Outcome: By the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Name and write the value of money in symbols and in words. Materials: Pencils; Crayons; Coins; and Paper. Procedure: (i) Ask pupils to trace the pattern of the coin. Put a piece of paper over the coin, rub gently and then show it to the class (ii) Trace/draw coins and notes of various denominations. (iii) After that, ask them to cut and paste the money on the Worksheet given. (iv) Label the traced money or drawings using symbols and words in Table 7.3.
  • 135.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 135 Table 7.3: Money Tracing/Drawing Traced Money/Drawing Symbol Words 10 sen ten sen 50 sen fifty sen RM 10.00 ten ringgit SELF-CHECK 7.1 How do blind people know the value of coins and notes? Jot down your ideas. 7.1.2 The History of Money Money did not exist in the olden days initially. Prior to using money to trade, bartering was the only way goods were exchanged. However, the barter system was not very efficient as trading animals for other goods proved inconvenient. Money acts as an intermediary for market goods, which may be exchanged for other goods. Throughout history, money has taken many different forms, including scarce metals. Today, the majority of the types of money exchanged takes no physical form and only exists as bytes and bits in a computer's memory. Go to the following suggested links for learning about the history of money in general and Malaysian money specifically. Then view any home page for lessons to learn about money skills. http://library.thinkquest.org/28718/history.html http://moneymuseum.bnm.gov.my/index.php?ch=8
  • 136.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 136 The symbol of the Âcoin treeÊ (see Figure 7.1) logo is an adaptation from the Âpohon pitisÊ (the coin tree) made from a tin bearing 13 coins issued by Sultan Muhammad IV of the State of Kelantan in 1903 when it was still a tributary state of Siam. Figure 7.1: The coin tree Source: http://moneymuseum.bnm.gov.my (a) History of Money Thousands of years ago, money did not exist. There were no stores, markets or other places to spend money. People got their food, clothing and shelter from the land around them. For many years, people lived independently or on their own and had little or no contact with others who lived far away. In the early days, people exchanged goods by bartering for what they needed. For example, a person might trade animal skins for fresh fish or trade vegetables and grains for meat. Trading one item for another is called bartering. Under this arrangement, goods were exchanged for other goods. As the years went by, bartering became very popular. Markets were created where people could trade goods and people began to depend on getting things from others but this was not always convenient.
  • 137.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 137 Sometimes bartering can get kind of tricky. Let us say you go to the market with 50 fish and need to bring home animal skins and grains. However, the person trading animal skins does not need any fresh fish and wants other items for his animal skins. You could try to trade your fish for whatever he wants, but that would take a lot of time and effort. Instead, people developed another solution. They began to use special items, like tokens, that everyone agreed upon which had a certain value. You could trade your fish for tokens, and then you could use tokens to buy animal skins and grains. The animal skin merchant could use your tokens to buy whatever he needed. The token system was a great improvement, because everyone could use the tokens to get exactly what they needed. All around the world, people developed trading systems like these. Not all of them used tokens though. Salt, shells, barley, feathers and tea leaves were used in exchange for other goods. In most cultures, precious metals like gold and silver were also highly valued. Many people began trading goods for bits of gold or silver. It is hard to tell the value of a lump of metal just by looking at it, so merchants began weighing the gold and silver pieces. In many places, the metal was cut into circular discs and the weight was stamped on the discs so everyone would know its value. These stamped discs were the earliest coins! As the trading industry grew over the years, many countries decided to make official money. Governments made coins out of precious metals like gold and silver, and everyone agreed on the value of each one. The introduction of official coins made the buying and selling of goods within a country much easier. Through the ages, money has become not only a medium of exchange but also a unit and store of value. With time, money in the form of paper currency or notes was introduced as this was convenient to be issued. For years, most countries used only coins for their money. Coins last a long time and are easy to use. However, the citizens of China used another kind of money. The Chinese government made its money out of paper because precious metals were very rare in China. Moreover, paper bills are very light and easy to carry. After a number of years, other countries began to make paper money like the Chinese. These bills became very popular and made things much easier when buying expensive items. Can you imagine trying to buy a one hundred dollar item with coins? That would take a lot of coins indeed!
  • 138.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 138 Remember! Too many coins can become rather heavy for us to carry around so it is wise that we resort to using paper money or notes instead. Over the years, countries continued to develop new kinds of coins and bills, and we now have other ways to exchange money too. We can write cheques, use credit cards and transfer money electronically through automatic teller machines (ATMs), see Figure 7.2 for example. Despite these new technologies, the basics of our money system still remain the same. What kind of changes in the use of money do you think we will see in the next 100 years? Figure 7.2: Automatic Teller Machine (ATM) ACTIVITY 7.1 Do you know why we use the ÂRinggitÊ in Malaysia, ÂYenÊ in Japan and ÂDollarÊ in America? Why do we have to change our money when we go to Japan or other countries? (b) The Barter System Have you ever wondered what it would be like and what we would do without money? To give children some idea about the barter system, engage them actively in a discussion about trading and fair trade. Arrange the children in groups of six. Give each group 12 index cards, a bottle of glue, scissors and magazines or departmental sales brochures, supermarket advertisements, newspaper cuttings, etc. Ask the children to cut and paste food items on six cards and clothing items on the remaining six cards. Have the children shuffle the cards and place them face down. Each group member then draws two cards. Children can barter (conduct
  • 139.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 139 fair trade) within their groups so that each member finishes with one food item and one clothing item. Bring the pupils together to talk about their experience with the bartering process. Stress on the fairness and efficiency of this type of trading. ACTIVITY 7.2 Can you summarise the history of the flow of money since the barter system? Discuss. The following activities can be used to help pupils to learn to recognise and identify Malaysian currency in different ways. Activity 2: Recognising Malaysian Coins and Notes Learning Outcomes: By the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Recognise and say the name of various denominations of Malaysian coins e.g. one sen, five sen and ten sen; and (b) Recognise and say the name of various denominations of Malaysian notes e.g. one ringgit, five ringgit and ten ringgit. Materials: Lyrics sheet: „Ten Little Sen‰; Magnetic board; and Specimen money (coins and notes) e.g. one sen, five sen and ten sen, one ringgit, five ringgit and ten ringgit. Procedure: (i) Teach the children the song, „Ten Little Sen‰ (sung to the tune of „Ten Little Indians‰. (ii) As the class sings, place a magnetic sen on the board for each sen mentioned in the song. (iii) When five sen is reached, put a five sen coin on the board. Similarly, when ten sen is reached, paste a ten sen coin on the board.
  • 140.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 140 (iv) Repeat the song, this time round, get the pupils to show the respective money as they sing along. Lyrics: One little, two little, three little sen; Four little, five little, six little sen; Seven little, eight little, nine little sen; Ten little sen make a ten sen. (v) Ask pupils to name the places where they can see people use money? An example is given in Figure 7.3. (vi) Extension Activity: Replace the word ÂsenÊ with ÂRinggitÊ to enable the pupils to recognise and say the name of Malaysian notes up to ten ringgit in a similar manner. Figure 7.3: People use money in hypermarkets to buy groceries Activity 3: Coin Patterns Learning Outcomes: By the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Recognise and trace the patterns of various Malaysian coins on to a sheet of paper; and (b) Identify the features of Malaysian coins. Materials: Clean sheet of paper; Pencils/crayons; and Malaysian coins of various denominations.
  • 141.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 141 Procedure: (i) Teacher guides pupils to say aloud various denominations of Malaysian coins. (ii) Ask pupils to arrange and make a pattern using the coins. (iii) Ask them to put a sheet of paper over the coins and get them to trace or rub gently on the surfaces of the coin to obtain the coin pattern with crayons. (iv) Ask pupils to show and talk about the features of each coin traced in their small groups. (v) Guide pupils to summarise the features of various denominations of the Malaysian coins discussed. (vi) Attach a reference sheet of the coin patterns for pupils to refer to Table 7.1. Activity 4: Identifying Malaysian Coins Learning Outcomes: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Identify coins and their values; and (b) Write the amount of money based on a certain value of money given. Materials: Coloured construction paper (Size A4); Pencil; Scissors; and Specimen coins. Procedure: (a) Instructions/Practice: Ask pupils the following. (i) How many of you think you can count money really well and how many think you could improve with some practice? (ii) When it comes to counting money, bills are probably the easiest things to count. Why? (Possible response: The amount is written on them).
  • 142.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 142 (iii) How do we tell the coins apart? (Possible response: By their features: size, thickness and pictures). (iv) List the names of the coins and their values. (v) Now, as a class, determine the value of the money each time it is traded. (vi) How much money did you use at the end of the activity? (b) Model: (i) Demonstrate how to count money with the help of models (specimen money). Always start with the bill or coin of greatest value and work down to the bill or coin with the least value. (c) Guided Practice: (i) Give the class fake bills and coins to cut out and keep in an envelope throughout the activity. (Bills were copied on to green construction paper and coins were copied on to yellow construction paper). (ii) Tell them to count how much change they have and record their answers on their blank sheets of paper. (iii) Continue with other questions. (See ÂProcess QuestionsÊ next). Choose volunteers to demonstrate and explain how they got their answers. Process Questions: How much change do you have? (RM3.28) How much is 2 ringgit, 20 sen, 10 sen, 5 sen and 2 sen? (RM2.37) How much is 1 five ringgit, 1 ringgit, 3 ten sen and 1 sen? (RM6.31) How much is 1 five ringgit, 1 two ringgit, 2 ten sen, 1 twenty sen, and 5 one sen? (RM 7.45) How much is 1 five ringgit, 1 two ringgit, 2 one ringgit and 9 ten sen? (RM9.90) You want to buy a candy bar for 45 sen. You have 3 ten sen, a five sen and 3 sen. Do you have enough money? Why? (No, only RM0.38) You have four coins that add up to RM 0.46. Which coins do you have?
  • 143.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 143 (d) Closure: Discuss the importance of knowing the value of different money. (e) Evaluation/Checking for Understanding: (i) Listen to pupilsÊ responses during the Âwhole-classÊ questioning process. (ii) Have pupils record their answers to the class questions on the paper provided. Check the responses together. 7.1.3 Values of Coins and Notes The different denominations of coins that we use daily are shown here, for example, one sen, five sen, ten sen, twenty sen and fifty sen (See Figure 7.4). Do you remember the features of each coin? Can you describe them? Figure 7.4: Different denominations of Malaysian coins Various denominations of notes normally used by children include one ringgit, two ringgit, five ringgit and ten ringgit as illustrated in Table 7.2 earlier. Likewise, do you remember the features of each of these notes? Can you describe them? 7.1.4 Counting Money (Ringgit and Sen) Lessons on ÂCounting money using coinsÊ will teach pupils to learn about the value of money. As mentioned earlier, learning how to count, use and identify coins is an important basic skill to be learnt at an early age. Printable worksheets and sample lessons will help your pupils master the skill of counting money with coins, whether they are just beginning to learn to count coins, or if they need additional practice to do so.
  • 144.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 144 Here is a fun way to reinforce money skills: (a) Take out a manila folder. (b) Open it up. (c) On the left side, draw a tree or paste a photocopy of it. (d) On the right side, have four library book pockets (or as many as you need to teach your concept). (e) Fill up the tree with little pieces of soft Velcro everywhere (on all parts of the branches) and take one sen, five sen, ten sen and twenty sen (cut-outs from a coin and coloured accordingly). (f) Glue them to small pictures of apples printed on construction paper. Laminate and place hard Velcro on the back of the ÂapplesÊ. Scatter the coins everywhere so that all the one sen can be separated from the ten sen, etc. such that the tree is now filled with ÂapplesÊ (i.e. all the scattered coins). (g) On the pockets, label the values of each denomination of coins: e.g. 1 sen, 5 sen, 10 sen and 20 sen. (h) Give each pupil one of these folders and ask them to ÂpickÊ the apples from the tree and place them in the correct pocket. For example, if a child ÂpicksÊ a one sen, he or she places it in the pocket that is labelled Â1 senÊ. (i) When they are done, it is very easy to check their work because all you have to do is to empty out the pockets and make sure each coin is matched with its appropriate value. (j) Get pupils to count the money in the respective pockets and write the value using the correct symbols. (k) Repeat the above steps and make another money tree using ringgit in place of sen. (l) Ask pupils to count the money by combining various pockets containing ringgit and sen to let them practise counting money in ringgit and sen. It has been shown that pupils who have worked with this activity all loved to ÂpickÊ the apples from the tree. As a point of interest, the money tree idea can be modified for teaching other concepts, for instance, addition and subtraction facts, telling the time, picture-word identification, phonics activities, etc. In fact, you
  • 145.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 145 can choose any concept to ÂpickÊ from the tree as suggested by Ms. Jany Mederos, in ÂBeginning Teacher, 1st and 2nd grade Autistic, Miami, FLÊ. 7.1.5 Exchanging Notes and Coins Another money skill to be learnt by pupils involves ÂMaking changeÊ. The following activity illustrates how children can be taught to exchange notes and coins when performing buying and selling activities. Activity 5: Making Change Learning Outcomes: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Count the correct change in sen; and (b) Exchange notes (ringgit) and coins (sen). Materials: Activity sheet (containing pictured items); Construction paper; Scissors; Specimen money (one ringgit and sen of various denominations); Pen markers/coloured pencils/crayons; and Glue. Procedure: (i) Give groups of children an Activity Sheet, scissors and Specimen money (Notes and coins). (ii) Ask children to cut out the cards on the activity sheet and then fill in a price of 99 sen or less for each item shown. (iii) Ask each group member to select an item to buy, pretend to pay for it with one ringgit notes and then use the play money to show how much change they will receive. (iv) Group members can check each otherÊs work. Let the children paste their items and coins on construction paper after each transaction.
  • 146.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 146 ADDING AND SUBTRACTING MONEY 7.2 Different amounts of money may be written in several ways. Coins may be written with the ÂsenÊ symbol and the ringgit can be written with the ringgit symbol (ÂRMÊ). Adding money that is expressed in these forms just involves adding the amounts and placing the proper symbols on the answer. One way to add money is to count the coins and then the notes on the price tag for each item pictured. Often money is written as a decimal with the ringgit to the left of the decimal point and the sen to the right of the decimal point. For example, five ringgit and eighty-seven sen is written as RM5.87. Money amounts are added the same way as decimals are added. Remember to put the RM sign before the answer. Similarly, money amounts are subtracted the same way as decimals are subtracted. Again, remember to put the RM sign before the answer. In short, subtracting and adding money are just like subtracting and adding other decimal numbers. Always line up the decimal points when subtracting and adding decimals. Let children practise adding and subtracting money in the following way: „Let us pretend you have ten ringgit to buy vegetables. Practise buying items from a grocery store and making change using decimal numbers. Use your skills with decimals to find the answers to these questions. Remember to put the decimal point in the proper place in your answer‰. Grocery List Grape juice RM 2.00 Pickles RM 1.80 Banana 85 sen Did you know? The word, money, comes from the Latin word, ÂMonetaÊ. ÂMonetaÊ was the name of the place in ancient Rome where money was made. Activity 6: Shopping with Money Learning Outcomes: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Have hands-on experience of buying and selling with money within RM10; (b) Add and subtract money appropriately; (c) Solve word problems involving the addition and subtraction of money within RM10; and
  • 147.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 147 (d) Create word problems involving the addition and subtraction of money within RM10. Materials: Jotter book; Shopping Cards; Play Money; BuyersÊ Worksheet; and SellersÊ Worksheet. Procedure: (a) Each pupil is to prepare his play money worth of RM5 a day before. (b) Ask pupils to recall the algorithms for the addition and subtraction of money. (c) Emphasise the importance of the ÂRMÊ sign, the decimal pointÂ.Ê, and the alignment of the signs and numbers. (d) Split the class into two groups and start briefing the pupils on the activity. (e) Pupils work in pairs. Assign them as ÂSellersÊ or ÂBuyersÊ. Each pair of ÂSellersÊ and ÂBuyersÊ can only trade within their group. (f) Each pair of pupils is to combine their play money to total up to RM10. (g) First, brief the ÂBuyersÊ on their roles. (i) They will go on a shopping spree to buy three items using their money. Once they buy an item, they get to keep the item card. (ii) The items bought and the amounts spent have to be recorded on their worksheet. (iii) At the end of the shopping spree, they have to total up their expenditure and find out how much they have left. (iv) Then, they have to count their play money to tally with their worksheet. (h) Next, brief the ÂSellersÊ on their roles. (i) Each pair of pupils is to display their goods along with the price tags (matching colour).
  • 148.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 148 (ii) They will sell their goods to whichever ÂBuyersÊ who are interested. When the item is sold, the price tag is turned over. (iii) After each sale, they have to record the item sold and the amount spent on their worksheet. (iv) At the end of the shopping spree, they have to total up their earnings with the RM10 they have at the start of the activity to find the amount of money in their possession. (v) Then, they have to count their play money to tally with their worksheet. (i) Tell pupils that they may need to use their jotter books to do the working when calculating the change. (j) Give out the worksheets to the respective pairs. (k) Distribute the shopping cards to the ÂSellersÊ. (l) Carry out the activity. (m) Collect the worksheets and shopping cards. Activity 7: Money in the Bank Learning Outcome: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Use coins to practise their addition and subtraction skills involving money. Materials: Small container with a lid; Basic art supplies (scissors, construction paper and crayons); A pair of dice; and 12 ten sen per pupil. Procedure: (i) Teacher holds up some coins and asks pupils to identify them. Review the monetary value of each combination of coins. (ii) Ask pupils to make their own piggy banks out of the small containers. Give one to each pupil and let them decorate their piggy bank with the art supplies.
  • 149.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 149 (iii) Put three ten sen inside each pupil's bank and place 9 more outside their banks. Ask them to determine the value of their coins. (iv) Roll the dice to determine how much money they will have in the bank. Pupils will then put in or take out the appropriate number of sen from their bank. (eg. Roll a six and they will put in three more sen). Ask them to count the number of remaining sen outside the bank. (v) Conduct several trials. Allow them to take turns to roll the dice. (vi) When they are done, collect all the sen and allow your pupils to take home their banks. Assessment: Observe pupils as they place the appropriate amount of money in their banks. 7.2.1 Adding Coins and Notes (Worksheet) What can you buy with the money in the box? Use the following worksheet (see Table 7.4) and ask your pupils to add up the sums of money on the left before matching the correct amount with the price of the items on the right. Table 7.4: Matching Activities RM 7, 10 sen, 20 sen, 20 sen (40 sen) RM 1, RM 2, RM 5, 10 sen, 20 sen (RM 8.30)
  • 150.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 150 5 sen, 10 sen, 10 sen (RM 7.50) 10 sen, 10 sen, 20 sen (25 sen) 7.2.2 Subtracting Coins and Notes The following worksheet (see Table 7.5), can be used to teach the skill of subtracting coins and notes. Table 7.5: Subtracting Coins I Have I Buy Money Left 50 sen, 20 sen, 20 sen 45 sen _______ sen RM 5, 50 sen RM 3.50 sen RM _______
  • 151.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 151 RM 1, RM 5 RM 2 RM _______ 7.2.3 Finding Balance within RM10.00 The following worksheets provide practice for finding the change or balance within RM10.00. Write down the amount of change you will get back in Table 7.6. Table 7.6: Working Out the Change Item I Gave My Change 85 sen 50 sen, 20 sen, 20 sen _______ sen RM 3.50 RM 5 RM _______
  • 152.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 152 RM 1.20 RM 1.50 sen _______ sen Name _____________________________ Date ___________________ Buying Food and Getting Change Show your pupils the following food with their respective prices. 40 sen 5 sen 35 sen 40 sen 5 sen Draw an X on the change received after buying the items pictured, see Table 7.7.
  • 153.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 153 Table 7.7: Getting the Change Purchase These Items Pay Change Got Back 1. 100 sen 2. 25 sen 3. 50 sen 4. 25 sen 5. 75 sen USING MONEY (SPENDING MONEY AND CONSUMER MATHEMATICS LESSONS) 7.3 Allow pupils to learn and practise their money spending skills by using various worksheets, lesson plans, lessons, activities and exercises on spending money. Spending money is an interesting way to reinforce pupilsÊ basic mathematical skills such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, division and other skills including reading comprehension. Therefore, it is important to let children learn practical consumer mathematical skills including buying and bartering for goods or services. Children are not born with Âmoney senseÊ. They learn by what they see, hear and experience and parents have a very strong influence on all of these. Childhood is the appropriate time to learn about money management, when parents are able
  • 154.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 154 to provide them with learning experiences that will benefit them in years to come. Family councils are an excellent way to help children learn how to manage money. This can be done by helping them understand what money means, how to make wise and satisfying choices, how to use money to get things important to them and how to have money on hand for daily needs as well as for emergencies and future needs. Children need to have money of their own to learn how to manage it. An allowance is a better teaching method than simply giving children money upon their request. An allowance for children should be a set amount, paid out regularly and not tied to regular tasks required of the child. When deciding on the amount of an allowance, discuss what items would be covered. The amount should be large enough so that the child has money to manage with no strings attached. Money should not be used as a means to discipline, such as an incentive for good grades or as a reward for doing household tasks. If money is used in this manner, a child will get the idea that everyone and everything has a price tag. In addition, money should not be used to buy love or as a substitute for companionship. Suggestions: Using Your Own Money (a) What do you spend your money on? (b) Keep an account book for a week to find out what you spent on. (c) How much do you save each week? (d) Where do you put your savings? (e) What are you saving your money for? Date Money In Date Money Out Record how much you receive Record what you buy, what it costs
  • 155.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 155 A dash of humour will certainly make your lessons more interesting. Some jokes on money are given below: Jokes Where do you find money? In the dictionary under M Where do fish put their money? In the riverbank Which is the richest insect in the world? The centipede 7.3.1 Changing Money Changing money is a skill that needs to be reinforced amongst children. Let us take a look at the following scenario/situation: Nina and her friends save money for charity. Nina has 132 sen. The bank changes them for her. She gets: 1 one ringgit, 2 one sen and 3 ten sen We write: RM1.32 Ringgit sen We put a decimal point between the ringgit and the sen when writing out the value for the amount of money saved. 7.3.2 Lessons on Counting and Making Change One of the more difficult but basic money skills is understanding how to make change and knowing how much change you will receive when spending money and purchasing an item or items. Use these worksheets and lessons to help your pupils learn how to make change. Practice is available with coins and notes. Learn to make change for a ringgit. Teach by creating your own money Worksheets and Interactive lessons.
  • 156.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 156 Please note that making change requires more advanced money skills. Prior to using these lessons, pupils should have mastered other more basic money skills, including identifying coins and bills in the main Âcounting money lessonsÊ category. Enrichment Activity: (a) Fund Raiser Allow the pupils to decide on how to raise money and the cause. Discuss: Where will the money go to? (Perhaps having a charity function or a class trip, for example.) (b) Discuss how pupils earn money. How many people receive an allowance? Create a class graph on the amounts of allowance received. Analyse the results. What do pupils do with their allowance? (c) Distribute a Worksheet. Pupils should be familiar with money right from preschool days. They should be taught to recognise and know the values of various coins and notes of the Malaysian currency. Classroom experience should aim at helping pupils clear their misconceptions in order to formalise their daily experiences involving money. Activities like trading games including buying and selling are effective in helping pupils to understand the concept of money. Various active learning experiences such as games and hands-on activities with manipulation are important to help pupils consolidate their understanding of money. Allowance Budget Coins Currency Earn Purchase Savings Spend
  • 157.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 157 Try to find how money became a historical document of society when it was first issued. Have a class discussion with your tutor. Good nation development comes from good financial management and people who are highly-skilled. How can this kind of people be developed in the classroom for the future?
  • 158.
    TOPIC 7 MONEY 158 APPENDIX WORKSHEET (ENRICHMENT EXERCISE) Money in Hand Things Bought Balance
  • 159.
    Topic 8 Teaching the Measurement of Time LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Explain the historical development of measuring time and the calendar; 2. Explain the major mathematical skills for teaching the measurement of time; 3. Recognise the pedagogical content knowledge for teaching the measurement of time; 4. Identify four difficulties in teaching the measurement of time; and 5. Plan teaching and learning activities for the measurement of time. INTRODUCTION This topic will give you some ideas about teaching the measurement of time to young children. Besides basic comprehension skills in telling time, this topic also covers the history of telling time as well as the strategy of teaching and learning the measurement of time. Specifically, the major mathematical skills related to the measurement of time are as stated below: (a) Tell the time and events of the day; (b) Name the days of the week; (c) Name the months of the year; and (d) Read and write the time.
  • 160.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 160 You will find that by following this topic with its step by step approach, it will be easy to learn the ideas of teaching the measurement of time especially to kindergarten or pre-school pupils. There are many examples of teaching activities in this topic. They have been designed for application in the classroom using concrete materials through practical methods including the inquiry-discovery method, demonstration, simulation, etc. The inquiry-discovery method covers activities such as planning, investigating, analysing and discovering. The activities in this chapter will guide you as to how to create a good and conducive classroom environment in order to teach the topic of ÂTimeÊ more efficiently. A discussion of the history of measuring time, the concept of events of a day, telling time, the days of the week, the months of the year and the calendar, etc. is included. In addition to hands-on materials such as the wall clock, models of clocks and the calendar, you are also encouraged to find some other materials like online calendars or tasks from websites to make your teaching more interesting, meaningful and enjoyable. There are many types of tasks which are suitable as consolidation activities such as games, songs, etc. and samples of worksheets are provided as well. Completing this topic will make you more confident in teaching the measurement of time. HISTORY OF MEASUREMENT OF TIME 8.1 In this section, we will further discuss the historical development of measuring time and calendar in further detail. 8.1.1 Historical Development of Measuring Time Prehistoric man came up with a very primitive method of measuring time by simple observation of the stars, changes of the seasons, plus day and night. It was necessary for them to plan their nomadic activity, farming, sacred feasts, etc. Before clocks and watches existed, the earliest measurements of time were made using the sundial (see Figure 8.1), the hourglass, the sand clock, the wax clock and the water clock. In early times, the forerunners to the sundial were poles and sticks, as well as, larger objects such as pyramids and other tall structures. Later, the more formal sundial was invented. It was generally a round disk marked with the hours like a clock. However, the ancient Egyptian sundial clock (3100 B.C.) shape was quite different from the Chinese sundial (1100 B.C.).
  • 161.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 161 Figure 8.1: The sundial Source: Mok (2005) The hourglass used in England 1200 years ago was made up of two rounded glass bulbs connected by a narrow neck of glass between them. When the hourglass was turned upside down, a measured amount of sand particles streamed through from the top to the bottom bulb of the glass (see Figure 8.3). Figure 8.2: The sand clock Source: Mok (2005) Another ancient tool for measuring time was the water clock or the clepsydra shown in Figure 8.3, found during the Roman civilisation (200BC). It was an evenly marked container with a spout in which water dripped out. As the water dripped out of the container, one could note what time it was by looking at the water level against the markings.
  • 162.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 162 Figure 8.3: The clepsydra Source: Mok (2005) The more advanced clocks known as mechanical clocks, which used weights or springs, came into existence in the 1300s. At first, they had no faces and no hour or minute hands, rather they struck a bell every hour. Later, clocks with the hour, and then the minute hands, began to appear. In the 1400s, clocks with their hands controlled by a coiled spring were made. With this discovery, smaller clocks and later watches were made. In 1656, Christian Huygens invented clocks which used weights and a swinging pendulum, known as the pendulum clock. These clocks were much more accurate than previous clocks. Then, in 1761, John Harrison finally succeeded at inventing a small clock accurate enough to be used for navigation at sea. This tiny pocket watch lasted only five to six weeks. In the early 1800s, Eli Terry developed machines, patterns, and techniques that produced clock parts that were exactly alike. This drove the price of clocks way down low and allowed common people to own at least one time-keeping device. 8.1.2 Historical Development of the Calendar The oldest calendar in history was designed by the Egyptians around 4000BC. It had only 360 days, based on observation of the movement of the sun. It was later modified and improved by the Romans. The Roman calendar (46BC) contained 365 days in a year with one day added for February every four years. Each month contained 30 or 31 days except for February, with 28 days in a normal year and 29 days for leap years.
  • 163.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 163 People of China and Arabia also devised their own calendars which were based on the movement of the moon. Both calendars were divided into 12 months with every month containing either 29 or 30 days. The Arabic calendar or Islamic calendar (i.e. Taqwim Hijrah begins with the month of Muharram as the first month and ends with the 12th month, Zulhijjah). In 1852, Pope Gregory XIII redesigned the Roman calendar to become a new calendar known as the Gregorian calendar. One year was divided into 52 weeks. Each week contained seven days beginning from Sunday and ending on Saturday. There are 12 months in one year starting from January and ending in December. This calendar is the one that is most popular and is generally accepted as the official calendar throughout the world today. Figure 8.4 explains the chronological development of calendars starting from Ancient Egypt in 3100BC until Europe in 1582AD. Figure 8.4: Chronological development of calendars Source: Mok (2005) TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 8.2 This section will further discuss the teaching measurement of time including time of the day, telling time, time duration, days of the week, months of the year and, finally, the difficulties in teaching the measurement of time. 8.2.1 Time of the Day Children start learning about time by telling the time of the day i.e. day time and night time. This can be done by relating various phrases denoting time into their daily routines.
  • 164.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 164 MORNING I wake up in the morning. Norli goes to school in the morning. NOON It is noon, I am in school. Norli learns mathematics in school at noon. AFTERNOON I have my lunch in the afternoon. Norli goes home in the afternoon. EVENING I am playing football in the evening. Norli goes to the garden in the evening. NIGHT I do my homework at night. Norli watches television at night. MIDNIGHT We will be fast asleep at midnight. To reinforce the usage of the correct time phrases mentioned above, take some pictures and stick them on the board in sequence, starting from day time to night time. You are encouraged to use appropriate pictures to illustrate the events happening at that time according to the time given (see Figure 8.5). Figure 8.5: Different times of a day
  • 165.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 165 Guide your pupils to carry out a discussion according to the events in the pictures shown. When introducing them to telling the time of the day, include an appropriate analogue clock although they have not been taught how to tell the time yet. Figure 8.5 shows a sample of a teaching-learning material for teaching the skill of telling the time of a day to young children. SELF-CHECK 8.1 List some activities or events of the day that children always do. Explain how to conduct an effective lesson on teaching your pupils how to tell time. 8.2.2 Telling Time How do we start to teach kindergarten or young children to tell the time? Firstly, let them look back at the pictures used for teaching them how to tell the time of the day used in the previous lesson. Then teach them how to say the time shown on the clock face given in the pictures. Since they are able to count from 1 to 12, children should have no difficulty telling the time although they are usually not used to telling the time yet at this stage. Next, introduce the minute hand and hour hand on a clock face, see Figure 8.6. Figure 8.6: Clock face: Minute and hour hands Have them count the minutes on the clock in 5s and show them that every time the minute hand goes one complete round from the number Â12Ê to Â12Ê, the hour hand moves on to the next number. Then point out that every time the hour hand moves to another number, the minute hand is on the number 12. When the
  • 166.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 166 minute hand is on the number 12, it is called o'clock (of the clock) and we read the time as the number that the hour hand is pointing to, such as, 7 oÊclock, for example. They build their understanding of the measurement of time by repeated reference to the clock, using the position of the hands for hours and minutes as shown in Figure 8.7. Figure 8.7: Telling the time In addition, you may put in the digital time together with the analogue time in your teaching material (i.e. using appropriate picture cards); see Figure 8.8. Relate how to tell the time with a specific Âtime of the dayÊ, for example, 4 oÊclock in the evening, see Figure 8.6. Figure 8.8: Timeline Figure 8.9: Picture card with clock face
  • 167.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 167 Teaching the measurement of time requires repetitive hands-on experimentation. There are many types or multiple clock face manipulative for use in the classroom. The better ones have the hands geared together so that rotating the minute hand one full revolution causes the hour hand to move from one hour to the next. Children should answer questions about the time indicated on the clock, and record their responses, starting with the hour values. They should also be taught how to set the clocks according to the time given by turning the hands of the clock. Discuss different timepieces (e.g. clock, watch, timer, hourglass. Guide them to recognise the types of timepieces they have at home. Let children design a chart that displays their findings. Then, show some of the earliest instruments for measuring time using a PowerPoint presentation on the sundial, candle clock, sand clock, etc.) SELF-CHECK 8.2 Teaching time using a circular clock face with the hour and minute hands will make it easier for children to learn the measurement of time. Discuss. 8.2.3 Time Duration Figure 8.10: Time piece the hourglass Have you seen the above instrument before? Can you think of its connection to this topic? Time duration is a difficult concept to teach because the circumstances vary so much from situation to situation. There are, however, several aspects of children's lives at school and at home in which elapsed time is important. Initially, you do not need to state the duration of time in minutes or seconds specifically. At this time, just let them know about the passing of time and compare among elapsed
  • 168.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 168 times for short term events and longer timed events (in which case, you may teach them to state the period of time in hours). Events in daily life that help children to understand the concept of time duration include the following: (a) Elapsed time for: (i) Eating (e.g. Fried rice, pizza, doughnut); (ii) A movie/video/television show; (iii) A football game (or other games); (iv) Running around the field (and other distances); (v) A nap; and (vi) Various classes at school. (b) Longer time for: (i) A baby to be born; (ii) A chick to be hatched; and (iii) Bean plants to grow a metre high. Can you give some more appropriate examples of both types of time duration? Ask your children to estimate the time duration or period of time in hours. 8.2.4 Days of the Week ACTIVITY 8.1 Find attractive online calendars from any website which are suitable to be used when introducing this section in class. Do a slide presentation and discuss with your classmates. The days of the week starts with Sunday, Monday, right till Saturday. You are encouraged to introduce the days of the week using a calendar. For more interesting presentations, click on any attractive calendars on the Web e.g. Calendar for the year 2012 (United States), Utusan Malaysia Online, etc.
  • 169.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 169 Then, have the children name the days of the week on the calendar and sing a Â7 days of the weekÊ song. The teacher can make large name cards for the days of the week and have children hold them up when they recite the days of the week. The children can also parade with the cards along with the music and sing the ÂDays of the weekÊ songs too (See Figure 8.11). Figure 8.11: Example of cards sing along with the music Source: Hummingbird Education Resource The important vocabulary that you have to use in teaching the days of the week include these words: The following examples show how we use these words in daily life situations.
  • 170.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 170 (a) In statement sentences as below: (b) In question form such as: (i) Today is Thursday. What day was yesterday? Answer: Yesterday was Wednesday. (ii) Today is Wednesday. What day is tomorrow? Answer: Tomorrow is Thursday. (iii) What day comes after Friday? Answer: Saturday comes after Friday. (iv) What day comes before Saturday? Answer: Friday comes before Saturday. SELF-CHECK 8.3 Produce a suitable worksheet that can be used for teaching the days of the week.
  • 171.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 171 8.2.5 Months of the Year Figure 8.12: Example of a calendar Source: http://manhunt.wikia.com Find a suitable online calendar which can be used when introducing this section in the class, see Figure 8.12. Make use of slide presentations. There are 12 months in a year i.e. January, February, right till December. Since children are able to count from 1 to 12, there should be no difficulties in arranging all the months in sequence. However, they may face some difficulties in the spelling of the words. You may start your lesson by asking your children about the special days occurring in each month of the year. Let us look at some festive celebrations in Malaysia.
  • 172.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 172 Some other appropriate celebrations include MotherÊs Day, FatherÊs Day and ChildrenÊs Day. Find out which months they fall in. Singing varieties of songs of the Months of the Year will help children to master the learning of the months in a year easier. For example, do the actions for the song „Macarena‰ as you sing or chant the months in a year. Forming a square, repeat the song four times, see Figure 8.12. This is definitely a class favourite! Figure 8.13: Songs lyrics Source: Hummingbird Education Resource Generally, pupils are able to arrange all or most of the months in sequence from January to December, but they may also have difficulties in arranging some of the months. Thus, have them arrange a few months in sequence first and increase gradually or progressively as an exercise like the one described.
  • 173.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 173 Example: 1. Arrange the months in sequence: 2. Then, by using the questioning technique, ask them some questions as follows: (a) What is the month after March? September? July? (b) What is the month before March? September? July? (c) May comes before _____________. (d) October comes after _____________, and so on. (e) How many days are there in January? March? October? (f) Which month/s contain/s 30 days? 31 days? 28 days? 29 days? 3. Guide pupils to read and write the months using word cards, for example: 4. Finally, ask pupils to state their birthday (or any other celebrations day) and show the day on the calendar. Get them to recognise the date today! 5. Distribute Worksheet 1. 8.2.6 Difficulties in Teaching the Measurement of Time You ought to know some aspects about the measurement of time which make it difficult to be learnt amongst young children. This is because: (a) Time is an abstract concept; (b) Time is measured using a mixture of non-decimal systems such as base 12 and base 60 systems and when extended to include days, months and years, base 4, 7, 365 and 28, 29, 30 as well as 31 systems are involved; (c) Time is measured indirectly by the movement of the sun, the hands on a clock face, the changing of digits in a display, the changing seasons, etc.
  • 174.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 174 (d) Clocks come in all sorts of styles and designs some with all 12 numerals shown, (some use Roman numerals), others with only 12, 3, 6 and 9 numerals shown, and still others with no numerals at all on the clock face. ACTIVITY 8.2 Search any suitable website to find various games which are suitable to be used in the teaching and learning of the measurement of time in the classroom. Discuss your findings with your classmates. SAMPLE LESSONS OR ACTIVITIES FOR TEACHING THE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 8.3 In this section, we will discuss further the sample lessons or activities for teaching the measurement of time. Lesson 1: Telling Time in Hours Vocabulary: Hour, o'clock, minute hand, hour hand Learning Outcomes: By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Recognise the elements of a clock and explain their functions; and (b) Tell time to the hour. Materials: TeacherÊs transparency of a demo clock; PupilsÊ individual clocks (cardboard/paper plate clock faces) with arrow cards; Numeral cards (1 12); Time index cards (1 oÊclock 12 oÊclock); and PowerPoint presentations on the earliest instruments for measuring time.
  • 175.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 175 Procedure: (i) Set Induction Discuss different timepieces (e.g. clock, watch, timer, hourglass). Guide them to recognise the types of timepieces they have at home. Then show them various types of the earliest instruments for measuring time using a PowerPoint presentation e.g. sundial, candle clock, sand clock, etc. Use suitable websites. Tell them how prehistoric man measured time. (ii) Show the Big Demo Clock Ask pupils how many big numbers are on the clock? Have pupils point to the hour hand. Tell them that when the hour hand moves from one number to the next, one hour has passed. Get pupils to discuss what they can do in an hour. (iii) Have Pupils Point to the Minute Hand Tell them that when the minute hand moves from one tick mark to the next, one minute has passed. Ask them what they can do in a minute. (iv) Review Review that the minute (long-blue) hand points to the 12, while the hour (short-red) hand indicates the hour (i.e. 1, 4, 8, etc). Guide them to read the time for each time shown in the o'clock form. Later, let them write the time in words and symbols. e.g. „The minute hand points to 12‰. „The hour hand points to 1‰. „It is 1 oÊclock (or one oÊclock)‰. (v) Team or Group Work Divide the classroom into teams. Have each group of pupils make a paper plate clock face. Using a brass paper fastener, attach a tag board or construction paper hands to the centre of the plate. These clocks can then be used in various reinforcement activities. For example, as the teacher calls out a specific time, the pupils show the correct time on their clocks (adapted to a team game).
  • 176.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 176 Give each pupil a worksheet (clock faces without the hour and minute hands) and let them draw in the minute and hour hands to show the correct time. Can you suggest some exercises to be included in the worksheet? Jot down your questions and answers. (vi) Simulation Activity Write times to the hour from 1 o'clock to 12 oÊclock on index cards and a number from 1 to 12 on a tag-board square. Place the numbers 1 to 12 in a large circle to form a clock-face. Children sit around the clock formed. Give 12 children a time card each to be kept facedown. Two volunteers are needed to stand in the centre of the clock to be the hour hand (hold a long-blue arrow card) and the minute hand (hold short-red arrow card) respectively. (vii) Ask Who Wants to be the Minute Hand and the Hour Hand Show 1 oÊclock. Where should the minute hand point to? Where should the hour hand point to? Both ÂminuteÊ and ÂhourÊ hand pupils have to point to the correct number on the tag-board. Check the answer! Repeat the activity until all the children have a turn to show the time. (viii) Give out the second worksheet. (ix) Closure Have an open discussion on the importance of spending time effectively in their daily life. Lesson 2: Concept of Time and Period: Day Time and Night Time Vocabulary: Morning, afternoon, noon, evening, night, midnight. Learning Outcomes: By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Name the various parts of the day; and (b) Recognise the various parts of the day based on different daily activities.
  • 177.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 177 Materials: PowerPoint slides (pictures related to daily activities); Picture cards (activities of a day); Flash cards (written ÂmorningÊ, ÂafternoonÊ, etc.); and Clock. Procedure: (i) Set induction: Open discussion on what pupils do as a routine everyday during the day time and night time (e.g. in the morning, afternoon, noon, evening and night). (ii) Teacher shows a series of pictures related to daily activities using PowerPoint slides. Guide pupils to state what they see in the pictures, for example: Waking up in the morning, going to school, Âplaying footballÊ, etc.) (iii) Place a series of pictures related to daily activities in sequence. (iv) By referring to the pictures shown, introduce words such as morning, afternoon, noon, evening, night and midnight, see Figure 8.14. Guide pupils to place the flash cards just below the relevant picture. Figure 8.14: Word cards Guide pupils to read clearly all the events of a day by referring to the pictures given. (v) Guide the pupils to tell their own daily activities. What do you do in the morning? In the afternoon? At night? Can you tell the time? (Just let them think about the time).
  • 178.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 178 (vi) Group activity: Teacher gives a different set of daily activities to each group. Ask them to arrange the events in sequence. Let them present and read the sentences related to the pictures. (vii) Let them do some exercises in a worksheet. (viii) Closure: Open discussion on the disadvantages of wasting time for everyone. Lesson 3: Calculate the Duration of Time from a Calendar Vocabulary: Calendar Learning Outcomes: By the end of this activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Read information from the calendar given; and (b) Calculate the numbers of days in a week, the numbers of months in a year, and the numbers of days in a year. Materials: Calendar; Activity cards; Flash cards (day cards); PowerPoint slides; and Worksheet. Procedure: (i) Set induction: Show a calendar in the slides. Have them look at the calendar. Referring to the calendar, begin by asking questions: What do you see in the calendar? What is the purpose of a calendar? Do you have any calendars at home? What types of calendars do you have?
  • 179.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 179 (ii) Lead a discussion and guide pupils to tell the information in the calendar (e.g. Show a calendar for the month of January 2012). Introduce the concept of ÂweekÊ and ÂmonthÊ. A week starts from Sunday to Saturday. How many days are there in a week? How many weeks are there in a month? How many days are there in the month of January? (iii) Show the complete calendar for the year 2012. Give them a piece of the calendar (or photocopy of the calendar in A4 paper) each. How many months are there in a year? Can you count the number of days in the year 2012? Tell me how. (iv) Group activity (groups of four five persons): Give them the seven-day name cards (Sunday, Monday, , Saturday). Ask them to arrange the days of a week using the day cards in sequence. How many days are there in a week? (Seven days). How many days are there from Sunday to Wednesday? How many days are there from Wednesday to Friday? Guide them to count the number of days using their day cards. There are four days from Sunday to Wednesday. There are three days from Wednesday to Friday. (v) Repeat with other sequence of days in a week. Let them record their answers in Table 8.1.
  • 180.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 180 Table 8.1: Number of Days From To Number of Days Sunday Wednesday Monday Thursday Wednesday Friday Thursday Saturday Tuesday Saturday (vi) Have a quiz among the groups to ensure they have mastered the skills that they learnt today. (vii) Distribute a worksheet as homework. Have them complete their own calendar. Example: (viii) Closure: Lead a discussion about the importance of calendars in our daily life. Conceptual understanding on the meanings of the measurement of time is very important because it will help pupils to learn this topic more efficiently and meaningfully. Pupils may easily learn to tell the time by reading the numerals on the clock, tell the days of a week on the calendar, and so on, but the important thing is how they will understand and use the concept of the measurement of time in their daily life. You need to pay attention to these aspects when you are planning the lessons.
  • 181.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 181 Gregorian Calendar Hour Hand Minute Hand OÊclock 1. List down the pupilsÊ prior knowledge for learning the measurement of time. 2. List down two difficulties in teaching the measurement of time. You are asked to plan a lesson according to the learning outcomes below: (a) Recognise the days of a week (b) Read and write the days of the week Write your lesson plan. (You have to focus on the set induction, development and consolidation aspects).
  • 182.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 182 APPENDIX WORKSHEET 1. Fill in the blanks with the correct days of the week. 2. Write the correct answer in each box. (a) Tomorrow is Friday. Today is (b) The second month of the year is (c) Yesterday was Saturday. Today is (d) The month that comes before May is
  • 183.
    TOPIC 8 TEACHINGTHE MEASUREMENT OF TIME 183 (e) The month that comes after December is (f) The fifth month of the year is (g) is the month of my birthday.
  • 184.
    Topic 9 Three Dimensional Shapes (3D Solids) LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Discuss the importance of geometry in solving daily life problems; 2. Explain why the teaching of geometry should be introduced at primary school level; 3. List down childrenÊs levels of understanding and learning geometry; and 4. Plan instructional strategies and teaching-learning activities pertaining to geometry for kindergarten or pre-school and early primary school children. INTRODUCTION We live in the world of three dimensional (3D) shapes or solids. Everything around us is in the form of solids such as the house we live in, the garden, the trees, the cars, the fruits and the furniture we use. The round shape of an apple we consume, the cylindrical shape of a pencil we use to write with and the cubical shape of the thick books that we read are all examples of 3D shapes around us. Most of the objects around us are three dimensional solids and occur as either regular or irregular solids.
  • 185.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 185 SHAPES OF THE WORLD 9.1 Our world is made up of three dimensional (3D) shapes or solids with dimensions of length, breadth (width) and thickness (depth). Solids have either flat or curved surfaces. Cornflakes containers, classrooms, tables, cupboards and match boxes of cubical or cuboidal shapes are examples of solids with flat surfaces. Other 3D solids of spherical shapes with curved surfaces include globes, tennis balls, footballs, cones and cylinders whilst examples of 3D solids of oval shape are eggs or rugby balls. We have to understand more about shapes around our world. Shapes and figures change when looked at from different perspectives. As newborns open their eyes, they would either be looking directly at their mothersÊ faces as a plane or two-dimensional (2D) shape or be directly exposed to 3D solids from the front view. Slowly as they grow older, children will develop more advanced geometric thinking and better understand the concept of geometry dealing with solids, shapes and space applicable in the world they live in. SELF-CHECK 9.1 How do architects, engineers or designers interpret the graphic drawings of 2D shapes in 3D models of houses, apartments, cars, aeroplanes, ships and tankers? Discuss. WHAT IS GEOMETRY? 9.2 Geometry is a branch of Mathematics. It is the study of angles and shapes formed by the relationship of lines, surfaces and solids in space as defined in LongmanÊs Dictionary. Geometry is the exploration or investigation of space or discovery of patterns and the relationship of shape, size and position or place in space. These are observed in and derived from the immediate environment and the much wider world, both natural and Âman-madeÊ. The teaching of geometry is the development of experiences, skills and processes for children to enable them to operate and understand their world or environment better. It is thus essential that children learn about geometry and its wide applications in real life well so as to be better equipped for the future.
  • 186.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 186 ACTIVITY 9.1 Think of some examples of real-life applications of geometry. Discuss the importance of geometry in real life. THE TEACHING OF GEOMETRY 9.3 The purpose of teaching geometry in primary and secondary schools is to help children acquire knowledge, provide basic concepts of geometry and critical geometric thinking that will improve the childrenÊs ability to manipulate their 3D environment. Since geometry is a branch of mathematics, it should be integrated within the Mathematics syllabus for KBSR and KBSM. The teaching of geometry should be done early at pre-school or primary level to be continued to secondary school and higher level education. The following are various reasons why geometry should be taught in schools: (a) Problem solving, the ability to solve daily life problems, is an important skill to be mastered by all children. Learning mathematics and geometry will prepare children to solve problems they face or are confronted with everyday in real life as stated by Tom Cooper (1986). (b) Solving geometry problems involve the manipulation of shapes and visual imagery within a geometric framework. A strong foundation in Geometry is thus necessary. (c) Learning about geometry and its applications to real life provides the basic knowledge and geometric understanding vital for application in future careers especially in the technical and vocational areas. Understanding geometry is essential in the fields of navigation and exploration. Geometry comprises important elements or essential knowledge for astronauts, pilots, sea navigators, architects, engineers, mathematicians, carpenters, interior decorators, models and fashion designers. ACTIVITY 9.2 How do children learn geometry? Why should children learn geometry in stages? Explain.
  • 187.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 187 THE TEACHING AND LEARNING OF GEOMETRY 9.4 When preparing experimental tasks or planning learning activities for young children, teachers have to take special consideration of the childÊs intellectual development as a frame of references. According to Jean PiagetÊs Model (1964-1967), a childÊs experience, living environment and biological maturation will all influence his or her development of geometric thinking and understanding, which are: (a) Level of development of mathematical abilities and understanding of geometric concept; and (b) Level of conceptual development within geometry, and perception of geometric properties and relationships within oneÊs environment. Children should thus be learning the concepts in stages. 9.4.1 The Learning of Geometry Integration of Jean PiagetÊs research, Van Hiele's Model and other research findings will be the basis for designing instructional tasks and learning experiences for young children. There is no one universal theory in designing the teaching strategies or learning activities of geometry. Thomas Fox (2000) suggested that instructional tasks should be in line with the childrenÊs ability or their level of reasoning. Hannibal (1999) suggested the importance of language, vocabulary and description in helping childrenÊs development of defining and categorising features of shapes. 9.4.2 Van Hiele’s Model of Learning Geometry Pierre van Hiele and Dina van Hiele-Degolf are two Dutch educators who provided guidance in designing the instruction and curriculum of geometry. The Van HielesÊ work which began in 1959 attracted a lot of attention especially in the Soviet Union (Hoffer, 1983). Today, the Van Hiele theory has become the most influential factor in designing the curriculum for geometry worldwide. Pierre and Dina van Hiele believed that children should learn geometry in five levels or stages. Learning activities must be in progressive stages and avoid gaps resulting in confusion. Hypothesis
  • 188.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 188 showed that when children miss certain stages of these experiences, they would face obstructions in their progress in understanding geometric concepts. According to research by the Van Hieles, teachers or educators must provide children in elementary or primary school with at least the first three stages in the process of learning geometry. Instruction and learning activities should be well planned according to the pupilsÊ level of geometric thought. Pupils will successfully learn geometry when they are given the opportunity of a good learning environment and the right experiences according to Andria Troutman et al. (2003). Van HieleÊs five levels of geometric thought are explained in Table 9.1: Table 9.1: Van HieleÊs Five Levels of Geometric Thought Level Description Level One Visualisation This is the basic level where children recognise figures by looking at their appearance. They are able to identify the shapes of two dimensions or three dimensions through visualisation. Their ability to identify shapes is basic depending on the sense of sight or feeling without understanding the geometric properties of each figure. Level Two Analysis At this level, children are able to classify or group depending on the characteristics of shapes or figures but they cannot visualise the interrelationship between them. Level Three Informal Deduction After undergoing the first two levels, visualisation and analysis, children are able to establish or see interrelationships between figures. They are able to derive relationships among figures followed by simple proofs but not with complete understanding. Level Four Deduction PupilsÊ mental thinking and geometric thinking develop significantly. They can understand the significance of deduction, the role of postulates, theorems and proofs. They are able to write proofs with understanding. Level Five Rigour Pupils are now able to make abstract deductions and understand how to work in axiomatic systems and even non-Euclidean geometry can be understood at this level.
  • 189.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 189 TEACHING STRATEGIES OF GEOMETRY Although we live in a three dimensional (3D) environment, learning about geometry can be very difficult and confusing to young children. This topic will provide kindergarten or preschool and year one primary school teachers the overview of teaching geometry to children four to seven years of age. Since there is no universal theory for the teaching of geometry, this topic will guide and expose teachers to a few research findings and models as a knowledge base in designing instructional teaching experiences and tasks for different age groups. Before designing or planning teaching and learning activities for young children, teachers have to know their pupilsÊ background experiences, living environment and their levels of thinking. The childrenÊs intellectual development and their levels of understanding will be the basis or the framework in designing geometric thinking. Learning geometry is even more critical and very important since it provides tools for critical thinking and analysis for problem solving in real world situations. The teaching of geometry to young children can be formal within the mathematics classroom or during informal activities at the canteen, playground or other outdoor venues. The introduction of simple geometry concepts can be within their environment or the childÊs natural settings. It can be integrated while they are playing in the playground, painting, acting in a drama, story-telling or having a puppet show. Tom Cooper (1986) suggested the following teaching approaches in line with the levels of Van HielesÊ Model, see Figure 9.1. Figure 9.1: Approaches for teaching geometry 9.5
  • 190.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 190 KINDERGARTEN OR PRE-SCHOOL GEOMETRY Children at the early age of four to seven years old are unable to visualise shapes or solids. To them, shapes or solids Âlook alikeÊ or Âare similarÊ and confusing. The spatial concepts of solids and space are still undeveloped in young children of three, four and five years of age. They cannot visualise shapes from different perspectives or do not possess visual imagery as yet. The way children learn about geometry is through exposure or appropriate learning activities and experience. Teachers have to plan and choose appropriate learning activities and suitable materials for relevant tasks to develop childrenÊs understanding of topology, simple Euclidean concepts and discovery of the properties of shapes, solids and space. Andria Troutman (2003) suggested that activities for kindergarten or preschool children should be of three kinds (see Table 9.2): Table 9.2: Andria Troutman's Three Kinds of Activities for Kindergarten or Pre-school Children Activity Description Refine topology ideas ChildrenÊs experience of indoor and outdoor activities will enhance childrenÊs understanding about topology, space and directions. Such activities help children to use relative prepositions and vocabulary such as enclosed boundary, inside, outside, adjacent, beside, between, from above, under, bottom, etc. Well-planned activities will help children to use suitable prepositions, whether written or oral, to describe where the object is located in space. These activities will facilitate the development of childrenÊs spatial sense. Extended geometric knowledge of simple Euclidean and topological ideas It is the study of shapes, size, direction, parallelism, perpendicular lines and angles. They can visualise and differentiate between shapes of triangles, rectangles, squares and trapeziums. Discover properties and relationships of geometric figures Children learn about three dimensional shapes by seeing or through observation (visualisation). They will observe the properties of the shape and study how they behave. Suitable materials and appropriate activities such as matching, sorting, fitting and altering shapes allow children to discover relationships and properties of shapes. 9.6
  • 191.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 191 Children have not developed the ability to understand the conservation of length, area, volume and proximity at this stage. Through appropriate drawing and painting activities, children can refine many properties of geometric figures. Drawings of young children show that mountains, trees, houses, and cars are smaller than flowers or themselves. Spatial relationship among objects within space is not established among young children yet but they begin to structure and order in space. During the process of a childÊs development, these three types of activities should be integrated with the respective geometric concept and relevant manipulative materials. Besides the commercially made or manufactured materials, it is important that teachers make geometry materials that will provide for a better and wider range of teaching aids to enhance their pupilsÊ understanding. TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES FOR PRE-SCHOOL GEOMETRY 9.7 A wide range of teaching and learning activities can be used for teaching Geometry at pre-school level. Various learning outcomes to be achieved pertaining to the learning of pre-school Geometry include: (a) Identifying shapes using the surface area and exploring the relevant solids; (b) Matching and labelling each shape and solid through discovery; (c) Identifying similarities and differences between shapes and solids; and (d) Using the correct vocabulary and language to describe shapes and solids during activities. Some samples of teaching and learning activities suitable for teaching Geometry to pre-school children are described below. Activity 1: Identifying and Matching Shapes and Solids Learning Outcome: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Match and label each shape and solids given.
  • 192.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 192 Materials: Sets of playing blocks as shown in Figure 9.2; Pencils; Sets of coloured pencils or crayons; and A4 paper. Procedure: (i) Divide the children into small groups of four to five pupils each. (ii) Each group will get a set of playing blocks, a set of coloured pencils or crayons, a piece of A4 paper and pencils for each pupil. (iii) Get pupils to match the surface area of the solids (blocks) to the respective template or hole in the circular box (see Figure 9.2). Teacher will facilitate the activities and give instructions to guide them while doing the activity. This activity should take about 10 15 minutes. (iv) Children in their groups will insert the blocks into the appropriate hole and each pupil should be given the opportunity to explore and discover on their own. Figure 9.2: Set of playing blocks (v) When they are done, check the childrenÊs findings. Point to one of the holes and ask the pupils to choose or select the suitable or appropriate block from the pile, see Figure 9.3 (a).
  • 193.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 193 Figure 9.3 (a): Set of shapes of templates and playing blocks Check to confirm the pupilsÊ understanding. Repeat with other solids and let them try to fit into the respective hole of the shapes, see Figure 9.3 (b). Figure 9.3 (b): Set of playing blocks and shapes of templates (vi) Guide pupils to label and identify the shapes and solids given using their pencils and the piece of A4 paper. Activity 2: Visualise Shapes and Solids Learning Outcomes: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Identify and label each shape and solid given; and (b) Use the correct vocabulary and language to describe the relationship between 2D shapes and 3D solids. Materials: Set of trace blocks; Set of solids; A4 paper; Pencils; Coloured pencils/crayons; and Names of shapes and solids (word cards).
  • 194.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 194 Procedure: (i) Let the children trace the surface area/shape of the blocks on the piece of A4 paper, match and then compare with that on the circular box, see Figure 9.4 (a). Figure 9.4 (a): Set of playing blocks and shapes of surface area (ii) Introduce appropriate vocabulary and guide pupils to label each shape and solid with the correct geometrical terms (word cards). Use relevant language to describe the relationship between the 2D shapes and 3D solids. (iii) Using arrows, match or pair the shapes with the correct solids. The colour clue for respective pairs of shape and solid will guide the children to pair them up. Ask them to look at the similarities between them. Encourage them to use the right vocabulary and language in their descriptions, see Figure 9.4 (b). Figure 9.4 (b): Matching activity: Match the correct surface area to the playing block (iv) Match the shape and solids by colouring the correct pairs with the same colour, see Figure 9.4 (c). Figure 9.4 (c): Matching activity: Colour the correct pairs
  • 195.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 195 At this level, introduce new vocabulary and use correct language to describe each solid and the respective surface area. Encourage them to use the new vocabulary and work in groups, only then can they freely communicate with each other during the play activities. Activity 3: Naming and Labelling of Solids Learning Outcome: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Name and label each solid given. Materials: Models of 3D solids; and Names of 3D solids. Procedure: (i) Naming and labelling of solids: Before this activity, teachers must introduce the correct geometrical terms and vocabulary for every solid using flash cards or suitable teaching aids. Teacher describes and explains to the young children simple procedures for identifying and naming the solids. The features of solids will give the solid its name and this can be used to identify them, see Figure 9.4 (d). Numbers can be introduced to describe the geometric features. For instance, a cube has 6 equal surfaces and a cuboid has 3 pairs of equal surfaces. Then, let them ÂdiscoverÊ the ideas and features for themselves. Check their understanding using worksheets or handouts.
  • 196.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 196 Figure 9.4 (d): Matching activity: Match solid to name (ii) Naming of solids: Rearrange the letters (or spelling) to form the name. Ask the children to rearrange the letters to form the names of the solids from the flash cards. Each flash card bears a single solid and scrambled letters. (see Figure 9.5). Figure 9.5: Naming of solids Activity 4: Relationship and Properties of Shapes and Solids Learning Outcome: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Group given shapes and solids according to their similarities and differences.
  • 197.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 197 Materials: Models of 3D solids; and Cut-outs of 2D shapes. Procedure: (a) Grouping shapes and solids according to their similarities and differences. Promote group discussion: Children in their groups will discuss similarities between different solids. They will have to group the solids according to their similar properties and how they behave. Each solid has certain properties of its own. For example, circular prisms can roll, possess a circular surface, with or without edges and do not have any vertices. Prisms have flat surfaces, edges plus vertices and can stand still on their surfaces. Teachers will guide children to classify them into different groups according to their similarities and differences (See Table 9.3). Allow children or give them time to discuss and improve their oral communication, so they are able to use suitable language and vocabulary to describe the relationship and properties of shapes and solids. Table 9.3: Grouping Activity: 2D Shapes and 3D Solids Types Circular/Oval Cylinders Triangular Prisms Quadrilateral Prisms Polygonal Prisms 2D Shapes 3D Solids
  • 198.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 198 TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES FOR ELEMENTARY GEOMETRY 9.8 Some teaching and learning activities for Elementary Geometry are discussed here. 9.8.1 Learning Areas for Elementary Geometry Skills related to the learning of Elementary Geometry generally extend from what is learnt in pre-school and include the following: (a) Naming, labelling and using the correct vocabulary for describing each 3D solid; (b) Describing features or parts of solids including classifying and grouping shapes according to similarities and differences; and (c) Ability to assemble and explain types of shapes used to build models and relate models to solids in real life. 9.8.2 Elementary Geometry: Early Experience of Space and Shape With respect to the learning of Elementary Geometry, three levels of the Van Hiele model discussed earlier are emphasised: (a) Level One (Visualisation) Identifying 3D shapes by intuitive understanding of symmetry and perspective. At this level, children are guided to identify geometric figures through various activities that enable them to visualise shapes, name them, use correct vocabulary and differentiate them from other shapes. (b) Level Two (Analysis) Analysing the attributes of geometric figures and introducing simple concepts of proximity, separation, direction, size, length, line, enclosure, properties and spatial ideas. (c) Level Three (Informal Deduction) ChildrenÊs ability to compare geometric figures covers visualising similarities and differences, developing basic concepts on spatial ideas and
  • 199.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 199 simple Euclidean concepts as well as the transformation approach on extended concepts of geometry. Teachers have to develop effective and creative teaching materials to enhance pupilsÊ learning and understanding of geometric concepts. Models or manipulative teaching materials as illustrated below are required to promote the mental reasoning mentioned above (See Figure 9.6). Figure 9.6: Set of 3D models or manipulative 9.8.3 Cycle for Teaching Elementary Geometry Figure 9.7 shows the cycle for teaching 3D solids. Figure 9.7: Cycle for teaching elementary geometry
  • 200.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 200 9.8.4 Early Geometry Activities In general, activities for learning early Geometry at primary level are mostly extensions of pre-school activities and are concentrated on achieving the following learning outcomes: (a) Identifying and naming solids; (b) Making skeletons and opaque solids from straw and play dough (coloured plasticine); (c) Recognising and describing parts of solids; and (d) Building models of solids. Some practical activities are described in the following section. Activity 1: Naming of Solids Learning Outcome: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (i) Identify and name solids. Materials: Blocks of solids/3D shapes; Pictures of solids/3D shapes; Play dough (multi-coloured); Chart; and Sets of flash cards (Vocabulary/Name cards). Procedure: The following activities are suitable for group activities. (i) Identifying and naming solids: This activity is in line with Level One (Visualisation) of the Van Hiele model. Teacher will give one flash card and a set of solids to every group and ask the children to choose an appropriate solid from the pile. Then, get them to stick the flash card on the board and display the chosen solid. (ii) Repeat the activity until all the solids have been identified and named.
  • 201.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 201 (iii) Each group will be given a chart as shown in Table 9.4 and a set of picture cards of various solids; pupils have to match and name the appropriate solids accordingly. Table 9.4: Set of 3D Models or Manipulative Cube Cuboid Tetrahedron Pyramid Cylinder Cone Sphere At this level, children are guided to identify geometric figures through the visualisation of 3D shapes. (iv) Identifying and naming each figure: Encourage discussion among the children. Use correct vocabulary and suitable language to describe the features and properties of solids. Guide them to identify or differentiate the solids from the other shapes. Activity 2: Analysing Similarities within a Group of Solids Learning Outcomes: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Identify the properties of groups of solids e.g. cubes, cuboids, pyramids, cones, cylinders, spheres; (b) Make solids from play dough; and (c) Compare the differences within and between groups of solids e.g. triangular and quadrilateral prisms, etc. Materials: Blocks of solids/3D shapes (cubes, cuboids, pyramids, cones, cylinders, tetrahedrons, prisms, spheres); Pictures of solids/3D shapes (cubes, cuboids, pyramids, cones, cylinders, tetrahedrons, prisms, spheres); Play dough (multi-coloured); Chart; Sets of flash cards; Vocabulary (Name cards/word cards); and Worksheet.
  • 202.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 202 Procedure: (i) Visualisation: (Properties of Solids) Teacher guides pupils to visualise and explore the properties of a set of solids one by one and record the properties in a chart. Introduce appropriate vocabulary including face, edge, corner, etc. to describe the properties of solids. Repeat the steps for each solid in the set comprising cube, cuboid, pyramid, tetrahedron, cone, cylinder and sphere. (See Table 9.5 for a more detailed description of the procedure outlined in step (i)). Table 9.5: Procedure for Step (a) Level Teacher Pupils Visualisation of shapes or figures 1. Teacher shows a cube 2. Introduce appropriate vocabulary to describe the properties of a cube. 3. Ask pupils to count and record the number of faces, corners and edges of a cube and write a summary. 4. Teacher shows a cuboid next and repeats steps 2 and 3. 5. Repeat the activity until all the solids in the set have been explored in sequence. Note: Pictures of 3D solids can be used in place of 3D models. 1. Pick out a cube and other similar solids out of the pile. same shape or size similar size (bigger or smaller size) 2. Label the corner, face and edge of the cube accordingly. 3. Record a summary of the properties of the cube e.g.: 6 flat faces 8 corners 12 edges 4. Pick out a cuboid and repeat the steps above for the solid chosen. 5. Repeat each step as above for each solid displayed in sequence.
  • 203.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 203 (ii) Learning experience: Making solids from play dough Group activity: Using 3D solids as samples, guide pupils to produce various solids as listed below: Cube; Cuboid; Triangular Prism; Quadrilateral Prism; Pyramid; and Tetrahedron. Guide pupils to explore the properties of each solid made. (iii) Comparing differences within and between groups of solids. Using the solids made in Step (ii) or other models, guide pupils to compare the similarities and differences within and between groups of solids. Begin with comparing triangular prisms with quadrilateral prisms. Ask pupils to record the properties of both solids by analysing the surface area (2D shapes) and the respective 3D solids as in Table 9.6.
  • 204.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 204 Table 9.6: Comparison Chart Triangular Prisms Quadrilateral Prisms 2D Shapes 3 sides 3 edges 3 corners 4 sides 4 edges 4 corners 3D Solids 5 flat surfaces 6 vertices 6 flat surfaces 8 corners or vertices sets of 3 pairs (surfaces) 12 edges (iv) Repeat the above step and compare different groups of solids e.g. cubes with cuboids, pyramids with tetrahedrons, etc. (v) Distribute worksheet to pupils. Activity 3: Building Models and Nets of Solids from 2D Shapes Learning Outcome: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Build models and nets of solids (cuboids and cubes) from 2D shapes. Materials: Blocks of solids/3D shapes (e.g. cubes, cuboids, pyramids, cones, cylinders, tetrahedrons, prisms, spheres); Objects: pencil box; Cardboard; A4 paper (multi-coloured); Pencils; and Worksheet.
  • 205.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 205 Procedure: (a) Always guide young children on how to relate solids of three dimensions (3D) to shapes of two dimensions (2D). The visualisation of cuboids can be attained by using a pencil box to represent the cuboid. Let pupils rotate, visualise and trace the shapes from different perspectives by looking at the cuboid from different orientation or from different elevations i.e. top, front and side, see Figure 9.8 (a). Step 1: Visualisation Figure 9.8 (a): Views of a cuboid from different perspectives Step 2: Trace surfaces of a cuboid (i) Trace the surfaces of the cuboid from the top and bottom to get two similar faces. Cut the traced shapes and slide the two pieces over one another to check if they are congruent and similar, see Figure 9.8 (b). Figure 9.8 (b): Top and bottom views of the cuboid
  • 206.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 206 (ii) Trace the surfaces from the left and right sides of the cuboid. Cut the traced shapes and slide the two pieces over one another to check if they are congruent and similar, see Figure 9.8 (c). Figure 9.8 (c): Left and right side views of the cuboid (iii) Trace the surfaces from the front and back elevation (looking from the front and back/behind). Cut the traced shapes and slide the two pieces over one another to see if they are congruent and similar, see Figure 9.8 (d). Figure 9.8 (d): Front and back views of the cuboid Step 3: Match and relate the traced surfaces for geometric reasoning Figure 9.8 (e) shows how to trace the surfaces of the cuboid.
  • 207.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 207 Figure 9.8 (e): Traced surfaces of the cuboid Step 4: Attach the traced surfaces on to the cuboid/pencil box and make a net of a cuboid The cuboid/the pencil box has six surfaces (3 pairs of similar surfaces), refer Figure 9.8 (f)). Figure 9.8 (f): Net of the cuboid (b) Using the same procedure as in (a), produce nets of a cube like the ones shown in Figure 9.9: Figure 9.9: Nets for the cube
  • 208.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 208 Activity 4: Drawing 3D Solids Learning Outcomes: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Draw 3D solids with the help of essential tools like graph paper and GSP; and (b) Identify the 3D solids drawn using GSP. Materials: PowerPoint slides (3D shapes: prisms); Graph paper/square dot paper/isometric dot paper; and Computer software, GeometerÊs Sketchpad (GSP). Procedure: (a) Identifying 3D shapes by intuitive understanding of symmetry and perspective. Let pupils look at some animated pictures of 3D solid from a PowerPoint presentation (e.g. cubes, cuboids, triangular prisms, pyramids, tetrahedrons). Have an open discussion about symmetry and perspective to guide pupils to identify and name the 3D shapes shown in the slides. The drawing of solids will be easier for young children with the help of graph paper, square dot paper or isometric dot paper and computer software, such as the GeometerÊs Sketchpad (GSP). The GSP is often used as a tool to draw regular and irregular prims of 3D solids. Figure 9.10 shows some examples of solids drawn using the GSP. Teach pupils how to draw the figures one by one.
  • 209.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 209 Figure 9.10: Examples of regular and irregular prisms drawn using GSP (b) Ask pupils to identify the 3D solids drawn. Activity 5: Build Skeletons for 3D Solids Learning Outcomes: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Build skeletons for 3D solids (e.g. cubes, cuboids, pyramids, tetrahedrons, triangular prisms); and (b) Make a summary of the properties for each skeleton of the 3D solids made. Materials: Play dough or plasticine; and Drinking straws. Procedure: (i) After the drawing of solids, a suitable follow-up activity will be the the making of skeletons of 3D shapes using drinking straws and play dough as illustrated in Figure 9.11. All properties of solids (corners/vertices, edges and flat surfaces will be discussed here).
  • 210.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 210 Figure 9.11: Examples of skeletons of 3D solids (ii) Ask pupils to name each of the skeletons of 3D solids and make a summary of the properties for all the skeletons constructed. Activity 6: Building Opaque Models of Solids Learning Outcomes: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Make solids from play dough; (b) Build models using a combination of various solids; and (c) Recognise and describe parts of solids. Materials: Play dough or plasticine (multi-coloured); 3D blocks or solids (wooden/plastic); Picture card chart of 3D solids (regular and irregular prisms, non-prisms); and Flash cards (name cards/word cards). Procedure: (i) Distribute some play dough or plasticine and a picture card chart/guide to each group of pupils. Let pupils make models of 3D solids using play dough or plasticine based on the picture card chart.
  • 211.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 211 (ii) Using the 3D models constructed or ready-made 3D blocks (wooden/ plastic), make models like the ones displayed in Figure 9.12. (iii) Creative play: Allow pupils to indulge in free-play and make models of their own using the play dough or plasticine. Figure 9.12: Examples of opaque models of 3D shapes (iv) Ask pupils to label and describe the parts of the solids constructed using appropriate vocabulary, language, name and word cards such as cube, cuboid, triangular prism, vertex, edge, face, etc. In this topic, the theory and approaches of learning geometry are highlighted. The teaching and learning of geometry should be aligned to pupilsÊ levels of thinking. In planning instruction or teaching and learning activities, teachers have to consider the childrenÊs logical thinking, their levels or stages of learning geometry, their biological maturation as well as their living environment. A few research findings and models of teaching geometry are integrated within this model as reference and as a basic framework for teachers when designing instruction or teaching and learning activities. During the earlier part of the topic, discussion focused on the importance of learning geometry and the use of geometric concepts to solve real life problems. The concepts of geometry and spatial sense, incorporated with numerical literacy, should be introduced to children at an early age.
  • 212.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 212 Teaching strategies of three dimensional (3D) shapes or solids for young children are suggested under various sub-headings. Examples of teaching and learning activities for geometry given in this topic, take into account the theory and childrenÊs levels of thought, starting from kindergarten or pre-school and extending to early primary school. Apex Area Boundary Capacity Cone Corner Cube Cuboid Cylinder Edge Oval Polygon Polyhedron Prism Solid Sphere Symmetry Tessellate Tetrahedron Three dimensional (3D) Vertex Volume List three levels of teaching geometry for early primary or pre-school and suggest a suitable learning activity for each level. Pupils learn the concept of geometry while playing with and building models using the three dimensional solids. Think of a strategy to teach Euclidean Geometry to young children through play.
  • 213.
    TOPIC 9 THREEDIMENSIONAL SHAPES (3D SOLIDS) 213 APPENDIX WORKSHEET 1. Draw lines to match each 3D shape with the correct description.
  • 214.
    Topic 10 Two Dimensional Shapes (2D) LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Explain the shape and space in daily life; 2. Identify shapes using the correct vocabulary related to 2D shapes; 3. Classify two dimensional (2D) shapes; and 4. Describe the teaching and learning of shape activities. INTRODUCTION Look at things around you. How do they appear or look like? Almost everything around you is in the form of solids or in three-dimensional form, but topologically, they can be described as two dimensional shapes. What does an apple, an ice-cream cone, a star fruit and a ball look like to small children? Are children able to name and relate logically between three dimensional solids and two dimensional shapes? SHAPE AND SPACE IN DAILY LIFE 10.1 Understanding the environment we live in is very important as we live in an environment made up of shape and space. Take a look at the things around you many objects around are either in the form of two dimensional shapes or three dimensional solids. Some pertinent questions come to mind. How do young children see things surrounding them? How do they develop geometric thinking and mental reasoning about shapes? How does the human mind, or thinking, change and make connections between 3D solids and 2D shapes? Things like cauliflower, cabbage and broccoli are usually spherical in shape like that of a ball,
  • 215.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 215 see Figure 10.1 (i.e. 3D in shape) but at certain angles, they may look like the face of a clock (i.e. 2D in shape)! Figure 10.1: Spherical 3D solids can be viewed as circular 2D shapes SPATIAL SENSE How do we deal with the space around us? To understand more about spatial sense, let us consider a few situations. How are bags and luggage arranged in the compartments of an aeroplane to accommodate all baggage checked in? How do we ensure that we can walk into a laboratory or classroom without stumbling over instruments and furniture? Why do drivers position their cars on the right lane of the road in order to avoid tragic accidents? Why is it we cannot simply drive on the road without getting a driving licence first? One has to apply spatial sense to be safe on the roads. To acquire a driving licence, we have to undergo several tests and practise driving for hours under the supervision of experts before we can drive independently and safely on the roads. SELF-CHECK 10.1 Spatial sense is defined as an intuition about shape and the relationship among shapes, including our ability to mentally visualise objects and spatial relationships by turning things around in our minds. It is about our feeling of geometric aspects of objects and shapes that appear within our surroundings or our living environment. (Walle and Lovin, 2006) 10.2 1. What is meant by geometric spatial sense? 2. Why is geometric spatial sense important for understanding our environment?
  • 216.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 216 Spatial sense is spatial perception or spatial visualisation that helps students to understand the relationship between objects and their locations in three dimensional worlds. (Kennedy and Tipps, 2006) Geometry has several applications in real life. Spatial sense is spatial visualisation or spatial perception that helps children in understanding their world. Furthermore, spatial sense is an imaginary visualisation of object orientation in our minds. People with good spatial sense are able to analyse, using their geometric reasoning and ideas to appreciate nature, space exploration, home decoration, architecture, art and design. It promotes creativity in art and design. One is also able to imitate and transfer a bouquet of flowers into 2D shapes, see Figure 10.2. Figure 10.2: Bouquet of flowers ACTIVITY 10.1 Do your pupils/young children have spatial sense? Is spatial sense innate in children or do we have to teach spatial sense in the classroom? Discuss. Next, carry out the following task. Take a look at the pictures shown in Figure 10.3.
  • 217.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 217 Figure 10.3: Pictures of objects Show these pictures to your pupils. Ask them to arrange the pictures in ascending order according to their size in real life. Discuss and look out for your pupilsÊ spatial reasoning when doing the arranging. The answer: (picture frame door Eiffel Tower) If their arrangement is as such, how did they know that Eiffel Tower is the biggest/ tallest among the three things? Have they ever visited Eiffel Tower? Did they use their spatial sense when arranging the pictures in ascending Get your children to look closely at the picture of the rabbit and ask them whether it is possible that the size of the rose (flower) can be bigger than the rabbit in reality. GEOMETRIC THINKING order? 10.3 Geometry recognition is part of the primary mathematics curriculum. The aim of introducing two dimensional shapes in the primary school curriculum is to develop the pupilsÊ reasoning and spatial sense with respect to geometry since geometric practical applications are very useful in everyday life. Most of the mathematics primary curriculum incorporates number systems and numerical thinking as a foundation into the teaching of geometry. The development of the human mind on geometric concepts and reasoning of solids and shapes encompasses two basic areas, (see Table 10.1).
  • 218.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 218 Table 10.1: Two Basic Areas of Human Mind on Geometric Concept Basic Area Description Visual spatial thinking This happens on the right hemisphere of the brain that is associated with literature and can occur unconsciously without one being aware of it. It can operate holistically and intuitively, with more than one thing at a time and is literally called simultaneous processing. Verbal logical thinking This lies on the left hemisphere of the brain consisting of continuous processing and one is always aware of it. It operates sequentially and logically and is related to language or symbols and numbers. Gardner proposed that the multiple intelligence of spatial ability can be developed through experience. Children are able to explain and demonstrate their discoveries after seeing how things work and observing their properties. The levels of thought, or childrenÊs thinking, is the basis for the instructional activities at primary school level. The Van Hiele Theory: Levels of Geometric Thinking Figure 10.4 explains the level of geometric thinking according to Van Hiele. Figure 10.4: Van HieleÊs levels of geometric thinking According to Pablo Picasso, „Observation is the most significant element of my life, but not just any kind of observation‰. This means that certain observations or the way we look at things will form a visual image that can be used in the study of mathematics and its applications.
  • 219.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 219 GEOMETRIC SYSTEMS Children learn geometry at primary level which can be divided into four separate geometrical systems as suggested by many mathematicians (Kennedy and Tipps, 2000), as described in Table 10.2. Table 10.2: Four Separate Geometrical Systems Geometrical System Description Euclidean geometry Euclidean geometry is the geometry of shapes and objects in a plane (2D) or in space (3D). It is about the properties or the characteristics of objects, points and lines, circles and spheres, triangles, polygons, pyramids, cylinders, cones and other solids. Shapes have properties including similarities and congruence, length of sides, number of parallel sides, lines or rotational symmetry. Coordinate geometry It is about the location of shapes on coordinate or grid systems. Coordinate geometry ranges from simple to complex uses that define the location of an object on plane coordinates of the vertical and horizontal axes for 2D shapes or the positioning of objects on grid systems for three dimensional spaces. Complex uses of coordinate geometry include the location of vessels in the Pacific Ocean or the location of a travellerÊs camp at the Antarctic or the grid location of Mount Everest. Transformation geometry Transformation geometry is about geometry in motion. It describes the movement of shapes or objects in a plane or in space. Objects or shapes in motion can be transformed by flipping (reflection), sliding or gliding (translation), and turning (rotation) or a combination of these transformations in many different ways. For example, during an aircraftÊs landing or departing, it slides on the runway, flips and turns in the sky or exhibits a combination of movements in different ways. Topological geometry Topological geometry describes the locations of objects and their relations in space or the recognition of objects in the environment. Children view everything and their perceptions relative to their standing positions or locations in space. It focuses on the development of the childrenÊs mental understanding, the use of extensive vocabulary, giving descriptions of objects in space, as well as the size and position of objects within their perspectives. The use of vocabulary to describe the locations of objects in space include words such as: far-near, high-low, big-small, above-below, inside-outside or in front, in between, front and behind, etc. 10.4
  • 220.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 220 ACTIVITY 10.2 Group discussion: The teaching of geometry covers four areas of geometric systems and must be aligned to the Van HieleÊs theory of levels of thought. In groups, discuss how to integrate the teaching of the concept of geometry with any two areas underlined. GEOMETRIC CONTENT The Primary Mathematics curriculum touches on the simple concept of geometric systems. The Geometric content for primary schools focuses more on Visualisation and Euclidean Geometry, as well as Van HieleÊs theory of childrenÊs thinking. The sequence of teaching geometric content and the teaching of concepts at primary school level is as illustrated in Figure 10.5. Figure 10.5: Sequence of teaching geometry in primary schools 10.5
  • 221.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 221 Visualisation covers the recognition of shapes in the environment, classification, sorting and naming of shapes. Euclidean geometry is the study of shapes and their properties. Advance concepts of topological geometry, Euclidean Geometry, coordinate and transformation geometry will be taught at secondary school or at higher levels. The Geometric Content includes: (a) Identifying shapes sorting, classification and grouping; (b) Knowing and naming shapes (vocabulary): (i) Triangle (types of triangles); (ii) Rectangle (quadrilaterals); (iii) Polygon; and (iv) Circle and ellipse. (c) Identifying geometric properties of shapes; (d) Classification and grouping; and (e) Shapes in the environment. THE TEACHING AND LEARNING OF SHAPES 10.6 The learning of shapes is the second stage for children learning about geometry. The teaching and learning of geometry should be associated with the childrenÊs levels of thinking and the four areas of geometric systems described earlier. As a teacher, we have to understand our pupilsÊ levels of thinking and mental reasoning before teaching them the concept of two dimensional shapes. Both hemispheres of our pupilsÊ minds must be stimulated. Exposure and experience through investigation and discovery will promote pupilsÊ learning. Some suggested teaching-learning activities for helping children to develop or consolidate ideas and further understanding of geometrical concepts are highlighted. There should be a progressive development of activities and a proper sequence for introducing concepts, starting from basic geometric concepts to the highest level of geometric problem solving.
  • 222.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 222 Learning Activities The following are some suitable learning activities: (a) Contextual learning children look around and observe the environment plus describe in words what they have seen. (b) Explore and experiment with shapes (visual images) in order to gain insight into the properties and their uses. (c) Analyse shapes informally, observe size and position in order to make inferences; then refine and extend knowledge that develop from various learning activities. Introduction of three dimensional shapes must be done earlier or before the teaching of 2D shapes. The concept of two dimensional shapes can be developed from three dimensional shapes. Shapes that can be introduced to pre-school or early primary level include those easier concepts that are commonly found within their environment. Figure 10.6: Different views of the surface area of faces of a cuboid A teacher should always guide young children on how to relate solids of three dimensions (3D) to shapes of two dimensions (2D). As described previously in Topic 9, for the visualisation of cuboids, pencil boxes can be used to represent cuboids. Pupils can be encouraged to rotate, visualise and trace the shapes from different perspectives by looking at them from different orientations or from different sides or elevations (see Figure 10.6).
  • 223.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 223 TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 10.7 Geometric thinking and spatial reasoning can be developed through formal or informal activities. A good instructional activity includes good planning, appropriate activities and a variety of selection of effective teaching materials. The learning of geometric concepts can be incorporated into the childrenÊs activities such as playing activities, discussion, role play, music activities, dramas as well as art and design activities while they are actively involved. Teaching and learning activities suggested here cover the four areas mentioned earlier and can be modified to teach 2D shapes to pre-school and early primary school children. Part I: Euclidean Geometry 10.7.1 Identifying Shapes – Sorting, Classification and Grouping Shape is generally defined as Âspace within an enclosed boundaryÊ. Shapes are drawn on a flat surface called a plane. Two dimensional plane geometry is about shapes like lines, circles and triangles. As such, shapes can be enclosed by straight or curved lines. Shapes enclosed by only straight lines are called polygons. Other shapes are known as non-polygons. The activities described here are geared towards achieving the following learning outcomes with respect to 2D shapes: (a) Identify 2D shapes, i.e. figures with closed boundaries; (b) Sort and classify 2D shapes; (c) Discover features and properties of 2D shapes; (d) Identify similarities and differences of shapes between groups; and (e) Use correct vocabulary and language while doing activities. Activity 1.1: Identifying 2D Shapes Learning Outcomes: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Identify and colour 2D shapes i.e. figures with closed boundaries; and (b) Count how many figures there are with closed and open boundaries.
  • 224.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 224 Materials: Exercise sheet: Set of shapes (open and closed figures); and Colour pencils. Procedure: (i) Distribute the Exercise sheet (see Figure 10.7), containing examples of various shapes to the pupils. (ii) Ask pupils to colour the shapes with closed boundaries and count how many shapes there are with closed boundaries and how many there are without. Figure 10.7: Set of shapes This activity is an early introduction to the concept of shapes whereby shapes are identified as figures that have closed boundaries. Children have to colour all the shapes with closed boundaries and leave out those with open boundaries. This activity serves to give a clear picture to young children about 2D shapes. ACTIVITY 10.3 Play the game of Look Around. Children who can spot the most number of 2D shapes will be the winner.
  • 225.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 225 Activity 1.2: Sort and Group 2D Shapes Learning Outcomes: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Sort, group and classify shapes to discover their features and properties. Materials: Set of 2D shapes/Cut-outs of 2D shapes; A4 paper/manila cards; and Vocabulary (Word cards). Procedure: (i) Sort and group the shapes. Place the sorted shapes under the respective categories on the pieces of A4 paper/manila cards provided. Use common features for grouping the shapes into various categories: Triangles, Quadrilaterals/Rectangles, Polygons and Non-polygons/Enclosed boundaries (see Figure 10.8). (ii) Discuss what is interesting about each group? Figure 10.8: Examples of 2D shapes (iii) Ask simple questions and guide pupils to describe in simple words the common features used for sorting and grouping shapes: How many groups of shapes are there? What are the special features of the figures or shapes in each group? What are the common features within each group? Is there any difference between the groups?
  • 226.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 226 (iv) Say in simple sentences or describe clearly the special features of each group. (v) Encourage the children to say in simple words what they understand about the interesting features of the shapes. (vi) Ask pupils to look for similarities and differences within and between the groups. (vii) Introduce simple geometric words and correct vocabulary to help pupils to describe the features and propertries of the shapes. (viii) Check the answers for the grouping of 2D shapes: For example as shown in Figure 10.9: Figure 10.9: Grouping of shapes under different categories (ix) Distribute worksheet to reinforce the concept learnt. 10.7.2 Knowing and Naming Shapes (Vocabulary) Introduce different types of shapes and let pupils look for features and properties to identify the various groups of shapes. At this level, only simple geometry is used and the shapes shown here are to be considered as extra knowledge for teachers.
  • 227.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 227 Activity 2.1: Identifying Polygons Polygons are two dimensional flat surfaces with length and breadth or width. Polygons have special names based on the number of angles and the number of sides (straight edges) that enclose them. A triangle is a polygon with the least number of points and sides to form a closed boundary, followed by quadrilaterals, pentagons, hexagons, heptagons, octagons, nonagons, decagons, dodecagons, etc. Other figures known as non-polygons also have enclosed boundaries but with sides that are circular and elliptical. Here, various examples of polygons and a few non-polygons are illustrated in Table 10.3 (to be used as teacherÊs notes). Table 10.3: Examples of Polygons and Non-Polygons Triangle 3 points 3 sides Quadrilateral 4 points 4 sides Pentagon 5 points 5 sides Hexagon 6 points 6 sides Heptagon 7 points 7 sides Octagon 8 points 8 sides Nonagon 9 points, 9 sides Decagon 10 points, 10 sides Hendecagon/Undecagon 11 points, 11 sides Dodecagon 12 points Non-polygons: Circle, Ellipse and other shapes Enclosed boundaries
  • 228.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 228 Most of the polygons shown in Table 10.3 are irregular plane figures or polygons where all the sides and angles are not of equal measure. Regular polygons have sides that are all equal in length and angles that are all equal in measure. Figure 10.10 shows an example of a regular and irregular hexagon. Figure 10.10: Regular and irregular hexagons ACTIVITY 10.4 Stop and Have Fun! Activity: Shapes of games Take your pupils outside and play these games: (a) Shape jumping (b) Track to the moon (c) Play ting-ting
  • 229.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 229 1. Shape jumping Lay out a few sets of shapes (coloured, hard cardboard) on the floor. Call out the shapes and jump to land on the shape called out e.g. triangles, quadrilaterals, polygons, curved shapes. 2. Track to the moon Lay out a few sets of plane figures (coloured, hard cardboard) on the floor. Call out the shapes and Jump and sing the Jumping song: Names of shapes. 3. Play ting-ting Number and shapes Jump in steps. Count the number of sides, corners and angles. Discuss special features of regular rectangles (squares). Activity 3: Vocabulary for Naming Shapes This activity is to enhance childrenÊs understanding on different types of shapes for each group and the differences between various classes of shapes. Provide the opportunity for pupils to look for special features and properties as well as learn the names of shapes. Learning Outcomes: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Identify different types of shapes (triangle, quadrilateral, polygon, etc.); (b) Name shapes; (c) Discover features and properties of shapes; (d) Identify special features and properties of each group of shapes; (e) Identify similarities and differences of shapes between groups; and (f) Use correct vocabulary and language while doing activities.
  • 230.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 230 Materials: Geoboard (safety nail pegs), see Figure 10.11; Coloured rubber bands (see Figure 10.11); and Vocabulary cards: (Names of shapes; properties of shapes). Figure 10.11: Geoboard and rubber bands Procedure: (i) Take a rubber band and form shapes using the pegs on the geoboard. (ii) Name and label the shapes made using appropriate vocabulary cards. (iii) Identify the features or properties of the shapes labelled. Activity 3.1: Triangles Learning Outcomes: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Discover features and properties of triangles; (b) Identify special features and properties of triangles; and (c) Use correct vocabulary and language to describe triangles. Materials: Rubber bands; Geoboard; Grid paper; and Vocabulary cards: (names of shapes, labels of properties).
  • 231.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 231 Procedure: (i) Ask pupils to use three points and a rubber band to form a triangle. (ii) Then, ask them to form different types of triangles see Figure 10.12 (a) - and draw the shapes on grid paper. (iii) Guide them to look for properties of triangles, classify and describe the triangles made. Figure 10.12 (a): Examples of triangles A. TeacherÊs Instructions: A triangle is a shape with three points (see Figure 10.12 (b)), three corners and three straight sides.
  • 232.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 232 Figure 10.12 (b): Examples of triangles B. TeacherÊs notes: Extra information on types of triangles. Types of Triangles These are triangles, each of them has three straight sides, three corners or three vertices but they are all different. There are many types of triangles e.g. equilateral, right angle triangle, isosceles, acute, obtuse or scalene triangle (see Figure 10.12 (c)). At this level of visualisation, we want young children to be able to use their senses to observe differences and similarities between the shapes within a group. It may seem difficult to explain the different types of triangles but at this level, children only have to understand that there exists special properties for triangles and that there are many different types of triangles (see Figure 10.12 (d)).
  • 233.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 233 Figure 10.12 (c): Types of triangles Figure 10.12 (d): Classification of triangles Activity 3.2: Matching Triangles Learning Outcomes: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Identify special features and properties of different types of triangles; and (b) Use correct vocabulary and language to describe the types of triangles. Materials: Exercise sheet Matching activity; and Vocabulary cards (Names of shapes, labels of properties).
  • 234.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 234 Procedure: (i) Can you see any differences between those four triangles in the upper row? Look at them closely look for similarities and differences between them. (ii) Try to match those on the upper row by drawing arrows to those shown in Figure 10.13. Figure 10.13: Matching activity: Types of triangles Activity 3.3: Quadrilaterals Learning Outcomes: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Discover features and properties of quadrilaterals; (b) Identify special features and properties of quadrilaterals; and (c) Use correct vocabulary and language to describe quadrilaterals.
  • 235.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 235 Materials: Rubber bands; Geoboard; Grid paper; and Vocabulary cards: (names of shapes, labels of properties). Procedure: (i) Ask pupils to use 4 points and a rubber band to form a quadrilateral. (ii) Then, ask them to form different types of quadrilaterals see Figure 10.14 (a) - and draw the shapes on grid paper. (iii) Guide them to look for properties of quadrilaterals, name and describe the quadrilaterals made, (see Figure 10.14 (b) and Figure 10.14 (c)). Figure 10.14 (a): Examples of quadrilaterals
  • 236.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 236 A. TeacherÊs Instructions: Figure 10.14 (b): How to make the quadrilaterals Figure 10.14 (c): Examples of quadrilaterals shapes Activity 3.4: Polygons Learning outcomes: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Discover features and properties of polygons; (b) Identify special features and properties of polygons; and (c) Use correct vocabulary and language to describe polygons. Materials: Rubber bands; Geoboard; Grid paper; and Vocabulary cards (names of shapes, labels of properties).
  • 237.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 237 Procedure: (i) Ask pupils to use five points and a rubber band to form a pentagon. (ii) Then, ask them to form different types of polygons using six pegs and more, see Figure 10.15 and draw the shapes on grid paper. (iii) Guide them to look for properties of polygons, name and describe the polygons made. Figure 10.15: Examples of polygons Activity 3.5: Curved Shapes: Circle and Ellipse Learning Outcomes: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Discover features and properties of non-polygons or curved shapes e.g. circle, ellipse; (b) Identify special features and properties of non-polygons or curved shapes; and (c) Use correct vocabulary and language to describe non-polygons or curved shapes. Materials: Picture card: Set of pictures of curved shapes; Vocabulary cards: Names of shapes (circle, semicircle, ellipse); and Vocabulary cards: Features/properties (crescent/lunar/cloud/heart shape).
  • 238.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 238 Procedure: (i) Ask pupils to look at the set of curved shapes in the picture card distributed. Explore and observe shapes through visual images to gain insight to their properties. Look for similarities and differences (see Figure 10.16). (ii) Guide them to look for properties of non-polygons, name and describe the non-polygons shown. Introduce names, vocabulary or the language of geometry for describing non-polygons or curved shapes shown. (iii) Count the total number of faces, the number of similar faces and slowly introduce names and properties of the curved shapes. Figure 10.16: Examples of non-polygons or curved shapes Shapes in the Environment ACTIVITY 10.5 Colour and print shapes of the environment Use any 3D solids or objects from the environment. Cut and colour the cross-sections or longitudinal sections of objects e.g. (star fruits, pears, banana stems, potatoes, leaves). Then, print them on to a piece of drawing paper. Use your creativity. Are they shapes of the environment? The learning of geometric concepts will be easier if pupils are actively involved in the fun learning process using appropriate teaching materials from the environment, such as the use of common materials from the childrenÊs environment like potatoes, star fruits, pears or banana stems as materials for drawing and painting shapes (see Figure 10.17).
  • 239.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 239 Cross-sectional or longitudinal cuttings of: Figure 10.17: Cross-sectional or longitudinal cuttings of objects Part II: Transformation Geometry The following activity allows children to have some fun with shapes, with respect to motion geometry, where the learning of geometric concepts is incorporated into childrenÊs play. Activity 4.1: Fun with Shapes: The Most Powerful Spinning Propeller (Motion Geometry) Learning Outcomes: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Construct propellers of different shapes: semi-circular shape, crescent (lunar) shape, heart shape and arrow shape; and (b) Discover which shape forms the most powerful spinning propellers. Materials: Instruction cards for making different shaped propellers; Plastic glass; Manila card; Coloured paper/Fancy cards; Straws; Pencils; Pins; and Plasticine.
  • 240.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 240 Procedure: (i) Divide the children into four groups of five. (ii) Ask each group to prepare different shapes of propellers as follows: Group 1 : semi circular shaped propellers; Group 2 : lunar shaped propellers; Group 3 : heart shaped propellers; and Group 4 : arrow shaped propellers. (iii) Using their finished products, ask pupils to blow on to the propellers to see which propellers will spin the fastest. Group 1 Figure 10.18 (a), Figure 10.18 (b), Figure 10.18 (c) and Figure 10.18 (d) explain the steps in making the semi-circular, lunar, heart and arrow shaped propellers for each of the four groups. Figure 10.18 (a): The making of semi-circular propellers
  • 241.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 241 Group 2 Figure 10.18 (b): The making of lunar-shaped propellers Group 3 Figure 10.18 (c): The making of heart-shaped propellers Group 4 Figure 10.18 (d): The making of arrow-shaped propellers
  • 242.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 242 Finished Products Figure 10.18 (e) shows the finished products of the different shaped propellers from each group. Figure 10.18 (e): Different shaped propellers Part III: Coordinate Geometry An activity about coordinate geometry dealing with the location of places or destinations is described next. Activity 5.1: Location of Places Learning Outcomes: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Explain the location and state the direction of places from a picture map. Materials: Picture map; and A4 paper. Procedure: (i) Distribute the picture map (see Figure 10.19) to your pupils. (ii) Ask them to study the map and explain the location of the places stated in the map to a tourist who lands at KLIA. (iii) Discuss in detail the location and direction of those places.
  • 243.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 243 Figure 10.19: Picture map Part IV: Topological Geometry The last area of geometric concept to be discussed concerns topology and touches on the location of objects according to a relative standing position in space. Activity 6.1: Location of Shapes Learning Outcomes: At the end of the activity, pupils should be able to: (a) Describe the locations and state the positions of objects with respect to a relative standing position from the picture provided. Materials: Picture card; A4 paper; and Vocabulary cards: (positional words e.g. behind in front, left right, far near, beside adjacent, etc.).
  • 244.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 244 Procedure: (i) Ask pupils to colour the shapes according to the colour scheme given i.e. (triangles green, quadrilaterals red, polygons light blue, circles dark blue, and ellipses yellow) or any scheme of their choice in the picture card as shown in Figure 10.20. (ii) Count the number of figures for every group of shapes that appears in the picture. (iii) Topology concept: Discuss the site or the location of objects in the picture from the girlÊs standing position i.e. behind in front, left right, far near, beside adjacent, etc. (iv) Ask pupils to describe and state the positions of objects using appropriate vocabulary. Figure 10.20: Picture card This topic of two dimensional shapes discusses spatial sense in detail, how we understand our world, childrenÊs level of thinking and the teaching of geometry concepts within four geometric systems, which are: (a) Euclidean Geometry; (b) Transformation Geometry;
  • 245.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 245 (c) Coordinate Geometry; and (d) Topological Geometry. Examples and activities suggested are within the primary school curriculum prescribed especially for pre-school and early primary school levels. Teachers are encouraged to develop good lesson plans, creative and effective teaching activities to suit pupilsÊ interest and their ability to understand the geometric aspects of their surrounding and the environment. Acute Angle Apex Base Boundary Circle Cone Corner Edge Equilateral Triangle Hexagon Isosceles Triangle Rectangle Scalene Triangle Sphere Square Symmetry Tessellate Triangle Two Dimensional Vertex (Vertices (p)) As an early childhood mathematics school teacher, you have to plan teaching and learning activities that covers the teaching of geometric concepts for the four geometric systems. Suggest suitable teaching and learning activities that can be carried out to enable the children to acquire the geometric concepts discussed. Teaching activities and teaching materials should be creative and effective based on respective learning outcomes.
  • 246.
    TOPIC 10 TWODIMENSIONAL SHAPES (2D) 246 The teaching of geometric concepts has to be aligned to childrenÊs levels of thought, pupilsÊ experience and their geometric reasoning ability. List three learning activities that can suit the criteria mentioned. APPENDIX WORKSHEET 1. Count the shapes. Fill in the blanks with the correct numbers: (a) There are _____ circles. (b) There are _____ rectangles. (c) There are _____ squares. (d) There are _____ triangles. (e) There are _____ stars.